IPECS MG Инструкция по программированию (англ. язык)

IPECS MG Инструкция по программированию (англ. язык)
-MG
Administration
&
Maintenance Manual
Regulatory Information
Before connecting the iPECS-MG to the telephone network, you may be required to notify your local serving
telephone company of your intention to use "customer provided equipment". You may further be required to
provide any or all of the following information:
PSTN line Telephone numbers to be connected to the system
Model name
iPECS-MG
Local regulatory agency registration number
Ringer equivalence
1.0
Registered jack
RJ-45
locally provided
The required regulatory agency registration number is available from your local representative of LG-Nortel.
This equipment complies with the following regulatory standards, TBR21. Also, this equipment complies with
the safety requirements of EN60950-1, EN55022 and EN55024.
If the telephone company determines that customer provided equipment is faulty and may possibly cause
harm or interruption in service to the telephone network, it should be disconnected until repair can be
affected. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service.
The local telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities or procedures. If these
changes could reasonably be expected to affect the use of the iPECS-MG or compatibility with the network,
the telephone company is required to give advanced written notice to the user, allowing the user to take
appropriate steps to maintain telephone service.
The iPECS-MG complies with rules regarding radiation and radio frequency emission as defined by local
regulatory agencies. In accordance with these agencies, you may be required to provide information such
as the following to the end user.
WARNING
"This equipment generates and uses R.F. energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the
Instruction Manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the appropriate limits for a telecommunication device. The limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference, when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area could cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to
take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference."
Copyright© 2009 LG-Nortel Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved
This material is copyrighted by LG-Nortel Co., Ltd. (LGN). Any unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure
of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws. LGN reserves
the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by LGN in
this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases.
LGN and iPECS-MG are trademarks of LG-Nortel Co., Ltd.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Revision History
ISSUE
DATE
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
1.0
2009 12
Initial Release
ii
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table of Contents
1. Introduction...................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Manual Application................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 General .................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3 Initialization.............................................................................................. 1-2 1.4 Program Menu Structure ......................................................................... 1-3 1.4.1 Administration ...................................................................................................... 1-3 1.4.2 S/W Upgrade......................................................................................................... 1-6 1.4.3 System Management ............................................................................................ 1-6 1.5 Admin Programming Preparation............................................................. 1-7 2. Station Admin Programming ............................................................ 2-1 2.1 General .................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 LCD & Button Functions ...................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Alphanumeric Data Entries .................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.3 Required Data Entries .......................................................................................... 2-2 2.2 Data Entry Mode...................................................................................... 2-2 2.3 PROCEDURES FOR DATA ENTRY .......................................................... 2-2 2.3.1 Pre-Programmed Data – PGM CODES 100 to 108 ............................................ 2-2 2.3.1.1 Location Program -PGM Code 100 ....................................................................................2-2 2.3.1.2 Slot Assignment -PGM Code 101 ......................................................................................2-4 2.3.1.3 Logical Slot Assignment -PGM Code 103 ..........................................................................2-5 2.3.1.4 DECT/IP Phone/SIP Phone Port Assignment -PGM Code 104 .........................................2-6 2.3.1.5 IP Phone/ Phontage Registration Table -PGM Code 106..................................................2-6 2.3.1.6 DTIM/SLTM Registration Table-PGM Code 107................................................................2-7 2.3.1.7 IP Address Plan -PGM Code 108.......................................................................................2-7 2.3.1.8 System Information -PGM Code 109 .................................................................................2-8 2.3.2 NUMBERING PLANS DATA – PGM CODES 110-115 ....................................... 2-9 2.3.2.1 Numbering Plan Type -PGM Code 110..............................................................................2-9 2.3.2.2 System Numbering Plan-PGM Code 111.........................................................................2-10 2.3.2.3 Flexible Station Number-PGM Code 112 .........................................................................2-10 2.3.2.4 Feature Numbering Plan -PGM Codes 113 .....................................................................2-11 2.3.2.5 CO Group Access Code – PGM Code 114 ......................................................................2-16 2.3.2.6 Station Group Number -PGM Code 115 ..........................................................................2-16 2.3.3 STATION DATA – PGM CODES 120-152........................................................ 2-17 2.3.3.1 Station Type -PGM Code 120 ..........................................................................................2-17 2.3.3.2 Station Port Attributes, I to IV -PGM Codes 121-124.......................................................2-18 2.3.3.3 Station Flexible Button Assignment –PGM Code 126......................................................2-23 2.3.3.4 Station Number Information –PGM Code 130..................................................................2-24 2.3.3.5 Station Number Attributes –I to IV PGM Codes 131-135.................................................2-25 iii
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.3.6 2.3.3.7 2.3.3.8 2.3.3.9 2.3.3.10 2.3.3.11 2.3.3.12 2.3.3.13 2.3.3.14 Issue 1.0
Station Class-of-Service –PGM Code 137 .......................................................................2-29 Station Automatic Dial Attribute –PGM Code 138............................................................2-30 Station Preset Call Forward –PGM Code 142..................................................................2-31 Station Call Forward –PGM Code 143 .............................................................................2-32 Station VMIB Attribute –PGM Code 145 ..........................................................................2-33 Station Mobile Phone Attribute –PGM Code 146 .............................................................2-34 CO/IP Group Access –PGM Code 150 ............................................................................2-35 Internal Page Group Access –PGM Code 151.................................................................2-36 Command Group Access –PGM Code 152- ....................................................................2-36 2.3.4 CO LINE DATA – PGM CODES 160-179 ......................................................... 2-37 2.3.4.1 CO Attribute I, II, III-PGM Code 160-162 .........................................................................2-37 2.3.4.2 CO CID Attributes –PGM Code 163.................................................................................2-39 2.3.4.3 CO Incoming Attribute I, II –PGM Code 165-166 .............................................................2-40 2.3.4.4 CO Ring Assignment –PGM Code 167 ............................................................................2-42 2.3.4.5 Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attribute –PGM Code 168 ....................................................2-43 2.3.4.6 CO Incoming Alternate Destination –PGM Codes 169 ....................................................2-44 2.3.4.7 CO Outgoing Attributes I, II –PGM Code 170-171 ...........................................................2-45 2.3.4.8 CO Outgoing Alternate Destination –PGM Codes 173 ....................................................2-47 2.3.4.9 CO Outgoing Inter-Digit Timer –PGM Code 174..............................................................2-48 2.3.4.10 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer –PGM Code 175 ..........................................................2-49 2.3.4.11 CO COS Assignment –PGM Code 177............................................................................2-50 2.3.4.12 CO to CO Transfer Attributes –PGM Code 179 ...............................................................2-50 2.3.4.13 CO Group Access Code Attribute –PGM Code 180 ........................................................2-51 2.3.4.14 Alternate Ring Assignment –PGM Code 181 ...................................................................2-53 2.3.5 SYSTEM GROUP DATA – PGM CODES 200-211............................................ 2-53 2.3.5.1 Station Group –PGM Code 200 .......................................................................................2-54 2.3.5.2 Station Group Greeting/Queuing Attributes –PGM Code 201..........................................2-55 2.3.5.3 Station Group Attributes –PGM Code 202 .......................................................................2-56 2.3.5.4 Voice Mail Group Attributes –PGM Code 203..................................................................2-57 2.3.5.5 Pick Up Group –PGM Code 204 ......................................................................................2-58 2.3.5.6 Page Group –PGM Code 205 ..........................................................................................2-59 2.3.5.7 Command Call Group –PGM Code 206...........................................................................2-59 2.3.5.8 PTT Group –PGM Code 208 ............................................................................................2-60 2.3.5.9 Interphone Group –PGM Code 209 .................................................................................2-61 2.3.5.10 Pilot Hunt Group –PGM Code 210 ...................................................................................2-62 2.3.5.11 Pilot Hunt Group Forward Attribute –PGM Code 211 ......................................................2-63 2.3.6 SYSTEM DATA – PGM CODES 220-240 ......................................................... 2-64 2.3.6.1 System Timers I to III –PGM Codes 220-222...................................................................2-64 2.3.6.2 System Attributes –PGM Code 223 .................................................................................2-65 2.3.6.3 System Password –PGM Code 226.................................................................................2-66 2.3.6.4 Alarm Attributes –PGM Code 227 ....................................................................................2-67 2.3.6.5 External Control Contacts –PGM Code 228- ...................................................................2-68 2.3.6.6 Music Sources –PGM Code 229 ......................................................................................2-68 2.3.6.7 RS-232 Port Settings –PGM Code 230............................................................................2-69 2.3.6.8 Serial Port Function Selections –PGM Code 231 ............................................................2-70 2.3.6.9 SMDR Attributes –PGM Code 232...................................................................................2-71 2.3.6.10 System Date, Time –PGM Code 233 ...............................................................................2-73 2.3.6.11 Button LED Flash Rate –PGM Code 234.........................................................................2-74 2.3.6.12 ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes -PGM Code 235..........................................................2-77 2.3.6.13 MOBILE Attributes -PGM Code 236.................................................................................2-77 2.3.6.14 One Digit Service Attributes -PGM Code 237 ..................................................................2-78 2.3.6.15 Dummy Dial Tone Digit-PGM Code 240 ..........................................................................2-79 2.3.6.16 Executive/Secretary Assign -PGM Code 241...................................................................2-79 2.3.6.17 Executive-Executive Access -PGM Code 242 .................................................................2-80 2.3.7 TABLES DATA – PGM CODES 250-269 ......................................................... 2-81 iv
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.7.1 2.3.7.2 2.3.7.3 2.3.7.4 2.3.7.5 2.3.7.6 2.3.7.7 2.3.7.8 2.3.7.9 2.3.7.10 2.3.7.11 2.3.7.12 2.3.7.13 2.3.7.14 2.3.7.15 2.3.7.16 Issue 1.0
Toll Tables -PGM Code 250 .............................................................................................2-81 Digit Conversion Tables -PGM Code 251 ........................................................................2-82 Digit Conversion Options -PGM Code 252.......................................................................2-84 Time Table Attribute -PGM Code 253 ..............................................................................2-84 Weekly Time Table -PGM Code 254................................................................................2-85 LCR Time Table -PGM Code 255 ....................................................................................2-86 Holiday Time Table -PGM Code 256 ...............................................................................2-87 System Speed Table -PGM Code 257 .............................................................................2-88 Emergency Code Table -PGM Code 258- .......................................................................2-88 Announcement Table -PGM Code 259 ............................................................................2-89 Customer Call Routing Table -PGM Code 260 ................................................................2-90 ICLID Route Table -PGM Code 262.................................................................................2-90 CLI Conversion Table -PGM Code 263............................................................................2-91 Tone Port Table – PGM Code 264 (Web Admin Only) ....................................................2-92 Ring Table – PGM Codes 265-266 (Web Admin Only)....................................................2-92 Voice Mail Dialing Table -PGM Code 269........................................................................2-93 2.3.8 TENANTS DATA – PGM CODES 270-296 ...................................................... 2-95 2.3.8.1 Attendant Group -PGM Codes 270-272 ...........................................................................2-95 2.3.8.2 Night Attendant Group -PGM Codes 275-277..................................................................2-98 2.3.8.3 Tenant Attributes –PGM Codes 280-281 .......................................................................2-101 2.3.8.4 Tenant Group Access -PGM Code 283..........................................................................2-104 2.3.8.5 CO Call Restriction PGM Codes 284-285 ......................................................................2-104 2.3.8.6 Call Prefix Table -PGM Codes 286-288 .........................................................................2-106 2.3.8.7 Tenant Tone Table -PGM Code 290 ..............................................................................2-107 2.3.9 Board Data -PGM Codes 300-305.................................................................. 2-110 2.3.9.1 ISDN Board Attribute –PGM Code 300 ..........................................................................2-110 2.3.9.2 ISDN Board–Clock Priority -PGM Code 301 ..................................................................2-111 2.3.9.3 IPP Board Attribute –PGM Code 305.............................................................................2-111 2.3.10 Networking Data – PGM Codes 320-321 ....................................................... 2-112 2.3.10.1 Net Basic Attribute -PGM Code 320...............................................................................2-112 2.3.10.2 NET Numbering Plan Table -PGM Code 321 ................................................................2-113 2.3.11 TNET, Centralized Networking -PGM Codes 330-335................................. 2-114 2.3.11.1 TNET Basic Attributes -PGM Code 330 .........................................................................2-114 2.3.11.2 TNET CM Attributes -PGM Code 331 ............................................................................2-114 2.3.11.3 FoPSTN Attributes -PGM Code 333 ..............................................................................2-115 2.3.11.4 Board TNET Attributes -PGM Code 334 ........................................................................2-116 2.3.11.5 IP Phone TNET Attributes –PGM Code 335 ..................................................................2-116 2.3.12 H.323 Data – PGM Codes 360-363 ................................................................ 2-117 2.3.12.1 H.323 Routing Attributes –PGM Code 360 ....................................................................2-117 2.3.12.2 H323 Call Setup Info. -PGM Code 361 ..........................................................................2-117 2.3.12.3 H.323 Incoming Attributes -PGM Code 362 ...................................................................2-118 2.3.12.4 GK Setup Info. –PGM Code 363 ....................................................................................2-119 2.3.13 Gain & Cadence Control – PGM Codes 400-440........................................... 2-120 2.3.13.1 DKT RX Gain -PGM Code 400.......................................................................................2-120 2.3.13.2 SLT RX Gain –PGM Code 401 ......................................................................................2-121 2.3.13.3 DECT RX Gain –PGM Code 402 ...................................................................................2-122 2.3.13.4 IP-PHONE RX Gain –PGM Code 403............................................................................2-123 2.3.13.5 ANALOG CO RX Gain –PGM Code 404........................................................................2-124 2.3.13.6 DIGITAL CO RX Gain -PGM Code 405 .........................................................................2-125 2.3.13.7 VMIB RX Gain –PGM Code 406 ....................................................................................2-126 2.3.13.8 External Page RX Gain –PGM Code 407 ......................................................................2-127 2.3.13.9 DSP RX Gain –PGM Code 415......................................................................................2-128 2.3.13.10 RTP RX Gain -PGM Codes 420-426..............................................................................2-129 2.3.13.11 RTP TX Gain -PGM Codes 430-436 ..............................................................................2-133 v
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.12 SLT Ring Cadence –PGM Code 440 .............................................................................2-137 2.3.13.13 ACNR Tone Cadence –PGM Code 441.........................................................................2-139 2.3.14 DB Initialization – PGM Code 499 ................................................................... 2-140 APPENDIX A – Database Index.......................................................... A-1 APPENDIX B – Default Numbering Plan .............................................B-1 APPENDIX C – Fixed Function/User Program Codes.........................C-1 APPENDIX D – Default Values ............................................................D-1 vi
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 MANUAL APPLICATION
This manual provides detailed information on the database management of the iPECS-MG
systems. The iPECS-MG Series is available in several configurations as listed in Table 1.1-1.
Total port capacities range from the 50 channel at iPECS-MG 100 to 400 channel at iPECS-MG
300.
Table 1.1-1 System Capacity Chart
ITEMS
PIECES, MG-100
PIECES, MG-300
Rack No.
2
3
Slot No. per Rack
6
6
200
414 (if IP Phone/DECT not included)
Total Port (Extension + CO line)
564 (if IP Phone/DECT included)
Number of extension Port
120
324
Number of extension
180(Ext 120 + DN 60)
648(324 x 2)
Number of CO Line
80
240
Number of Tenant Group
5
9
Extension : 8Digits
Extension : 8Digits
Feature : 8Digits
Feature : 8Digits
Trunk : 8 Digits
Trunk : 8 Digits
5/Tenant
5/Tenant
Numbering Plan
Attendant
DSS/BLF Console
5
5
Member of conference
13 party
13 party
Internal Page zone
15
30
System speed dial
Station Speed Dial
1000
2000
(32 digits)
(32 digits)
50 (32 digits)
50 (32 digits)
Call Log
100 (32 digits)
100 (32 digits)
(Outgoing/Incoming/Missed Call)
(Not protected)
(Not protected)
Save Number Redial(SNR)
1 (32 digits)
1 (32 digits)
Number of SMDR Records
5000
5000
Max. 12Digits
Max. 12Digits
108 : Extension
324 : Extension
400 : System
800 : System
CO Group No
24
72
Station Group
20 (50 member/Group)
50 (50 member/Group)
Authorization Code
Pickup Group
20 (100 member/Group)
50 (100 member/Group)
Command Call Group
10 (12 member + 1 initiator/Group)
10 (12 member + 1 initiator /Group)
Interphone Group
10 (10 member/Group)
10 (10 member/Group)
Page Group
15 (50 member/Group)
30 (50 member/Group)
1-1
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
ITEMS
PIECES, MG-100
PIECES, MG-300
PTT Group
10 (50 member/Group)
10 (50 member/Group)
Conference Room
9
9
Number of Hot Desk Agent
60
324
Station Name Information
16 Characters
16 Characters
COS : 16
COS : 16
Digit Restriction
Allow/Deny Entry per COS : 100
Allow/Deny Entry per COS : 100
Max. Digit : 16
Max. Digit : 16
Digit Translation
Table No :5
Table No :5
Number of Digit : 16
Number of Digit : 16
300 per 1 table
300 per 1 table
1.2 GENERAL
iPECS-MG can be programmed to meet each customer's individual needs. System programming
may be accomplished by entering the “PROGRAM MODE” at an assigned Admin. Station or by
pointing a Web Browser at the system’s Main Power Board (MPB) private/public IP address. This
section provides general information. Other sections are described:
 Section 2 – provides a description for data entry using the Admin Station.
 Section 3 – provides instructions for entering data when using a Web Browser.
NOTE

Some parameters are available through Web Admin and not the Keyset Admin.

Appendix A-D – provides an index to database entries, default value charts for the
Flexible Numbering Plan, Fixed Function dial-codes and the entire database. Indices
and charts are helpful references when entering data into the system database.
1.3 INITIALIZATION
When power is applied to the system or the MPB Reset button is pressed, the system will initiate
the “Power-up” routine. During the Power-Up routine the system will check the Initialization switch
(2nd position of the MPB DIP-switch), refer to the iPECS-MG Description and Installation
Manual Section 4.2.1.2. If the switch is in the OFF position, the system will perform a simple
Power-Up routine; clear all scratch-pad memory, load run-time programs, establish
communications with each registered boards and iPECS DTIM/SLTM gateway Module and iPECS
terminal, send RESTART commands and load appropriate settings to the Modules and terminals.
If a Module or terminal does not respond after several attempts, the system places the device in an
out-of-service mode but maintains the database settings. Once the Power-up routine is complete,
the system will conduct normal operations.
If the Initialization switch is in the ON position, in place of the Power-Up routine, the system will
perform the full Initialization procedure. The initialization procedure will set the system database to
default values, refer to Appendix D. Once initialization is complete, set the initialization switch to
the OFF position to protect the database.
1-2
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
1.4 PROGRAM MENU STRUCTURE
Database Administration is accomplished by entering “PROGRAM CODES” from the dial pad of a
phone or selecting an item from the Navigation pane in iPECS-MG Web Admin pages. Items in
the Navigation pane roughly correlate with the Program codes however; certain items can only be
assigned via the Web interface.
In iPECS-MG Web Admin pages, there are three main categories: 1) Administration 2) S/W
Upgrade 3) System Management.
Data items are organized as a group with a common affect, i.e. station, system, numbering plan,
etc. Items may be further grouped forming a multi-layered menu structure as shown in the
following table.
1.4.1 Administration
ADMINISTRATION
MENU
Location Program(100)
Slot Assignment(101)
Logical Slot Assignment(103)
PRE-PROGRAMMED DATA
DECT/IP/SIP Max Port(104)
IP-Phone Registration(106)
DTIM/SLTM Registration(107)
IP Address Plan(108~109)
Numbering Plan Type(110)
System Numbering Plan(111)
Flexible Station Number(112)
NUMBERING PLAN
Feature Numbering Plan(113)
CO Group Access Code(114)
Station Group Number(115)
Station Type(120)
Station Port Attribute(121~124)
STATION PORT DATA
Station Flexible Button(126)
Station CTI IP Address
Station DN Assignment(130)
Station DN ATTR(131~135)
Station COS Assignment(137)
Station Auto Dial Attribute(138)
Preset Call Forward(142)
STATION NUMBER DATA
Call Forward(143)
Station VMIB Attribute(145)
Mobile Phone Attribute(146)
CO/IP Group Access(150)
Page Zone Access(151)
Command Group Access(152)
1-3
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
ADMINISTRATION
Issue 1.0
MENU
CO Line Attribute(160~163)
Incoming CO ATTR(165~166)
CO Ring Assignment(167)
Normal/DISA CO ATTR(168)
Incoming CO Alternative(169)
Outgoing CO ATTR(170~171)
CO LINE DATA
Outgoing CO Alternative(173)
CO Inter-Digit Timer(174)
DTMF Send Interval(175)
CO COS Assignment(177)
CO-to-CO Attribute(179)
CO Group Access Code(180)
Alternative Ring Table(181)
Station Group Assign(200)
Station Group ATTR(201~202)
Voice Mail Group(203)
Call Pick-Up Group(204)
STATION GROUP DATA
Page Group(205)
Command Conference Group(206)
PTT Group(208)
Interphone Group(209)
Pilot Hunt Group(210~211)
System Timer(220~222)
System Attribute(223)
System Password(226)
Alarm Attribute(227)
External Control Contact(228)
Music Source(229)
RS-232 Setting(230)
Serial Port Selection(231)
SMDR Attribute(232)
SYSTEM DATA
System Date & Time(233)
LED Flashing Rate(234)
PPP Attribute(235)
Mobile Attribute (236)
Intercom Busy Digit(237)
Dial-Tone Digit Table(240)
Executive/Secretary Assign(241)
Executive Access(242)
PPTP Attribute
Web Access Authorization
1-4
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
ADMINISTRATION
Issue 1.0
MENU
Toll Exception Table(250)
Digit Conv Table(251~252)
System Time Table(253~254)
LCR Time Table(255)
Holiday Time Table(256)
System Speed Dial(257)
Emergency Code Table(258)
TABLE DATA
Announcement Table(259)
CCR Table(260)
ICLID Table(262)
CLI Conversion Table(263)
Tone Frequency/Cadence(264)
Ring Table(265)
Ring Frequency/Cadence(266)
Voice Mail Dial Table(269)
ATD Group Assignment(270)
ATD Group ATTR(271~272)
Night ATD Group Assign(275)
Night ATD Group ATT(276~277)
Tenant Attribute(280~281)
TENANT DATA
Tenant Group Access(283)
CO Call Restriction(284~285)
Local Call Prefix Table(286)
Long Call Prefix Table(287)
International Call Prefix(288)
Tone Table(290)
ISDN Board Attribute(300)
BOARD DATA
ISDN Clock Priority(301)
VOIB/VMIB Board ATTR(305)
Networking Attr(320)
VOICE NETWORK
Networking Numbering(321)
T-Net Attribute(330)
CM Attribute(331)
T-NET DATA
FoPSTN Attribute(333)
T-Net Board Attribute(334)
IP-Phone T-Net Enable(335)
H.323 Routing Attribute(360)
H.323 VOIB Attribute(361)
H.324 DATA
H.323 Incoming ATTR(362)
GK Attribute(363)
SIP User ID Data(370)
SIP CO Service(371)
SIP DATA
SIP Station Attribute(380)
SIP STA Service ATTR(381)
1-5
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
ADMINISTRATION
MENU
Zone Attribute(395)
Zone RTP Relay Group(396)
ZONE DATA
Inter Zone Attribute(397)
Station Zone Attribute(399)
SNMP DATA
SNMP Data
DECT Registration(0#)
DECT DATA
DECT Attribute(491)
Green Mode Activation
GREEN MODE
Green Mode Time Setting
INITIALIZATION
Initialization(499)
1.4.2 S/W Upgrade
S/W Upgrade
File Upload
G/W Upgrade
Upgrade Process View
VMIB Prompt Upgrade
AAFU System Greeting Up & Download
BASE Upgrade
1.4.3 System Management
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
MENU
DATABASE
SMDR
FILE SYSTEM
TRACE
GAIN&CADENCE CONTROL
APPLIANCES CONTROL
DECT STATISTICS FEATURE
VOICE MAIL DELETE
1-6
Database Download
Database Upload
SMDR
File View & Delete
File System Information
Ping Test
MFIM Log View
Http Log View
Dip Switch Status
CO Line Status
Station Status
SLT Line Monitor
System KSU Status
TDM Gain(400~407)
DSP Gain(415)
RTP Gain(42x~43x)
SLT Ring Cadence(440)
ACNR Tone Cadence(441)
Lock Key Install
DECT Statistics
Voice Mail Delete
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
1.5 ADMIN PROGRAMMING PREPARATION
NOTE

All programming should be done at Station 100 (Station port #01) using KD-36D, LKD30/44, LDP-7024D, LIP-6000, LIP-7000 or LIP-8000 telephone with more 24 buttons.
The following Figure 1.5.1 is provided as a reference during Admin Programming. It displays the
LDP-7024D buttons commonly used for programming the System. A more detailed description of
these buttons is included in the LDP User Guide.
3 Soft button
LCD
Ring LED
FLEX 1
FLEX 13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FLEX 24
MIC
Speaker phone
Fixed button
Navigation button
Figure 1.5.1 Keyset Button Diagram
1-7
Flexible button
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2. STATION ADMIN PROGRAMMING
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 LCD & Button Functions
While in the PROGRAM MODE, the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and Flex button LEDs of an Admin
Station are used to guide and indicate status of the feature. The dial-pad is most often used to
enter data after selecting a data item using the Flex buttons. In some cases, pressing a Flex
button will toggle the entry with the Flex button LED indicating the status (ON/OFF).
For PROGRAM CODES with multiple Flex button selections, the volume controls ([VOL UP] and [VOL
DOWN] buttons) may be used to select the next or previous item. The [SPEED] button is generally
employed as a delete button to erase existing entries however, where noted, it may be used to
confirm a range input. Pressing the [CONF] button returns to the 1st step of the data entry procedure
for the PROGRAM CODE without storing unsaved entries.
The [SAVE] button is used to store data after entry. If there are no conflicts in the entered data,
confirmation tone will be received and the data stored. If a conflict exists, error tone is provided
and newly entered data are not saved. Generally, corrected data may be entered and stored
without restarting the entry procedure from the 1st step.
2.1.2 Alphanumeric Data Entries
In some cases, an alphanumeric entry is required. Two (2) dial-pad digits represent each
character of an alphanumeric entry, as shown in Table 2.1.2-1 below. Use the Table to determine
the two digits that must be entered from the dial-pad for each character.
Table 2.1.2-1 ALPHANUMERIC DIAL-PAD ENTRIES
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
P - 71
T - 81
R - 72
U - 82
S - 73
V - 83
Q - 7*
8 - 80
7 - 70
6 - 60
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
Blank - *1
: - *2
0-00
, - *3
2-1
#
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.1.3 Required Data Entries
During initialization a default database is established, refer to Section 1.3 and Appendix A-D.
However, there are several data entries, which MUST be completed to assure proper operation of
the system. The system employs the Country Code (refer to Section 2.3.1.1), to establish tone
and gain plans specific to the country. Also, the MPB IP address, sub-net mask and Default
Gateway (Router) IP address (refer to Section 2.3.1.7), must be assigned for proper external IP
call operation and WAN access as well as remote Web Admin access.
2.2 DATA ENTRY MODE
All data entry is accomplished from an Admin Station or station assigned for data entry (Station
Port Attributes I (PGM CODE 121, Flex button 5). After DB initialization, Station 100 (Station port #01)
may access the system database. In addition, as default, there is no Station Admin password
defined. To enter the PROGRAM MODE, from the Admin Station follow the procedure below. In the
left column of the chart are the LCD displays and in the right column are step-by-step instructions
to modify database items.
PROCEDURE:
STATION 100 (T)
16 JAN 09
04:00 PM
ENTER ADMIN PASSWORD
1.
2.
Press the [PGM] button.
Dial ‘*’ and ‘#’.
3.
Enter the Admin password. Confirmation tone is heard.
4.
To select a program, use the instructions in the following sections, starting
with “Press the [PGM] button” and dial the specified Admin PROGRAM CODE.
ADMIN PROGRAM START
ENTER PGM NUMBER
2.3 PROCEDURES FOR DATA ENTRY
The following sections provide specific instructions for entering data from the Admin Station once
in the PROGRAM MODE. Each section provides descriptive information, step-by-step instructions
and Tables for determining appropriate entries.
2.3.1 Pre-Programmed Data – PGM CODES 100 to 108
2.3.1.1 Location Program -PGM Code 100
Under Location Program, the country is identified using the international dial codes (COUNTRY
CODE). If the Country code requires changing, the system must be initialized to restructure
memory and create the country specific defaults, gain, frequencies and other system
characteristics specific to the country and regional regulatory requirements.
2-2
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
To change the Country Code:
1) Set the 2nd MPB switch to the ON position,
2) Follow the procedure below to modify the Country code,
3) Reset the system with Power OFF/ON, pressing Reset button, or pressing [PGM] 499 /
Flex 2 [SAVE].
A twenty-four (24) character SITE NAME is also defined in this program. The SITE NAME is
primarily useful for the installer/programmer as a reference to the customer.
PROCEDURE:
LOCATION PROGRAM
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 100.
2.
Select the desired Flex button (1~2), refer to table 2.3.1.1-1.
For COUNTRY CODE, refer to table 2.3.1.1-2 for appropriate entries.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data. For System Reset, press [PGM] 499
/ Flex 2, press [SAVE] to reset the System to default.
4.
To store the location data press the [SAVE] button.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
See table 2.3.1.1-1
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.1.1-1 LOCATION PROGRAM (PGM 100)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
REMARK
RANGE
NATION CODE
82
Refer to table 2.3.1.1-2 below. NOTE: the system
SITE NAME
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Refer to table 2.1.2-1 for alphanumeric dial-pad
4 digits
must be re-initialized if changed.
entries.
24
characters
Table 2.3.1.1-2 NATION CODES
NATION
CODE
NATION
CODE
NATION
CODE
Argentina
54
Honduras
Australia
61
Hong Kong
504
Peru
51
852
Philippines
63
Azerbaijan
994
India
91
Poland
48
Bahrain
973
Indonesia
62
Portugal
351
Bangladesh
880
Iran
98
Qatar
974
Belarus
375
Iraq
964
Rumania
40
Belgium
32
Ireland
353
Russia
7
Bolivia
591
Israel
972
Saudi Arabia
966
Brazil
55
Italy
39
Senegal
221
Brunei
673
Japan
81
Singapore
65
Cameroon
237
Jordan
962
South Africa
27
Chile
56
Kenya
254
Spain
34
China(P.R.C)
86
Korea
82
Sri Lanka
94
Colombia
57
Kuwait
965
Swaziland
268
2-3
DEFAULT
82
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
NATION
CODE
NATION
Issue 1.0
CODE
NATION
CODE
Costa Rica
506
Kyrgyzstan
996
Sweden
46
Cyprus
357
Liberia
231
Switzerland
41
Czech(Slovak)
42
Libya
218
Tajikistan
992
Denmark
45
Luxembourg
352
Telkom
*27
Ecuador
593
Malaysia
60
Telstra
*61
Egypt
20
Moldova
373
Thailand
66
El Salvador
503
Malta
356
Tunisia
216
Ethiopia
251
Mexico
52
Turkey
90
Fiji
679
Monaco
377
Turkmenistan
993
Finland
358
Morocco
212
U.A.E.
971
France
33
Myanmar(Burma)
95
Ukraine
380
Gabon
241
Netherlands
31
United Kingdom
44
Georgia
995
New Zealand
64
Uruguay
598
German
49
Nigeria
234
U.S.A
1
Ghana
233
Norway
47
Uzbekistan
998
Greece
30
Oman
968
Venezuela
58
Guam
671
Pakistan
92
Vietnam
84
Guatemala
502
Panama
507
Y.A.R.
967
Guyana
592
P.N.G
675
Haiti
509
Paraguay
595
2.3.1.2 Slot Assignment -PGM Code 101
PROCEDURE:
SLOT ASSIGNMENT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 101.
2.
Enter Slot number
3.
To change board type, press the Flex button 1 and dial board. Refer to
Table 2.3.1.2-2.
4.
To change device number, press the Flex button 2 and dial device.
5.
To store the location data press the [SAVE] button.
ENTER SLOT NUMBER
SLOT 02 (F1:ID F2:DEVS)
ID:DTIB24
DEVS:24
SLOT 02 (F1:ID F2:DEVS)
ID:DTIB24
DEVS:24
SLOT 02 (F1:ID F2 DEVS)
ID:DTIB24
DEVS:24
Table 2.3.1.2-1 SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 101)
BTN
DISPLAY
REMARK
1
SLOT 02 (F1:ID F2:DEVS)
ID:PRIB
DEVS:30
Refer to Table 2.3.1.2-2
2
SLOT 02 (F1:ID F2:DEVS)
ID:PRIB
DEVS:20
Enter device(port) number
2-4
RANGE
DEFAULT
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
NOTE

If the DIP switch of the manual board detection (the 1st DIP Switch) is ON, system will
detect the installed board type automatically. If the 1st DIP switch is OFF, the board type
code must be entered at each slot. After manually setting Rack Slot assignment, the user
should reset the system manually.
Table 2.3.1.2-2 Board Type Code
STATION BOARD
CODE
COLINE BORD
CODE
VMIB BOARD
CODE
DSIB
11
VOIU
31
VMIB
DTIB12
12
VOIB8
32
AAIB
DTIB24
13
VOIB24
33
AAFU
51
52
53
SLIB12
14
LCOB4
34
SLIB24
15
LCOB8
35
WTIB
16
LCOB12
36
DTIM8
17
PRIB
37
SLTM4/8
18
BRIB
38
SLTM32
19
E1R2
39
2.3.1.3 Logical Slot Assignment -PGM Code 103
PROCEDURE:
LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 103.
2.
Press Flex button (1~3) to change slot order.
3.
Enter slot numbers.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store.
COL STA VMIB
01 02 03 04 05 07 13 18
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
01 02 03 04 05 07 13 18
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Table 2.3.1.3-1 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 103)
BTN
DISPLAY
REMARK
1
08 11 12 14 15 16 17
CO Line Board
2
01 02 03 04 05 07 13 18
Station Board
RANGE
DEFAULT
88 (SIP
Phone), 99
(IP Phone or
Phontage)
3
09
VMIB Board
NOTE

If the DIP switch of the manual board detection ((the 1st DIP Switch) is ON, the system will
detect the logical slot assign in sequence with increasing order automatically. If the 1st IP
of DIP switch is OFF, the logical slot assignment must be entered at each board type. After
manually setting logical slot assignment, the user should reset the system manually.
2-5
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.1.4 DECT/IP Phone/SIP Phone Port Assignment -PGM Code 104
PROCEDURE:
DECT/IP/SIP MAX PORT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 104.
2.
Press the Flex button (1~3) and enter the desired data
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
MAX NO OF DECT
(000-192) : 032
Table 2.3.1.4-2 DECT/IP PHONE/SIP PHONE PORT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 104)
BTN
1
2
3
DISPLAY
REMARK
MAX NO OF DECT
(000-192) : 008
MAX No of DECT that can be registered to the
MAX NO OF IP PHONE
(000-324) : 032
MAX No of IP Phones that can be registered to the
MAX NO OF SIP PHONE
(000-324) : 032
MAX No of SIP Phones that can be registered to the
RANGE
DEFAULT
8
System.
32
System.
32
System.
2.3.1.5 IP Phone/ Phontage Registration Table -PGM Code 106
PROCEDURE:
IP-Phone/Phontage REG.
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 106.
2.
Enter bin number to be assigned.
3.
Press the Flex button (1~7) and enter the desired data
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store.
ENTER BIN NO(001-324)
001 IP-Phone/Phontage
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Table 2.3.1.6-1 IP PHONE/PHONTAGE REGISTRATION TABLE (PGM 106)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
REMARK
001 MAC ADDRESS
00-00-00-00-00-00
Used to register an IP Phone to the System, by
entering its MAC Address (Refer to table 2.1.2-1 for
alphanumeric dial-pad entries)
2
3
USER ID
…………
Used to register Phontage to the System, by entering
001 USER PASSWORD
Used to register Phontage to the System, by entering
its User ID and Password.
its User ID and Password.
4
001 STA NUMBER(VIEW)
Once a connection is made to the System, the current
Station number will be displayed.
2-6
RANGE
DEFAULT
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
5
001 IP ADDRESS(VIEW)
0. 0. 0. 0
Displays the IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage
6
001 F/W IP ADDRESS(VIEW)
0. 0. 0. 0
Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP
001 RTP SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enable RTP Security
7
Issue 1.0
phone/Phontage
2.3.1.6 DTIM/SLTM Registration Table-PGM Code 107
PROCEDURE:
DTIM/SLTM RE REGISTRATION
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 107.
2.
Enter slot number to be assigned.
3.
Press the Flex button (1~5) and enter the desired data
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store.
ENTER SLOT NO(19-56)
SLOT 19 REGISTER INFO
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-5)
Table 2.3.1.7-1 DTIM/SLTM REGISTRATION TABLE (PGM 107)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
REMARK
SLOT 19 MAC ADDRESS
00-00-00-00-00-00
Used to register an DTIM to the System, by entering
RANGE
DEFAULT
its MAC Address (Refer to table 2.1.2-1 for
alphanumeric dial-pad entries)
2
SLOT 19 STA RANGE(VIEW)
…. - ….
Once a connection is made to the System, the station
3
SLOT 19 IP ADDRESS
0. 0. 0. 0
Displays the IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage
4
SLOT 19 F/W IP ADDRESS
0. 0. 0. 0
Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP
5
SLOT 19 RTP SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enable RTP Security
range assigned to DTIM/SLTM will be displayed.
phone/Phontage
2.3.1.7 IP Address Plan -PGM Code 108
The System IP is required for external VoIP calls, WEB programming, IP Phone registration or
external VoIP calls.
iPECS-MG can be installed behind a NAPT server, if the NAPT server provides fixed address
translation and port forwarding to the system. In this case, the system will employ the “Firewall IP
address” as the fixed public IP address for communication with remote devices. This address
must be assigned as the MFIM address in the remote device (IP Phone or iPECS Gateway
DTIM/SLTM).
2-7
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
IP ADDRESS PLAN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 108.
2.
Select the desired button 1~9,
3.
Enter the desired data (For IP addresses, use an “*” to enter a dot (“.”))
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-9)
See table 2.3.1.7-1
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.1.7-1 SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 108)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
DEFAULT
IP ADDR
10 .10 .10 .1
10.10.10.1
2
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.000
255.255.0.0
3
ROUTER IP ADDR
10 .10 .10 .254
10.10.10.254
4
REMARK
Public IP Address required for remote user and Web-admin. IPv4
format.
IP Address of router for external network (WAN/IP) access. Required
for shared voice and data LAN and remote Web access.
0.0.0.0
FIREWALL IP ADDR
0 .0 .0 .0
When the system is installed behind a NAPT server, the fixed IP
Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field.
Also, use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices.
5
0.0.0.0
DNS IP ADDR
0 .0 .0 .0
IP Address of Domain Name Server, which iPECS will use to resolve
URLs to an IP address. The DNS provides the resolution after
receiving the name from iPECS.
6
H.323 PORT
(000-9999) : 1720
1720
H.323 UDP Port
7
SIP PORT
(000-9999) : 5060
5060
SIP UDP Port
8
DHCP USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
OFF
9
If this field is set to ‘ON’, the system gets the IP-address from the
DHCP Server when it is booting.
04
DIFFSERV
(00-63) : 04
Diff-Serv pretag value
2.3.1.8 System Information -PGM Code 109
The System Information like MAC Address, system version or others can be checked.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 109.
2.
Select the desired button 1~7,
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
See the following table
DISPLAY
2-8
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.1.8-1 SYSTEM INFORMATION (PGM 109)
BTN
DISPLAY
DEFAULT
REMARK
1
MAC ADDR
00-40-5A-29-5E-6C
The MAC Address of MPB
2
PROTOCOL PORT
5588
UDP Port for communicating between MPB and Boards(or, IP Phone)
3
PRIVATE NET MASK
255.255.255.000
4
APP RLS VERSION
56M-A.0Ac
System Version
5
APP RLS DATE
JAN/09
The released Date of System software
6
BOOT VERSION
1.0Ac
System Boot Version
7
BOOT RLS DATE
DEC/08
The released Date of System Booting application
2.3.2 NUMBERING PLANS DATA – PGM CODES 110-115
2.3.2.1 Numbering Plan Type -PGM Code 110
iPECS-MG system provides default Numbering plan set. One of any numbering plan can be
installed or every numbering plan can be cleared.
If numbering plan type 7 is selected, all numbering codes are deleted. all numbering codes are
deleted. After deleting, user should assign the ‘System Numbering Plan (PGM 111)’ first. After
configuring the System Numbering Plan, user can assign the other numbering plan code. This is
useful when user wants to reconfigure all the numbering codes without default values.
PROCEDURE:
NUMBERING PLAN TYPE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 110.
2.
Press Flex. 1 and select one of the default numbering plans.
If numbering plan type 7 is selected, all numbering codes are deleted. After
deleting, firstly user should assign the prefix numbering plan. After
configuring the prefix, user can assign the others like station number, CO
Group Access Code, Extra numbering and feature code. This is useful when
user wants to reconfigure all numbering codes.
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to update all numbering plan codes with selected
default value.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-1)
NUMBERING PLAN TYPE
(1-7): TYPE 1
2-9
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.2.2 System Numbering Plan-PGM Code 111
To assign a numbering plan code, the type should be matched with one of the provided System
Numbering Plans, which consist of a Prefix, and More digits.
 Prefix – leading preceding digits of some numbering plan code (up to 8 digits).
 More digits – number of digits following the Prefix code (up to 4 digits).
 Master Prefix Digits – when the System Numbering Plan code consists of more than 4
digits, the preceding digits of the prefix code placed at more than 4 digits from the end
digit (up to 3 digits in MG-100 system, and up to 5 in MG-300 system
NOTE

System Numbering Plan conflict is not allowed; if there’s Prefix ‘1’ and more digit 4, then
there cannot be other prefix ‘10’ with more digit 4.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM NUMBERING PLAN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 111.
2.
3.
Enter index and check current prefix code.
Volume Up/ Down key can be used to see next/ previous index data.
To Change Prefix Numbering Plan, delete the data first.
To delete existing Prefix Numbering Plan, Press [DELETE] button and
press [SAVE] button.
When Prefix numbering plan deleted, related numbering plan codes are
also cleared.
Press Flexible button 1 and enter prefix code to set new Prefix code.
4.
Press Flexible button 2 and enter more digit
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to update changed data.
ENTER INDEX(001-150)
001 PREFIX / MORE DGT
F1 : ….
F2 : ….
001 PREFIX / MORE DGT
F1 : 10
F2 : ….
001 PREFIX / MORE DGT
F1 : 10
F2 : 3
Table 2.3.2.2-1 SYSTEM NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 111)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
001 PREFIX / MORE DGT
F1 : 10
F2 : 3
001 PREFIX / MORE DGT
F1 : 10
F2 : 3
FEATURE
Prefix Code
Range
1 digit ~ 8 digits
REMARK
Prefix code
length + more
digits can be 8 at
More Digit
(0 – 4).
max.
2.3.2.3 Flexible Station Number-PGM Code 112
Each station has station numbers and every station numbers can be edited.
By default, every My-DN of each station is assigned. According to the numbering plan type
selected from ADM 110, if start station number is 3 digits, 50 MADN numbers are assigned when
station-numbering plan is initialized. If start station number is 4 digits, 324 MADN numbers (108
MADN numbers) are assigned when station numbering plan is initialized.
2-10
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
FLEXIBLE STATION NUMBER
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 112.
2.
Press Flex button 1 to edit whole station number by range.
3.
Enter desired station range.
OR
4.
Press Flex button 2 to edit one station number.
Use the Volume up / down buttons to scroll to the next / previous index.
5.
Enter station number to update
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to update changed data.
Check if newly entered number is available number according to Prefix
Code plan (PGM Code 111).
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
ENTER NEW RANGE :
100 - 473
ENTER NEW RANGE :
100 - 699
STATION NUMBER
ENTER IDX(001-648)
STATION NUMBER(001)
100
Table 2.3.2.3-1 STATION NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 112)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
FEATURE
RANGE
REMARK
ENTER NEW RANGE :
100 – 473
Station number edit by
Start station number
Delete all station numbers and
range
& End station number
update entered station number
STATION NUMBER(001)
100
Single station number
One station number
bin 001 - 324(iPECS-MG 300), bin
range only.
2
edit
001 - 128(iPECS-MG 100):
1 number per one station port
( My-DNs for each stations)
bin 325 - 648(iPECS-MG 300), bin
129 - 256(iPECS-MG 100):
Free station numbers for MADN type
or extra SADN type numbers (SubDNs)
2.3.2.4 Feature Numbering Plan -PGM Codes 113
Feature Numbering codes for the system can be assigned and edited in PGM 113. Appendix B
provides the default values for each of the eight base Numbering Plans. Select the default
Numbering Plan in PGM 110.
PROCEDURE:
FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 113:
2.
Select the desired index (01~72); refer to the following table.
DIAL FEATURE IDX(01-87)
Refer to the following Table
DISPLAY
2-11
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
3.
Issue 1.0
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new Numbering Plan data. Check if the
newly entered number is available according to Prefix Code plan (PGM
Code 111).
Table 2.3.2.4-1 FEATURE CODE (PGM 113)
BTN
DISPLAY
FEATURE
1
ATTENDANT CALL
0
Attendant Call
2
CONF ROOM 1
571
Conference Room 1
3
CONF ROOM 2
572
Conference Room 2
4
CONF ROOM 3
573
Conference Room 3
5
CONF ROOM 4
574
Conference Room 4
6
CONF ROOM 5
575
Conference Room 5
7
CONF ROOM 6
576
Conference Room 6
8
CONF ROOM 7
577
Conference Room 7
9
CONF ROOM 8
578
Conference Room 8
10
CONF ROOM 9
579
Conference Room 9
11
INT PAGE
Internal Page
543
DEFAULT
REMARK
0
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
543
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
xx : Page Group #
12
PAGE AUTO ANSWER
544
Page Auto Answer
544
13
INT PAGE ANSWER
545
Internal Page Answer
545
14
EXT PAGE
(Meet-me page)
546
External Page
546
547
15
INT-EXT PAGE ALL
547
Internal-External Page All
16
CFW REGISTER
554
Call Forward Register
17
PILOT H. CFW REGISTER
514
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Register
514
18
PILOT H. CFW CANCEL
515
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Cancel
515
19
DND STATUS CHANGE
516
DND Status Change
516
554
554 + Type +
Destination
2-12
514 + Type +
Destination
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
DISPLAY
FEATURE
DEFAULT
20
DND DELETE
517
DND Delete
517
21
ACCOUNT CODE
550
Account Code
550
22
CO FLASH
CO Flash
551
551
23
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
552
Last Number Redial
552
24
SPEED PGM
Station Speed PGM
553
553
25
SPEED DIAL
555
Speed Dial
555
26
MWI REGISTER
557
MWI Register
557
27
MWI ANSWER
558
MWI Answer
558
28
MWI CANCEL
559
MWI Cancel
559
29
CALLBACK REGISTER
518
CallBack Register
518
30
CALLBACK CANCEL
519
CallBack Cancel
519
31
GROUP CALL PICKUP
564
Group Call Pickup
564
32
DIRECT CALL PICKUP
7
Direct Call Pickup
7
33
WALKING COS
520
Walking COS
520
34
CALL PARKING LOC
541
Call Parking Location
541
35
PGM MODE ACCESS
521
PGM Mode Access
521
36
TWO WAY RECORD
522
Two way record
522
37
VMIB ACCESS
523
VMIB Access
523
38
AME ACCESS
524
AME Access
524
39
CO LINE ACCESS
88
CO Line Access
88
40
VM MWI ENABLE
*8
VM MWI Enable
*8
41
VM MWI CANCEL
*9
VM MWI Cancel
*9
42
MCID REQUEST
*0
MCID Request
*0
REMARK
541 + xx
xx: Parking Location
88+ xxx
xxx: CO Line #
2-13
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
DISPLAY
FEATURE
DEFAULT
43
UNSUPERVISED CONF
EXTND
5##
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
44
PTT GROUP ACCESS
538
PTT Group Access
538
REMARK
538 + (0-9,*)
0-9: PTT Group #
*: Log out
45
HOTDESK ACCESS
525
Hot desk Access
525
46
NAME REGISTER
526
Name Register
526
47
CREATE CONF ROOM
527
Create Conf Room
527
527 + Conf. Room #
DELETE CONF ROOM
528
Delete Conf Room
528
528 + Conf. Room #
WAKE UP REGISTER
529
Wake Up Register
529
529 + HH:MM
50
WAKE UP CANCEL
530
Wake Up Cancel
530
51
TEMP COS DOWN
531
Temporarily COS Down
531
52
RETRIEVE COS
532
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
53
PASSWORD CHANGE
533
Password Change
533
54
INTERPHONE GRP ACCESS
534
Interphone Group Access
534
55
CALL WAIT REQUEST
535
Call Wait Request
535
56
PRESELECTED MSG PGM
536
Preselected MSG PGM
536
57
FORCED HANDSFREE CALL
537
Forced Handsfree Call
537
58
CALL BASE CLIR
582
Call Based CLIR
582
59
CLIR ACCESS
583
CLIR Access
583
60
COLR ACCESS
584
COLR Access
584
61
PILOT HUNT CALL
585
Pilot Hunt Call
585
62
COMMAND CALL ONEWAY
581
Command Call One-way
581
63
COMMAND CALL CONF
580
Command Call Conf
580
64
INTRUDE REGISTER
589
Intrude Register
589
48
49
2-14
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
DISPLAY
FEATURE
DEFAULT
65
CAMP ON REGISTER
590
Camp On Register
590
66
OHVO REGISTER
591
OHVO Register
591
67
MOBILE NUM REGISTER
592
Mobile Num Register
592
68
MOBILE CLI REGISTER
593
Mobile CLI Register
593
69
MOBILE ACCESS
594
Mobile Access
594
70
CCR ACCESS
670
CCR Access
670
71
CCR ACCESS AND DROP
671
CCR Access And Drop
671
72
HOLD
System Hold
560
560
73
RETURN HELD CO
8**
Return Held CO
8**
74
SYS MEMO
Sys Memo
675
675
75
DISA TONE SERVICE
678
DISA Tone Service
678
76
ALL FEATURE CANCEL
679
All Feature Cancel
679
77
ADD CONF MEMBER
680
Add Conf Member
680
78
SYS ALARM RESET
565
System Alarm Reset
565
79
FAULT ALARM RESET
566
Fault Alarm Reset
566
80
DOOR OPEN
Door Open
#*1
#*1
81
KEYPAD FACILITY
##*
Keypad Facility
##*
82
TNET LOG IN/OUT
586
T-net Log-in/Out
586
83
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
587
Universal Answer
587
84
USB CALL RECORD
588
USB Call Record
588
50
DEL ALLL VM MSG
681
Delete All VM Message
681
86
PAGE MSG RECORD
682
Page Message Record
682
87
DIRECT VM TRANSFER
683
Direct VM Transfer
683
2-15
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.2.5 CO Group Access Code – PGM Code 114
iPECS-MG System provides CO Group Access Codes (73 in MG-300/25 in MG-100). Each code
can be edited by Admin Programming Each CO Group Access Code has its attributes (refer to
PGM Code 178).
PROCEDURE:
CO GRP ACCESS CODE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 114.
2.
Press Flex button 1 to edit whole CO Grp access code by range.
3.
Enter desired access code by range.
4.
Or, press Flex button 2 to edit one CO Grp access code.
Use the Volume up / down buttons to scroll to the next / previous index.
5.
Enter desired access code.
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to update changed data.
Check if newly entered number is available according to Prefix Code plan
(PGM Code 111).
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
ENTER NEW RANGE :
9 - 872
ENTER NEW RANGE :
810 - 882
CO GRP ACCESS CODE
ENTER IDX(01-73)
CO GRP ACCESS CODE(01)
9
Table 2.3.2.5-1 CO GRP ACCESS CODE (PGM 114)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
FEATURE
RANGE
CO GRP ACCESS CODE9 –
872
CO Grp Access Code
Start CO Grp Access Code & End
edit by range
CO Grp Access Code
CO GRP ACCESS
CODE(01)
9
CO Grp Access Code
CO Grp Access Code
REMARK
edit
2.3.2.6 Station Group Number -PGM Code 115
iPECS-MG System provides Station Group Numbers (50 in iPECS MG-300, 20 in iPECS MG-100).
Each group number can be edited by Admin Programming. Each station group number has its
attributes (refer to PGM Codes 200-202).
PROCEDURE:
STATION GROUP NUMBER
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 115.
2.
Press Flex button 1 to edit whole Station Group Number by range.
3.
Enter desired Station Group Number by range.
OR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
STATION GROUP NUMBER
620 -669
STATION GROUP NUMBER
620 -669
2-16
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
STATION GROUP NUMBER
4.
Press Flex button 2 to edit one Station Group Number.
Use the Volume up / down buttons to scroll to the next / previous index.
5.
Enter desired Station Group number.
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to update changed data. Check if newly entered
number is available number according to Prefix Code plan (PGM Code 111).
ENTER IDX(01-50)
STATION GROUP NO(01)
Issue 1.0
620
Table 2.3.2.6-1 STATION GROUP NUMBER (PGM 115)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
FEATURE
RANGE
STATION GROUP RANGE
620 – 669
Station Group Number
STATION GROUP NO(01)
620
Station Group
Number edit
edit by range
REMARK
Start Station Group Number &
End Station Group Number
Station Group Number
2.3.3 STATION DATA – PGM CODES 120-152
2.3.3.1 Station Type -PGM Code 120
Each station has its own station type according to its terminal type. This station type is used by the
system to recognize the station’s capabilities. In addition, this station type defines DSS/BLF
consoles, which can be connected to a station. Maximum 5 DSS/BLF consoles can be connected
to a station. Especially, in LIP-8000 Series, maximum 4 serial DSS/BLF consoles can be
connected. For DSS/BLF consoles, the associated father station number is displayed.
PROCEDURE:
STATION TYPE INFO
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 120.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station number.
ENTER STA NUMBER
100 STATION TYPE
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
3.
Select the desired Flex button,
Flex 1: to display current station type or to set SLT station type (DTMF
normal, DTMF MSG-wait, PULSE normal, PULSE MSG-wait)
Flex 2: to connect DSS/BLF consoles to a station or to display father
station number of a DSS/BLF console
Flex 3: to restart LIP-Phone
-
100 TYPE
LKD_30D
4.
For Flex button 1 (TYPE), to view station type.
Only for SLT station, station’s type can be modified. To modify SLT
station type, use the dial-pad button 1 to 4 (1:DTMF Normal, 2:DTMF
Msg-wait, 3:Pulse Normal, 4:Pulse Msg-wait).
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
-
2-17
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
5.
For Flex button 2, there are 3 different modes available.
Mode (1): For Key-phone which can have 5 DSS/BLF consoles
Mode (2): For LIP-8000 series which can have 4 serial DSS/BLF
consoles
Mode (3): For DSS/BLF console itself
-
100 DSS MAP ASG
6.
Mode (1): For Phone, which can have 5 DSS/BLF consoles. To assign
DSS/BLF Console to DSS map index.
Select Flex button (1~5) for DSS map Index (1~5) and enter DSS/BLF
Console’s station number.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
7.
Mode (2): For LIP-8000 series, which can have 4 serial DSS/BLF,
consoles.
Serial DSS/BLF consoles have no station number. After connecting to
station, just select console type.
Select Flex button (1~4) for serial DSS map Index (1~4) and select
serial DSS/BLF console type. (0:none, 1:12-btn DSS, 2:12-btn LSS, 3:
48-Btn DSS)
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-5)
148 SERIAL DSS TYPE
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-4)
DSS 104 FATHER STA
8.
-
100
RESET 148
9.
PRESS [SAVE] TO RESET
Mode (3): For DSS/BLF console itself.
This menu just displays Father station of DSS/BLF console. In Mode
(1), DSS/BLF console is assigned to Father station.
For Flex button 3, to reset LIP-8000 series after change serial DSS/BLF
configuration of station.
2.3.3.2 Station Port Attributes, I to IV -PGM Codes 121-124
Station Port Attributes define features and functions available to the terminal. Generally, the entry
will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 2.3.3.2-1 to 4 for a description of
the features and the input required.
PROCEDURE:
STA PORT ATTRIBUTE 1
1.
-
ENTER STA RANGE
100- 110 PORT ATT 1
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
3.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to table 2.3.3.2-1 to 4.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting, refer to table
2.3.3.2-1 to 4
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-11)
Refer to Table 2.3.3.2-1 to 4
Press the [PGM] button and dial :
121 for Station Port Attributes 1
122 for Station Port Attributes 2
123 for Station Port Attributes 3
124 for Station Port Attributes 4
For a single
DISPLAY
2-18
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.3.2-1 STATION ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 121)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
AUTO SPKR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
Enables [SPEAKER] activation when a CO/IP, DSS
or other feature button is pressed (handsfree).
RANGE
0: OFF
DEFAULT
ON
1: ON
HEADSET MODE
(0-2): SPEAKER
Selects Speakerphone mode, Headset mode or Ear
0: Speaker
Mic Mode
1: Headset
HEADSET RING
(0-2): SPEAKER
In Headset mode, this item selects device to receive
0: Speaker
incoming ring signals. - Speaker, Headset or Both.
1: Headset
GROUP LISTEN
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables Group Listen feature, audio is sent to both the
0:OFF
handset and speaker with the handset microphone
1:ON
Speaker
2: E-MIC
3
Speaker
2: Both
4
OFF
active and speakerphone microphone OFF.
5
6
KEYSET ADMIN
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enables station access to the System Database.
0:Disable
NO TOUCH ANS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables No-touch answer; this will automatically
0: OFF
connect transferred calls to the station’s
1: ON
DISABLE
1:Enable
OFF
speakerphone.
7
8
HOWLING TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Permits Howler tone to be sent to a SLT when left off-
0: OFF
hook.
1: ON
DUMMY TERMINAL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
This item defines whether a station is used for hot
0: OFF
desk terminal. If you want to use a station as hot desk,
1: ON
ON
OFF
this field must be set to ‘ON’
9
10
11
PORT BLOCK
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this value is set to ON, Station is blocked so it is
0: OFF
impossible to use that station.
1: ON
USE BLUETOOTH
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
In case of Bluetooth supported station, you can
0: OFF
determine whether station’s Bluetooth is used or not.
1: ON
SLT LINE LENGTH
(0-2): SHORT
This feature is used to distinguish the line length when
0: Short
the distance between SLT station and SLIB board is
1: Long
too variable.
OFF
OFF
Short
2: Far
(Short:0km, Long:0~3km, Far:3~7.5km)
12
13
ALARM
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
Enable to receive system alarm signal.
DOOR OPEN
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
Enable to use door open feature.
0:Disable
Disable
1:Enable
0:Disable
1:Enable
2-19
Disable
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.3.2-2 STATION ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 122)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
LCD LANGUAGE
(00-14): ENGLISH (00)
Sets the Language used in the Station’s LCD; refer to
RANGE
LCD DATE MODE
(1:MDY/0:DMY):DDMMYY
Sets the Station’s Date display as month/day or
1:MMDDYY
day/month.
0:DDMMYY
LCD TIME MODE
(1:24H/0:12H):12H
Sets the Time display mode as 12 hour or 24-hour
00 ~ 14
Table 2.3.3.2-2a below.
(military) time.
DEFAULT
00
(English)
1: 24 Hour
DDMMYY
12 Hour
Mode
0: 12 Hour
Mode
4
BACK LIGHT USAGE
(O-4): BUSY ONLY
If a station can support LCD backlight, you can set
backlight usage option.
0: Always
Busy Only
Off
1: Busy
Only
2: Always
On
3: Auto
4 Delayed
Off
5
LIP-8000 FONT
(O-1): TIMES NEW ROMAN
LIP 8000 Series terminal has two kind of font – Times
new roman and Gothic. This menu determines what
font is used.
0: Times
Times new
New
roman
Roman
1: Gothic
6
7
LIP-8000 LCD BRIGHTTNESS
(O1-15): 07 ROMAN
LIP 8000 Series terminal can adjust LCD brightness
01 ~ 15
07
GROUP QUEUE DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this is set to ON, system provides station goup
0: OFF
OFF
Queue information to group member.
1: ON
for user’s convenience.
Table 2.3.3.2-2.a LCD LANGUAGE SELECTION
ENTRY
LANGUAGE
00
English
01
Italian
02
Finnish
03
Dutch
04
Swedish
05
Danish
06
Norwegian
07
Hebrew
08
German
09
French
10
Portuguese
11
Spanish
12
Korean
13
Estonian
14
Russian
2-20
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.3.2-3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 123)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
PRIME NUMBER BTN
(01-48) : 01
Among My-DN and several Sub-DNs which are
RANGE
DEFAULT
01 ~ 48
01
1~9
1
OFF
assigned to station flex buttons, determines the firstseized DN when the user initiates a call.
If prime button is not set of invalid, the system scans
sequentially from flexible button 1 to flexible Button 48
and take the unused and valid flexible button as prime
button
NOTE: DN buttons of associated DSS box cannot be a
prime number button.
2
3
ZONE NO
(1-9) : 1
This menu represents a station belonging to what
AUTO HOLD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables Auto Hold for the station. With Auto Hold
0: OFF
enabled, the system will place an active external call
1: ON
zone.
on hold if the user presses a CO/IP or DSS button.
4
ENBLOCK DIAL
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
When On, the user-dialed digits are stored at the
0: OFF
Digital Phone until explicitly sent by the user. When
1: ON
OFF
sent, all dialed digits are sent to the system in a block.
Enblock mode is only available to Digital Phones with
soft keys.
5
ICM ANSWER MODE
(1-3): TONE
Selects Handsfree, Privacy or Tone ring ICM Signaling
DATA SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Disables override and camp-on tones to the station to
0: OFF
avoid occurring error when sending data.
1: ON
PROGRESS INDICATOR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this value is set to ON, Progress Indicator
0: OFF
Information is included to Setup message (Origin is
1: ON
mode.
1:Handfree
Tone
2:Tone
3:Privacy
6
7
OFF
OFF
non-ISDN).
8
9
FAX MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this value is set to ON, Bearer Capability information
0: OFF
with 3.1Khz is provided to PX.
1: ON
DTMF WHEN REDIAL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
If this value is set to ON, DTMF tone is heard to the
0: OFF
station user while redial.
1: ON
OFF
ON
(Reserved)
10
MUTE RING SERVICE
(0-1)
MUTE RING
If this value is set to MUTE RING, system provides
MUTE RING to user.
0: Mute
MUTE
Ring
RING
1:No Ring
11
AUTO IDLE SERVICE
(0-1): AUTO
If this value is set to AUTO, system provides Auto Idle
service.
0: Auto
1: Manual
2-21
Auto
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.3.2-4 STATION ATTRIBUTES IV (PGM 124)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
MSG WAIT INDICATION
(0-3): MW REMIND TONE
This menu determines the way to notify a station to
wait message.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: N/A
MW
1:Ring LED
REMIND
2:MW
TONE
Remind
Tone
3:Ring LED
+ Tone
2
APPLY DIFF RING
(0-1) : ALL RING
Determine user’s differential ring mode. Applying to
0:All Ring
all ring mode or normal ring mode.
1:Normal
All Ring
Ring
3
4
5
ICM DIFF RING ID
(000-254) : 001
Set the intercom differential ring ID – usually 1 ~ 4 is
000 ~ 254
1
CO DIFF RING ID
(000-254) : 001
Set the CO line differential ring ID – usually 1 ~ 4 is
000 ~ 254
1
COS APPLY OPTION
(0-1): SUB-DN
Determine whether the applied COS is the COS of
0:SUB-DN
SUB-DN
SUB-DN or COS of MY-DN when station accesses
1:MY-DN
valid
valid
SUB-DN
6
HOOK FLASH WHEN XFER
(0-2): CANCEL XFER
Determine the operation when user press hook-flash
0:Cancel
Cancel
button while transferring call.
transfer
transfer
0. Cancel transfer : drop current call and recover
1:Voice
previous call
1. Voice over : hold current call and recover previous
held call
Over
2:Conferenc
e
2. Conference: establish 3-way conference call.
7
OFF-HOOK ON PAGED
(0-1): PAGED
When lifting handset while listening to paging
message, user can make another call or continue to
0:Paged
Paged
1:Dial-Tone
listen.
0: continue to listen to paging message
1: stop listening, seize a remaining DN, and hear dialtone. User can make a another call
8
PLA
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
Preferred Line Answer
0:OFF
Enables Ringing Line Preference for the station.
1:ON
ON
Calls that ring the telephone are answered by going
off-hook.
(Reserved)
9
PICKUP BY DSS BUTTON
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
This value determines the method of pickup when
0:Disable
Direct
pressing DSS button.
1:Group
Pickup
Pickup
2:Direct
Pickup
10
CLI IP ADDRESS
0 .0 .0 .0
CLI IP Address
2-22
IP Address
0.0.0.0
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.3.3 Station Flexible Button Assignment – PGM Code 126
Flex buttons for each Digital Phone and DSS Console can be assigned a function (Type) and an
associated Value.
For assignments to a DSS Console, enter the DSS console station number and enter the desired
button number. For Serial DSS, the button numbers are decided by the order of Serial DSS. The
button number starts from 49 at the first Serial DSS, 97 at the 2nd Serial DSS, 48 is added to the
button number when desired Serial DSS order is increased. Each console contains entries for up
to 48 buttons even though the console may only have 12 buttons. In this case, assignments for
buttons 13 to 48 are ignored.
PROCEDURE:
STA FLEX BTN ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 126.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
3.
Dial the desired Flex button number (001~240)
ENTER STA RANGE
100- 110 FLEX BTN
ENTER BTN NUM(001-240)
100- 110 FLEX BTN 002
For a single
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
4.
BTN02EMPTY)
5.
ENTER NEW BTN TYPE(1-3)
BTN02: FIXED BTN
BTN02: STA NUMBER
….
For Flex button 1, to configure button type, use the dial-pad to select button
type 1-3.
Type 1: to assign Fixed type button to Flex button.
Type 2: to assign Station Number(DN) to Flex button.
Type 3: to assign “Dialed Number” to Flex button.
6.
(1-9): NOT ASSIGNED
Press the desired Flex button (1~3).
Flex : to configure button type
Flex 2: to configure ring option
Flex 3: to configure access mode
-
For Fixed button, use the dial pad to select from the following
1: redial
2: speed
3: conference
4: mute
5: call back
6: button
7: transfer
8: recall
9: PTT
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
If a station already has the same fixed type button at the fixed button,
an error tone is heard and data is not saved.
-
For Station Number(DN) button,
Using dial-pad, enter Station number you want to assign.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
If the station number already was programmed on another flex button at
same station, an error tone is heard.
7.
2-23
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
BTN03: DIAL NUMBER
8.
-
….
BTN002:RING OPTION
(0-9): IMMEDIATE RING
9.
For Dialed Number button,
Using dial-pad, enter desired number you want to assign.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
Flex button 2: The ring option is only valid at Station Number-type Flex
button; To configure ring option, using dial-pad or DELETE/SPEED button.
0: immediate ring
1: delay 3 sec
2: delay 6 sec
3: delay 9 sec
4: delay 12 sec
5: delay 15 sec
6: delay 18 sec
7: delay 21 sec
8: delay 24 sec
9: delay 27 sec
..: no ring
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
10. Flex button 3: to configure access mode
Table 2...- Access mode follows Flex button type.
If Flex button is Fixed or DN, refer to next Step.
If Flex button is Station Number then refer to Step 12.
BTN001: ACCESS
(0-1): CHANGEABLE
BTN002: ACCESS
(0-2): ALL CALL
11. In case of “Fixed” or “Dialed number” Flex button. Two-access mode exist –
user-changeable or blocked, Using dial-pad button, configure access mode.
0. Changeable: the station user can change this button data
1. Unchangeable: the station user cannot change. Possible to change
only by Admin programming.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
12. In case of “Station number” Flex button.
0. All Call: there is no restriction.
1. Seize and Dial: Unable to seize only by off-hook when making
outgoing call even if the button is set to prime number button.
2. Incoming only: Unable to make an outgoing call using this button.
Only answering incoming call is allowed.
2.3.3.4 Station Number Information – PGM Code 130
In accordance with station number’s physical characteristics, the station number is divided into MyDN and Sub-DN. My-DN is only a role of SADN(Single-Assign Directory Number) and only one
My-DN is assigned to a physical terminal. In iPECS-MG system, the scope of station number used
for My-DN is predefined – station bin index from 1 to 324 for MG-300, from 1 to 108 for MG-100.
Station number with station bin index greater than My-DN’s bin index is Sub-DN. Sub-DN is used
for MADN or SADN. MADN can have 10 different stations as its members but SADN has only 1
member. In addition to, Sub-DN, which is used for SADN, can be configured as a hot-desk agent
number. If Sub-DN is used for hot-desk agent, station is not allocated explicitly for Sub-DN
member. Only when a terminal login to hot desk with Sub-DN, Sub-DN has terminal’s station
number (My-DN) as its member.
2-24
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
STA DN NUMBER
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 130.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter the station number
ENTER STA NUMBER
424 DN ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
3.
STA DN TYPE
(1-3): MADN
DN MEMBER VIEW
….
….
Press the desired Flex button (1~2).
Flex 1 : to configure station number type
Flex 2 : to display station number’s member
For Flex 1, to configure station number type.
Dial 1-3 to configure station number type.
Type 1 : SADN-Normal
Type 2 : MADN
Type 3 : SADN-Hot desk Agent
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries.
NOTE: Type cannot be changed for My-DN numbers.
4. For Flex 2, to display station member view.
….
2.3.3.5 Station Number Attributes – I to IV PGM Codes 131-135
Station Number Attributes define features and functions available to the station number. Generally,
the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 2.3.3.7-1 to 5 for a
description of the features and the input required.
PROCEDURE:
STATION NUMBER ATTR 1
1.
-
ENTER STA RANGE
100- 110 NUM ATTR 1
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
3.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to table 2.3.3.7-1 to 5.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting, refer to table
2.3.3.7-1 to 5.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Refer to the table 2.3.3.7-1 to 5
Press the [PGM] button and dial:
131 for Station Number Attributes 1
132 for Station Number Attributes 2
133 for Station Number Attributes 3
134 for Station Number Attributes 4
135 for Station Number CLI Attributes
For a single
DISPLAY
2-25
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.3.5-1 STATION NUMBER ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 131)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
STA NAME
….............
Enables user name entry. The name is displayed on
TENANT GROUP
(1-9): 1
Specify tenant group for station
3
DIGIT CONVERSION TBL
(1-9): 1
Specify Digit conversion table for station.
4
PASSWORD
….........
Password is employed to control access to the
1
2
the LCD of Digital Phones.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 16
Chars
1~9(MG-300)
1
1~5(MG-100)
1~9
1
0 ~ 12 digits
system resources and facilities. Walking COS, CO/IP
Group access DISA callers and certain Call Forward
types may require the input of a valid password.
5
BUSY SVC
(0-3): BUSY TONE
When a station is busy and if another new call is
0:Busy Tone
arrived, station treats this new call following this
1:Camp-on
option.
Busy Tone
2:Call Wait
3:Pilot Hunt
6
CHARGE MODE
(0-1): REPORT
If ‘FREE’, the intercom call is not printed/saved to
0:Free
SMDR even though ‘ICM CALL’ SMDR is enabled.
1:Report
Report
If ‘REPORT’, the intercom call is included to SMDR
according to the ICM CALL SMDR Attributes.
7
SMDR HIDDEN DIGIT
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
If enabled and station makes an outgoing call, dialed
0:Disable
digits are shown in SMDR with hidden digit rule by
1:Enable
Disable
SMDR attribute. If disabled, all of dialed digits will be
displayed.
8
HOTDESK AGENT NUMBER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Permits a station number as hot desk agent number.
0: OFF
To make this feature effective, station number must
1: ON
OFF
be S-DN & SADN.
9
TIME TABLE INDEX
(1-9): 1
Specify Time Table index for station.
1-9, None
none
Table 2.3.3.5-2 STATION NUMBER ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 132)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
FORCED HANDFREE ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
When placing an intercom call, a user can change the
0:Disable
ICM signaling mode, Tone Ring to Hands free answer
1:Enable
DEFAULT
Disable
mode or Hands free answer to Tone Ring mode.
2
3
FORWARD ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station.
0:Disable
OFFNET FORWARD ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
A station must be allowed Off Net Fwd to forward
0:Disable
external incoming calls outside the system or
1:Enable
Enable
1:Enable
Enable
otherwise establish a CO-to-CO connection
4
5
DND ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enables DND to be activated by the station.
INTRUSION ACCESS
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
Enables intrusion to gain access to an active call.
0:Disable
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
1:Enable
2-26
Disable
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
6
7
Issue 1.0
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
MOBILE EXT ACCESS
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
Enables mobile extension ability.
RANGE
HOOK FLASH MODE
(0-3) : FLASH NORMAL
Determine the operation when SLT user press hook-
0. FLASH
FLASH
flash button during conversation.
NORMAL
NORMAL
0. FLASH NORMAL: Hook Flash can be detected. In
1. FLASH
0:Disable
DEFAULT
Enable
1:Enable
addition, it will be operated normal case flow.
IGNORE
1. FLASH IGNORE: Hook Flash cannot be detected.
2. FLASH
All of hook flash will be ignored at any time.
2. FLASH DROP: When Hook Flash is detected, the
line will be disconnected.
DROP
3. HOLD
RELEASE
3. HOLD RELEASE: Drop the holding line if system
detects Hook Flash and then On-Hook during dialing
state.
8
AUTO PICKUP
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
If a group member is ringing, another member of the
0:Disable
Group can Pick-Up a call ringing at another member
1:Enable
Disable
by simply going “Off-hook”.
Table 2.3.3.5-3 STATION NUMBER ATTRIBUTES IV (PGM 133)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
CO QUEUE ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable CO Queuing
RANGE
CONFERENCE ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable Conference call
WAKE UP ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable Wake-up Alarm feature
STN CALL BACK ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable call back feature when a called station is
0:Disable
busy.
1:Enable
ACNR ACCESS
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
Enable ACNR feature
0:Disable
ABSENCE NOTICE ACCESS
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
Enable Absence notice feature
CALL WAIT ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable to leave a call wait when a called station
0:Disable
does not answer or in DND state.
1:Enable
CAMP ON ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable camp-on feature.
0:Disable
VOICE OVER ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enable voice over feature.
PREPAID CALL USAGE
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
Enable prepaid call
KEYPAD FACILITY USAGE
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
Enable keypad facility
0:Disable
DEFAULT
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Enable
1:Enable
Enable
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Enable
1:Enable
Enable
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Disable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Disable
1:Enable
0:Disable
1:Enable
2-27
Disable
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.3.5-4 STATION NUMBER ATTRIBUTES IV (PGM 134)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
SPEED ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Gives station speed dial bins access authority
PAGE ACCESS
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
Permits station to make page
MEET ME ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Enables ‘meet me’ feature when there is a page.
CALL DURATION RESTRICT
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : DISABLE
Restricts CO Call Duration to station
SLT BLOCK BACK CALL
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
When a SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO call
0:Disable
to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released
1:Enable
PILOT HUNT RING
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
Permits station to receive pilot hunt ring
0:Disable
ACR USER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
Sets Anonymous Call Restrict service
8
WAKE UP SET(HH:MM)
NOT ASSIGNED
Sets wake-up time
HH:MM
8
WAKEUP REPEAT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables daily repeating alarm
0: OFF
BRANCH/BRIDGE LINE
(0-3: OFF
Set branch/bridge line feature
0:OFF
Branch : Conference call by pressing {DN} button in
1:ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
RANGE
0:Disable
DEFAULT
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Enable
1:Enable
0:Disable
Disable
1:Enable
Disable
Enable
1:Enable
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
OFF
1: ON
OFF
use
Bridge: Bridge call by pressing {DN} button in use.
Bridge(Softphone): Auto bridge if Phontage/UC
Client’s IP bridge is enabled
11
AUTO PRIVACY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables auto privacy feature (to restrict the
0:OFF
intrusion/call-wait/camp-on/OHVA in busy station)
1:ON
OFF
Table 2.3.3.5-5 STATION CLI ATTRIBUTES (PGM 135)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
CLIP DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP), an ISDN
RANGE
0: OFF
service, sends the number of the calling party to the
1: ON
DEFAULT
ON
system in the call SETUP message. If enabled, the
number will be shown in the Digital phone LCD.
2
COLP DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
COLP (Connected Line Id Presentation), an ISDN service,
0: OFF
sends the number of the answering party to the system in
1: ON
OFF
the call CONNECT message. If enabled, the number will
be shown in the Digital Phone LCD.
3
CLI/REDIRECT
(1:RED/0:CLI):CLI
When an incoming ISDN call is redirected, the call
0: CLI
SETUP message will contain an original and redirected
1:
CLI. This selection determines if the Digital Phone will
Redirect
CLI
display the original or redirected CLI number.
4
CLIR WHEN OUTGOING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction), an ISDN
0:OFF
service, removes calling party Id sent from the PSTN to
1:ON
the called party with a RESTRICT instruction in the
SETUP message. If enabled here, the system will send
the RESTRICT instruction to the PSTN when an outgoing
ISDN call is placed.
2-28
OFF
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
5
Issue 1.0
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
COLR WHEN ANSWER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
COLR (Connected Line Id Restriction), an ISDN service,
RANGE
0:OFF
removes connected party Id sent from the PSTN to the
1:ON
DEFAULT
OFF
calling party with a RESTRICT instruction in the
CONNECT message. If enabled here, the system will
send the restrict instruction to the PSTN when the station
answers an ISDN call.
6
When not restricted (FLEX 4 & 5 above), this entry is
CLI NUMBER
….....................
24 digits
added to the number sent in the ISDN call SETUP or
CONNECT message in place of the station number.
7
When an incoming ISDN call is forwarded by the ISDN,
CFWD CLI/REDIRECT
(1:RED/0:CLI):CLI
the call SETUP message will contain an original and
redirected CLI. This selection determines if the Digital
0: CLI
CLI
1:
Redirect
Phone will display the original or redirected number.
8
9
IGNORE CALLER CLIR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When receive a call with CLIR option, ignore the option
0:OFF
and display CID.
1:ON
MOBILE EXTENSION CLI
(0-2): CALLER NO
When mobile extension makes a call, CLI is determined
0: Caller
by this option. (0:Caller No, 1:Mobile Station No, 2:Caller
No
No + Mobile Staton No)
OFF
Caller No
1: Mobile
Sta No
2:Caller+
Mobile
Sta
10
11
12
LONG CLI 1
….....................
If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1, Long CLI 1 is
LONG CLI 2
….....................
If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2, Long CLI 2 is
LONG CLI 3
….....................
If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 3, Long CLI 3 is
24 digits
sent.
24 digits
sent.
24 digits
sent.
2.3.3.6 Station Class-of-Service – PGM Code 137
All stations are assigned a Class-of-Service (COS), which determines the ability of the user to dial
certain types of calls, refer to table 2.3.3.8-1,2. Separate COS assignments are made for Day,
Night and Timed Mode system operation. Maximum level of COS privileges is 16 (0 ~ 15). These
privileges are represented in Toll Exception Table (PGM CODE 250). By default, all stations are
assigned with a Station COS of 1, no restrictions for all three modes.
The station COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall dialing or Toll restrictions.
PROCEDURE:
STATION COS ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 137.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
ENTER STA RANGE
100-110 COS ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
2-29
For a single
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
3.
-
Issue 1.0
Press desired Flex button number (1~3),
Flex 1: Day COS
Flex 2: Night COS
Flex 3: Timed COS
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Station COS, refer to Table
2.3.3.6-1,2 for each COS service.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.3.6-1 STATION COS ATTRIBUTES (PGM 137)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
DAY COS
(00-15) : 01
Station’s COS in Day mode
00-15
1
2
NIGHT COS
(00-15) : 01
Station’s COS in Night mode
00-15
1
3
TIMED COS
(00-15) : 01
Station’s COS in Timed mode
00-15
1
Table 2.3.3.6-2 STATION CLASS-OF-SERVICE (PGM 137)
STATION COS
RESTRICTIONS
0
Intercom and Emergency number calls are allowed. Incoming and transferred calls are allowed.
1
No restrictions are placed on dialing.
2 ~ 15
Assignments in each toll exception table are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
- If a table has no entries, no restrictions are applied.
- If there are only Deny entries, restrictions are provided as Deny only.
- If there are only Allow entries, restrictions are provided as Allow only.
- If there are both Allow and Deny entries, the Deny entries are searched. If the dialed number matches a Deny
entry, the call is restricted; if no match is found the call is allowed.
2.3.3.7 Station Automatic Dial Attribute – PGM Code 138
When a station goes to an off-hook condition (lifts handset or presses [SPEAKER] button), the
system normally provides an intercom dial tone. In place of the dial tone, the station can be
programmed to dial the preprogrammed (max 16) digits. We call this programmed digit Auto-DialDigit. If the Auto-Dial-Digit is configured and if no digit within ‘auto dial pause time’ is pressed then
the system dials the ‘Auto-Dial-Digit’ automatically.
PROCEDURE:
STATION AUTO DIAL ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 138.
ENTER STA RANGE
2-30
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
100 – 110 AUTO DIAL ATTR
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
3.
-
AUTO DIAL DGT
Issue 1.0
For a single
Press desired Flex button number (1~2),
Flex 1: Auto Dial Digit
Flex 2: Auto Dial Pause Time
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired auto dial digit. Max 16 digits available.
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter the auto dial pause time. 0 to 30 sec available
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
................
AUTO DIAL PAUSE TIME
(00-30) : 00(sec)
Table 2.3.3.7-1 STATION AUTO DIAL ATTRIBUTES (PGM 138)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Digits will be dialed automatically
AUTO DIAL DGT
……………
RANGE
Max 16
DEFAULT
-
digits
Auto dial pause time
AUTO DIAL PAUSE TIME
(00-30): 00(sec)
00-30
0
2.3.3.8 Station Preset Call Forward – PGM Code 142
This assignment allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a predetermined destination. Preset Call Forward can be assigned separately for Internal Unconditional,
Internal Busy, Internal No Answer, External Unconditional, External Busy, External No Answer
preset forwarding to any Station, Hunt group or External Telephone No.
PROCEDURE:
STA PRESET CALL FORWARD
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 142.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
ENTER STA RANGE
100 – 110 PRESSET FWD
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
3.
-
Press Flex button number (1~6) for the desired type of forward,
Flex 1: Internal Unconditional
Flex 2: Internal Busy
Flex 3: Internal No Answer
Flex 4: External Unconditional
Flex 5: External Busy
Flex 6: External No Answer
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the preset forward destination
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
2-31
For a single
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.3.8-1 STATION PRESET CALL FORWARD (PGM 142)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
INTERNAL UNCOND
….....................
The unconditional preset forward destination of
Max 32
internal(intercom) call
digits
INTERNAL BUSY
….....................
The busy preset forward destination of
Max 32
internal(intercom) call
digits
INTERNAL NO-ANSWER
….....................
The no-answer preset forward destination of
Max 32
internal(intercom) call
digits
EXTERNAL UNCOND
….....................
The unconditional preset forward destination of
Max 32
external call
digits
EXTERNAL BUSY
….....................
The busy preset forward destination of external call
Max 32
EXTERNAL NO-ANSWER
….....................
The no-answer preset forward destination of external
Max 32
call
digits
DEFAULT
-
-
-
-
-
digits
-
2.3.3.9 Station Call Forward – PGM Code 143
Station’ call forward can be assigned or changed.
PROCEDURE:
STATION FORWARD SET
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 143.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
ENTER STA RANGE
100 – 110 FORWARD SET
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5)
3.
4.
5.
For a single
Press desired Flex button number (1~4),
Flex 1: Forward Type
Flex 2: Forward Number
Flex 3: Forward Apply Time
Flex 4: Call Forward No Answer Timer
Flex 5: Forward Display
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer to the following
table.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.3.9-1 STATION CALL FORWARD (PGM 143)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
FORWARD TYPE
(0-4) : NOT ASSIGNED
Specify call forward type.
0:Not Assigned
Not
1:Unconditional
Assigned
2:Busy
3:No Answer
4:Busy or No
Answer
2-32
DEFAULT
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
3
Issue 1.0
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
FORWARD NUMBER
….....................
Specify Call Forward Destination by entering dial
Max 32 digits
FORWARD APPLY TIME
(0-3) : ALL
Specify Call Forward Applying Time
DEFAULT
-
digits.
0:All
ALL
1:Day
2:Night
3:Timed
4
Call Forward type – Busy or No Answer –
CFW NO ANS TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 015
( 0 ~ 600) sec
15sec
Enables the Forward Display Option to check
0: OFF
ON
forward information in idle state.
1: ON
employs this ‘CFW NO ANS TMR’ timer. If the
station does not respond during the ‘CFW NO
ANS TMR’ timer. Call is forwarded to ‘Call
Forward Destination’
5
FORWARD DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
2.3.3.10 Station VMIB Attribute – PGM Code 145
The following features are designed to assist Station interaction with the VMIB.
PROCEDURE:
STATION VMIB ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 145.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100-110). For a single station,
enter the same number twice.
3.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to the following table.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting, refer to Table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER STA RANGE
100 – 110 NUM ATR 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10)
Table 2.3.3.10-1 STATION VMIB ATTRIBUTE (PGM 145)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
VMIB ACCESS
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
Permits station access to VMIB.
0:Disable
PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX
(1-3): 1
Selected language type prompt is played to the user
AUTO-RECORD SERVICE
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : ENABLE
DEFAULT
Disable
1:Enable
1~3
1
Determines if user can record a conversation with
0:Disable
Disable
another user (internal/external). It can be used without
1:Enable
when accessing the VMIB.
two-way record button.
4
TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS): ENABLE
When allowed, the station can activate the Two-way
0:Disable
record feature to record a conversation.
1:Enable
2-33
Disable
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
TWO-WAY RECORD DEVICE
VM BOARDS
Determines the save location of Two-Way recorded
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
VM Boards
wav files: VM Boards, or Phontage. When Phontage is
selected, recorded wav files are saved on the hard
disk of the Phontage program-installed PC.
6
When station has new voice mail saved on the VM
REC-MSG BACKUP STA
PHONTAGE NUM: …………
internal boards, this information is reported to the
assigned Phontage number. Phontage user can
backup saved voice mail from VM internal boards to
the hard disk of the Phontage program-installed PC.
7
8
BACKUP MSG DELETE
(1:EN/0:DIS): ENABLE
When enabled, Phontage user can delete all voice
1:Enable
mail in VM internal boards.
0:Disable
VMIB MSG TYPE
(1:FIFO/0:LIFO):LIFO
Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved in
1:FIFO
either a FIFO (first-in-first-out) or LIFO (last-in-first-out)
0::LIFO
0:Disable
LIFO
order based on this entry.
9
VMIB NEW MSG NO
000
Display the number of new messages.
10
VMIB SAVE MSG NO
000
Display the number of saved messages.
2.3.3.11 Station Mobile Phone Attribute – PGM Code 146
A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with a Digital Phone. The Mobile phone can access
system resources available to the user’s wired phone and will receive incoming calls. The user
may be allowed to enable up to 2 Mobile extensions. Mobile phones are registered to a station
using mobile phone number and mobile phone’s CLI.
PROCEDURE:
STA MOBILE PHONE SET
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 146.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter mobile phone’s index (1-2) which may be
registered to a station.
ENTER STA RANGE
100 – 110 MOBILE ATT
ENTER ENTRY NUM (1-2)
MOBILE EXT 1 ATT
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
4.
-
MOBILE EXT 1 ENABLE
Press desired Flex button number (1-3),
Flex 1: enable mobile extension ability
Flex 2: mobile extension number
Flex 3: mobile extension CLI
5.
Use the dial-pad 1(ON) or 0(OFF) to enable mobile extension ability
6.
Use the dial-pad to enter a mobile extension number
7.
Use the dial-pad to enter a mobile extension CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
MOBILE EXT 1 NUMBER
........................
MOBILE EXT 1 CLI
For a single
........................
2-34
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
8.
Issue 1.0
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.3.11-1 STATION MOBILE PHONE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 146)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
MOBILE EXT 1 ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables mobile extension ability
MOBILE EXT 1 NUMBER
….....................
Mobile extension number
MOBILE EXT 1 CLI
….....................
Mobile extension CLI number
MOBILE EXT 2 ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables Second mobile extension ability
MOBILE EXT 2 NUMBER
….....................
Second Mobile extension number
6
MOBILE EXT 2 CLI
….....................
Second Mobile extension CLI number
7
MOBILE SERVICE MODE
(0-1): ALL CALL
Select Mobile Service Mode.
1
2
3
4
5
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
Max 24
-
digits
Max 24
-
digits
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
Max 24
-
digits
Max 24
digits
0
0: All call – Mobile Extension is operated about all call.
1: Service CLI Only – Mobile Extension is operated
with Mobile Service CLI
8
MOBILE SERVICE CLI 1
CLI 1 for Mobile Service
Max 24
9
MOBILE SERVICE CLI 2
CLI 2 for Mobile Service
Max 24
10
MOBILE SERVICE CLI 3
CLI 3 for Mobile Service
Max 24
11
MOBILE SERVICE CLI 4
CLI 4 for Mobile Service
Max 24
MOBILE SERVICE CLI 5
CLI 5 for Mobile Service
Max 24
digits
digits
digits
digits
12
digits
2.3.3.12 CO/IP Group Access – PGM Code 150
Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group, refer to CO Line
Attributes, PGM CODE 160, button 2/3. As a default, all stations are allowed access to CO/IP group 1.
PROCEDURE:
STATION CO GRP ACCESS
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 150.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
ENTER STA RANGE
SELECT CO GRP IDX
F1(1-24)/F2(-48)/F3(-72)
3.
-
Press desired Flex button number (1~3),
Flex 1: to access for CO line 1 to 24
Flex 2: to access for CO line 25 to 48
Flex 3: to access for CO line 49 to 72
2-35
For a single
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
CO GRP ACCESS
Issue 1.0
4.
Press the desired Flex button to toggle CO/IP Group access, LED on: group
access allowed, LED off: group access not allowed.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS CO GRP(1-24)
2.3.3.13 Internal Page Group Access – PGM Code 151
Each Digital Phone can be enabled internal page group access, allowing Stations the ability to
make announcements to each Internal Page Group.
PROCEDURE:
STA PAGE GRP ACCESS
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 151.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
ENTER STA RANGE
SELECT PAGE GRP IDX
F1:1-24 F2:25-30
3.
PAGE GROUP ACCESS
-
Press desired Flex button number (1~2),
Flex 1: to access for page zone 1 to 24
Flex 2: to access for page zone 25 to 30
-
Press the desired Flex button to toggle Internal Page Zone assignments
LED ON: station makes announcement
LED OFF: station does not make announcement.
4.
PRESS PAGE GRP(01-24)
5.
For a single
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Page Zone data.
2.3.3.14 Command Group Access – PGM Code 152Each Digital Phone can be enabled for Command Group access. If enabled, a station can make a
command conference call.
PROCEDURE:
CMD CALL GRP ACCESS
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 152.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110).
station, enter the same number twice.
ENTER STA RANGE
CMD CALL GRP ACCESS
PRESS GRP BTN (01-10)
3.
4.
For a single
The first 10 Flex button LEDs indicate assigned command call group. Press
the desired Flex button to toggle command call group assignments
LED ON: station use command call group
LED OFF: station does not use command call group
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Command group data.
2-36
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.4 CO LINE DATA – PGM CODES 160-179
2.3.4.1 CO Attribute I, II, III-PGM Code 160-162
CO Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines under control of the system.
PROCEDURE:
1.
CO LINE ATTRIBUTE
-
ENTER COL RANGE
001-008 CO LINE ATTR
Press the [PGM] button and dial:
160 for CO/IP Attributes I
161 for CO/IP Attributes II
162 for CO/IP Attributes III.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240.
3.
4.
Press Flex button to access desired menu. Refer to Table 2.3.4.1-1 to 3 for
each attributes.
Use the dial pad to change the value.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the changed data.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-12)
Table 2.3.4.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Set CO line type as DID or
0:Normal
0.Normal
Normal
1: DID
001 – 030 OUTGOING GRP
NO
(01-72) : 01
Set CO Group Number to apply to
01–72, none(MG-300)
outgoing calls
01–24, none(MG-100)
001 – 030 INCOMING GRP
NO
(01-72) : 01
Set CO Group Number to apply to
01–72, none(MG-300)
incoming calls
01–24, none(MG-100)
001 – 030 TENANT NO
(1-9) : 1
Set Tenant group number to
1-9(MG-300)
apply to CO lines.
1-3(MG-100)
6
001 – 030 DGT CONVERT
TBL
(1-9) : 1
Set Digit Conversion Table index
1-9
2
7
001 – 030 SIGNAL TYPE
(0-7) : NO SIGNAL
Set Answer Signal Type
0: No Signal
0.
1: Send Wink(IC)
Signal
4
5
001 – 030 SVC TYPE
(0:NOR/1:DID) : DID
DEFAULT
-
3
Displays physical line type of
RANGE
Display only
2
001 – 030 CO TYPE
ISDN/PRI
selected CO line
2: Wait Seize Ack(OG)
3: Send Wink & Wait Sz Ack
4: Send & Wait Sans
5: Send Wink & Send Answer(IC)
6: Wait Ack & Send Answer(OG)
7: Send All & Wait All
2-37
01
01
1
No
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001 – 030 RLS TIMING
(0-2) : FIRST RLS
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
If Release Timing is set to first
0: First Release
release, CO line is released when
1: Caller Release
one party release the call. If
2: Called Release
DEFAULT
0. First RLS
Caller or Called Release is set,
CO line is released when caller or
called party released the call.
9
10
001 – 030 INC/OUT MODE
(0-2) : BOTH
Each CO lines can be set to only
0: Incoming Only
incoming call is allowed or
1: Outgoing Only
outgoing is allowed only.
2: Allow Both
001 – 030 DIALING TYPE
(0-2) : DTMF
Signal type can be selected;
0: DTMF
DTMF, Pulse, R2MFC.
1: PULSE
001 – 030 CHARGE MODE
(0-1) : REPORT
If ‘FREE’, the external call though
0: Free
CO line is not printed/saved to
1: Report
2. Both
0.DTMF
2: R2
11
1.REPORT
SMDR even though SMDR is
enabled.
If ‘REPORT’, the external call
though CO, line is included to
SMDR according to the SMDR
Attributes.
12
001 – 030 METERING
TYPE
(00-12) : NONE
According to PSTN service type,
metering type can be selected
among 00 ~ 12 to manage call
charge. 01 ~ 06 can be applied to
LCO lines, 07 ~ 12 can be applied
to ISDN lines.
00: None
01: 12KHz
02: 16KHz
03: 50KHz
04: SPR
05: PPR
06: NPR
07: AOC 0(Standard)
08: AOC 1(Italy & Spain)
09: AOC 2(Finland)
10: AOC 3(Australia)
11: AOC 4(Belgium)
12: AOC 5(Netherlands)
0.None
Table 2.3.4.1-2 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 161)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001 – 001 VOIP/QSIG MODE
(1-3) :SIP/PRI(1)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Determines if SIP/PRI, H.323/BRI or
1: SIP/PRI
Qsig is selected for each VOIP(or
2: H.323/BRI
DEFAULT
1. SIP/PRI
ISDN) lines.
3: Qsig
001 – 001 DROP TYPE
(0:LOOP/1:POL) : LOOP
LCO line drop type
0: Loop
001 – 001 FLASH TYPE
(0:LOOP/1:GND) : LOOP
LCO line Flash type
4
001 – 001 Flash TMR
(001-300) : 050(10ms)
CO Flash Timer
001 – 300(10ms base)
050
5
001 – 001 OPEN LOOP TMR
(00-20) : 00(100ms)
Open Loop Timer
00 – 20(100ms base)
00
6
001 – 001 LINE LENGTH
(0–3): 0(0km)
LCO line length
0: 0km
0.0km
2
3
0.Loop
1: Polarity Reverse
0: Loop
0.Loop
1: Ground
1: 3km
2: 5km
3: 7km
2-38
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
7
001 – 001 ZONE NO
(1-9) : 1
Zone number of CO lines
1-9
1
8
001 – 001 PROMPT LANGUAGE
(1-3) : 1
VMIB Prompt Index
1-3
1
9
001 – 001 ISDN CD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ISDN lines can be set to use Call
0: OFF
0. OFF
Deflection service if PSTN supports
1: ON
Call Deflection.
Table 2.3.4.1-3 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 162)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
CO ACCESS MODE
(0-2): CO LINE
CO lines can be set to blocked, or
0: Blocked Line
Normal
CO line or Dedicated line.
1: Normal CO Line
Line
DIGIT SENDING MODE
(0-1) : OVERLAP
CO lines can be set to send digit
0: Overlap
with overlap or enblock method.
1: Enblock
MAX DGT LEN
(00-32) : 32
Number of dialed digits can be
00-32
32
OVERLAP MIN DGT LEN
(00-32) : 00
Number of minimum digits can be
00-32
00
CHECK PASSWORD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Reserved for Password.
0: OFF
0FF
Password can be requested when
1: ON
CO
2: Dedicated Line
2
3
4
5
Overlap
limited.
limited for overlap dialing.
the CO line is seized.
6
R2 CONNECT MODE
(0–1):END-TO-END
R2 line connection mode
0: END-TO-END
ENE-TO-END
7
R2MFC BACKWARD VAL
(01–15): 01
R2MFC Backward Value
01-15
01
8
DUMMY DIAL TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When CO line is seized, dummy
0: OFF
OFF
dial tone can be provided for in
1: ON
1: LINK-BY-LINK
case if PSTN does not provide it.
2.3.4.2 CO CID Attributes – PGM Code 163
CID Attributes are assigned for Analog CO Line CID services.
PROCEDURE:
CO CID ATTRIBUTE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 163.
2.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
4.
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-001 CID ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-8)
See the following table
DISPLAY
2-39
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.4.2-1 CO CID ATTRIBUTES (PGM 163)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
DESCRIPTION
001-001 CID MODE
(0-4) : DISABLED
RANGE
CID signal type can be assigned according
0: Disabled
to the CID type PSTN provides.
1: FSK
DEFAULT
Disabled
2 : DTAS FSK
3: DTMF
4: R-CID
2
001–001 RCID DETECT
(1:ALL/0:LOCAL) : ALL
Russia CID Detect Mode
001–001 RCID REQUEST
(1:AUTO/0:USER) : AUTO
Russia CID Request Mode
4
001–001 RCID DGT NUMBER
(04-10) : 07
Russia CID Digit Number
04-10
07
5
001–001 RCID NO ANS TMR
(001-300) : 020(sec)
Russia CID NO-Answer Timer
001-300(sec)
020
6
001–001 RCID REQ COUNT
(1-3) : 1
Russia CID Request Count
1-3
1
7
001–001 RCID REQ FIRST-D
(010-150) : 037(10ms)
Russia CID First Delay Timer
010-
037
001–001 RCID REQ RETRY-D
(10-30) : 10(10ms)
Russia CID Retry Delay Timer
3
8
0: LOCAL
ALL
1: ALL
0: USER
AUTO
1: AUTO
150(10msec)
10-30(10msec)
10
2.3.4.3 CO Incoming Attribute I, II – PGM Code 165-166
CO Incoming Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines under control of the system
when there is an incoming CO call.
PROCEDURE:
CO INCOMING ATTR1
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 166.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice (01-80 for MG-100, 001-240 for MG-300).
3.
Press Flex button to access desired menu. Refer to the following Table for
each attributes.
- Use the dial pad to change the value.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the changed data.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-008 INC ATTR1
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-14)
See the following table
DISPLAY
4.
Table 2.3.4.3-1 CO INCOMING ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 165)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
NAME
. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Incoming CO line name can be
SCREEN INDICATOR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 16 characters
-
Determines if screen indicator will be
0: Off (user-provided, not
OFF
inserted in ISDN messages.
screened)
assigned.
1:
On
(user-provided,
verified and passed)
2-40
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CALLING TYPE
(0-4):SUBSCRIBER
CALLING NUM PLAN
(0-5):UNKOWN
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
For Incoming calls on the ISDN Line,
0: Unknown
this parameter defines the “Type of
1: International
Number Plan” provided in Connected
2: National
Party Information Element of the ISDN
3: Subscriber
call CONNECT message
4: Not Used
Select Connected number plan of ISDN
0: Unknown
CONNECT message.
1: I SDN/Telephony
DEFAULT
Subscribe
Unknown
2: Data
3: Telex
4: National
5: Private
5
6
SEND PROGRESS IND
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, Progress
0: Off
Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN.
1: On
R2 ANI SVC REQ
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON to R2 line,
0: Off
system request ANI digits (CLI data) to
1: On
OFF
OFF
the calling party.
7
ICLID SERVICE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, incoming call
0: Off
is routed according to ICLID table(PGM
1: On
OFF
262)
8
OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, original
0: Off
caller’s CLI is sent when there is transit
1: On
OFF
call.
9
OWN CODE
. . . . . . . . . . .
Own Code
Max 16 digits
-
10
CLI PREFIX CODE
..
Prefix code is inserted ahead of
Max 2 digits
-
INTERNATIONAL CODE
. . . .
International Code is inserted ahead of
TRANSIT CLI 1
. . . . . . . . . .. . .
If Transit CLI type of outgoing CO line is
TRANSIT CLI 2
. . . . . . . . . .. . .
If Transit CLI type of outgoing CO line is
TRANSIT CLI 3
. . . . . . . . . .. . .
If Transit CLI type of outgoing CO line is
CLI CONV. TABLE
(1-9): 1
CLI Converstion table index
11
12
13
14
15
received CLI data according to call type.
Max 4 digits
received CLI data according to call type.
Max 24 digits
-
Max 24 digits
-
Max 24 digits
-
1-9
1
set to 1, Transit CLI 1 is sent.
set to 2, Transit CLI 2 is sent.
set to 3, Transit CLI 3 is sent.
Table 2.3.4.3-2 CO INCOMING ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 166)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
PROVIDE DIAL TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, dial tone is
0: Off
provided to networking CO.
1: On
BLF USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, flex button LED will
0: Off
be flashing when CO line is programmed on
1: On
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
the button.
3
UNSUP CONF EXTEND
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) : DISABLE
If this feature is set to ON, unsupervised
0: Disable
conference timer can be extended by dial
1: Enable
DISABLE
feature code after warning tone is heard.
4
BLOCK IN CLRFWD TMR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, CO line is blocked
0: Off
after clear forward waiting time.
1: On
2-41
OFF
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
CPT DETECT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, Call processing
0: Off
tone is detected to disconnect LCO line.
1: On
ANSWER WAITING CALL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, system sends
0: Off
answer when call is waited.
1: On
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, any station to
0: Off
answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the
1: On
DEFAULT
ON
OFF
OFF
Universal Answer feature code.
8
If CO release signaling is not completed
RLS GUARD TIME
(00-15) : 01(sec)
00-15 (sec)
01
000-255(min)
000
successfully, CO line is disconnected when
timer expires.
9
When there is conference call without
UNSUP CONF TIMER
(000-255): 000(min)
supervisor, or there is any CO-to-CO call, the
call is disconnected after timer expires. The
warning tone is heard before the line is
disconnected.
10
WAIT CLRFWD TIME
(001-300) ; 300(sec)
Clear Forward Waiting Time
001-300 (sec)
300
11
MAX RING TIME
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Max. Ring Time for when incoming CO calls
015-300 (sec)
120
12
DISA SUPERVISION TMR
(1-9): 2(sec)
DISA Supervision Timer
1-9 (sec)
2
13
VMIB PLAY DELAY TMR
(0-9): 0(sec)
Determines the amount of time paused before
0-9 (sec)
0
INCOMING TIME TABLE
(1-9): .
The time table index to be applied to incoming
1-9, none
none
14
are transferred/recalled.
playing VMIB announcement.
CO Call
2.3.4.4 CO Ring Assignment – PGM Code 167
Each CO line is assigned to stations or feature code for an incoming call (Ring). Separate ring
assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring modes. The Ring signal can be set for
immediate or delayed ringing allowing other stations to be assigned ringing and answered prior to
delayed station. If ‘DISA Tone Service’ feature code is assigned, DISA service is activated at the
CO line.
PROCEDURE:
CO RING ASSIGNMENT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 167.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01~80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
3.
Select Day mode and Press the desired Flex button; refer to the following
Table
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-001 CO RING ASSIGN
F1:DAY/F2:NIGHT/F3:TIMED
See the following table
DISPLAY
2-42
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.4.4-1 CO RING ASSIGNMENT (PGM 167)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE TYPE
(0-3) : ALL RING
If service type is set as 0 ~ 2, ring option is
0: All Ring
applied to ring assigned stations.
1: First Idle
Otherwise, if service type is set to 3, feature
2: Circular
code is activated on incoming call.
3: Feature Code
If Service type is set to Feature Code and valid
Valid Feature
feature code is assigned, then assigned feature
Code (Refer to
is activated when there is an incoming call.
PGM115)
FEATURE CODE
. . . . . . . .
RANGE
DEFAULT
All Ring
-
NOTE: Feature Code is not applied to rerouted
calls.
3
4
FEATURE DELAY(3sec)
(00-30) : 00
If Service type is set to Feature code, it can be
100[0]
. . . .
Assigned station and delay value can be
00-30
00
delayed.
. . . .
. . . .
-
-
To change station’s ring assign status, enter
Start Station
-
desired station range. (Max 30 stations can be
& End Station
displayed. Volume Up/Down key is used to
scroll data.
5
MEMBER ASSIGN
ENTER STA RANGE
assigned)
5–1
Enter delay value; if delay is 0, station will start
101- 101 DELAY
(0-9) : 0
0-9
STA100 (Port
to ring immediately. If delay value is deleted,
0 ): delay 0
the station will not ring.
Others: not
Otherwise if delay is 1 ~ 9, the station will start
assigned
to ring after delay time(3 times of delay value)
2.3.4.5 Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attribute – PGM Code 168
If the CO line is set to Normal type, it can have normal CO Attributes including DISA service option.
PROCEDURE:
INC CO NOR/DISA ATT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 168.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
3.
Select Day mode and Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-001 NORMAL/DISA ATT
F1:DAY/F2:NIGHT/F3:TIMED
See the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.5-1 INCOMING CO NORMAL/DISA ATTRIBUTES(PGM 168)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
CO ACCESS FROM DISA
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, CO to CO call can
0: Off
be made from DISA line.
1: On
DISA TO CO PASSWORD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When making CO-to-CO call from DISA line,
0: Off
password can be requested.
1: On
2-43
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
OFF
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
DISA RETRY COUNT
(1-9) : 3
When DISA call is failed to route desired
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
1-9
3
00-20(sec)
00
destination, the call can be retried as much as
Retry Count.
4
5
PRESET FORWARD TIME
(00-20): 00(sec)
If the CO is not answered in Preset Forward
PRESET FWD RING TBL
(01-80): ..
Preset Forward ring table index can be
Time, it will be routed to assigned ring table.
01-80
-
assigned. (Refer to PGM 181)
2.3.4.6 CO Incoming Alternate Destination – PGM Codes 169
When a DID or DISA is routed to an abnormal destination, the call can be rerouted to alternate
destination. The destination is separately defined for Day/ Night/ Timed mode according to several
conditions.
PROCEDURE:
CO INCOMING ALT DEST
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 169.
2.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
Select Day mode and Dial Error Type; refer to Following Table.
4.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-001 ENTER DAY MODE
F1:DAY/F2:NIGHT/F3:TIMED
001-001 DAY ALT DEST
ENTER ERR TYPE(F1-F8)
See the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.6-1 CO INCOMING ALTERNATE DESTINATION (PGM 169)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
-
001-002 DAY ALT DEST
ENTER ERR TYPE(F1F8)
Abnormal case can be selected as error type.
RANGE
F1: Busy
DEFAULT
-
F2: No Answer
F3: Invalid
F4:Transfer No Answer
F5: Recall No Answer
F6: DND
F7: Off-Hook State
F8: Error
1
2
DAY) BUSY DEST
DISCONNECT
The CO call is disconnected. Every
DAY) BUSY DEST
ATTENDANT
The CO call is routed to Attendant.
-
-
-
-
destination is set to ‘Disconnect’ by default.
2-44
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
DAY) BUSY DEST
CO RING ASSIGN
The CO call is routed according to Ring
DAY) BUSY DEST
ALT RING TBL(0180):..
If destination is set to Alt Ring Table and the
5
DAY) BUSY DEST
TONE
6
DAY) BUSY DEST
PILOT HUNT GROUP
3
4
RANGE
DEFAULT
-
-
01-80
..
The Error / Busy tone is heard.
-
-
The CO call is routed to Pilot Hunt Group of
-
-
-
-
-
-
Assign Table (PGM 167).
table index is assigned, the CO call is routed
according to Alt Ring Table (PGM 181).
the original destination.
Not available when ‘Invalid’ case.
7
8
DAY) XFER NO ANS
DEST
RING
The call is routed to the same destination
DAY) XFER NO ANS
DEST
XFER STA
The CO call is routed to the transferred
again. Only possible for ‘Transfer No Answer’
or ‘Recall No Answer’ case.
station again. Only possible for ‘Transfer No
Answer’ case.
2.3.4.7 CO Outgoing Attributes I, II – PGM Code 170-171
CO Outgoing Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines under control of the system
when there is an outgoing CO call.
PROCEDURE:
1.
CO OUTGOING ATTR1
-
ENTER COL RANGE
2.
001-008 OG ATTR1
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-16)
3.
See the following table
DISPLAY
4.
Press the [PGM] button and dial:
170 for CO Outgoing Attributes I
171 for CO Outgoing Attributes II
Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240.
Press Flex button to access desired menu. Refer to the following Table for
each attributes.
Use the dial pad to change the value.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the changed data.
Table 2.3.4.7-1 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 170)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SCREEN INDICATOR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Determines if screen indicator is
0: Off(user-provided, not
used in ISDN message.
screened)
DEFAULT
OFF
1: On(user-provided,
verified and passed)
2
3
SENDING CALLER NO
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
Sending Caller number message of
0: Off
ISDN
1: On
CALLING TYPE
(0-4):SUBSCRIBER
For outgoing calls on the ISDN
0: Unknown
Line, this parameter defines the
1: International
“Type of Number Plan” provided in
2: National
Calling Party Information Element
3: Subscriber
of the ISDN call SETUP message
4: Not Used
2-45
ON
Subscribe
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CALLING NUM PLAN
(0-5):UNKOWN
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Select Calling number plan of ISDN
0: Unknown
SETUP message.
1: I SDN/Telephony
DEFAULT
Unknown
2: Data
3: Telex
4: National
5: Private
5
CALLED NUM PLAN ID
(0-5):UNKNOWN
Select Called number plan of ISDN
0: Unknown
SETUP message.
1: I SDN/Telephony
Unknown
2: Data
3: Telex
4: National
5: Private
6
BEARER CAPABILITY
(0-5): SPEECH
Select Bearer Capability of ISDN
0: Speech
SETUP message.
1: Unrestricted
0:Speech
2: Restricted
3: 3.1KHz Audio
4: 7KHz
5:Video
7
ISDN LINE TYPE
(1:U-LAW/0:A-LAW): A-LAW
The system will encode voice using
0: A-law
the A-law or u-law PCM format and
1: U-law
0:A-Law
should be set to match the ISDN
Back bone type.
8
9
SENDING COMPLETE IE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If set, will send ‘Sending Complete’
0: Off
IE to ISDN SETUP message.
1: On
MAKE TRANSIT CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When no CLI is sent with a transit
0: Off
call, system will initiate a CLI to CO
1: On
OFF
OFF
direct transit call.
10
OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON and
0: Off
same feature of incoming CO
1: On
OFF
attribute is also set to ON, then
Own code of outgoing CO line is
inserted to the CLI of transit CO
call.
11
USE REPRESENTATIVE CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON,
0: Off
representative CLI is used to every
1: On
OFF
outgoing call of selected CO line.
12
REPRESENTITIVE CLI
. . . . . . . . . . .
When ‘Use Represent
Max 16 digits
-
Max 16 digits
-
CLI type can be selected.
0: Normal
0:Normal
If set to Long CLI, only selected
1: Long CLI 1(PGM 135-F10)
long CLI data is used instead of
2: Long CLI 2(PGM 135-F11)
normal CLI.
3: Long CLI 3(PGM 135-F12)
Transit CLI type can be selected.
0: Normal
If set to transit CLI, only selected
1: CLI 1(PGM 165-F8)
transit CLI data is used instead of
2: CLI 2(PGM 165-F9)
normal CLI.
3: CLI 3(PGM 165-F10)
CID’(PGM170-F10) is set to ON,
representative CLI is sent when
making outgoing call regardless of
other CLI attribute.
13
OWN CODE
. . . . . . . . . . .
CO Own code can be inserted
before station number when making
outgoing call CLI.
14
15
CLI TYPE (0-3)
NORMAL
TRANSIT CLI TYPE(0-3)
NORMAL
2-46
0:Normal
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
16
CLI CONV. TABLE
(1-9): .
CLI Conversion Table index
1-9, none
none
17
REDIRECTION NO
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Redirection number
0: Off
OFF
ACNR EXTEND TIMER
(00-99) : 00 (sec)
ACNR extend timer
18
1: On
00-99
00
Table 2.3.4.7-2 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 171)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
CPT DETECT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
RANGE
If this feature is set to ON, CPT(Call
0: Off
Processing Tone) is detected and the line
1: On
DEFAULT
ON
can be dropped.
2
UNSUP CONF EXTEND
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, Unsupervised
0: Off
Conf Timer can be extended by dialing
1: On
OFF
feature code after warning tone is heard.
3
PROVIDE RING BACK TN
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, dummy ring back
0: Off
tone is heard by system when CO line is
1: On
OFF
seized.
4
BLF USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this feature is set to ON, flex button LED
0: Off
will be flashing when CO line is
1: On
ON
programmed on the button.
5
If CO release signaling is not completed
RLS GUARD TIMER
(00-15) : 02(sec)
00-15 (sec)
02
000-255(min)
000
001-300 (sec)
120
1-9, none
none
successfully, CO line is disconnected when
the timer expires.
6
When there is conference call without
UNSUP CONF TIMER
(000-255): 000(min)
supervisor, or there is any CO-to-CO call,
the call is disconnected after the timer
expires. The warning tone is heard before
the line is disconnected.
7
8
MAX TRANSFER RING TIMER
(001-300): 120(sec)
Max. Ring Time when outgoing CO is
OUTGOING TIME TABLE
(1-9): .
The time table index to be applied to
transferred/recalled.
outgoing CO Calls
2.3.4.8 CO Outgoing Alternate Destination – PGM Codes 173
Calls can be routed to an alternate destination that can be separately defined for Day/ Night/
Timed mode according to several conditions.
PROCEDURE:
CO OUTGOING ALT DEST
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 173.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
Select Day mode and Dial Error Type; refer to Following Table.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-001 ENTER DAY MODE
F1:DAY/F2:NIGHT/F3:TIMED
001-002 DAY ALT DEST
3.
ENTER ERR TYPE(F1-F3)
2-47
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
See the following table
Issue 1.0
4.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.8-1 CO OUTGOING ALTERNATE DESTINATION (PGM 173)
BTN
-
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
001-002 DAY ALT DEST
ENTER ERR TYPE(F1-F3)
Abnormal case can be selected as error type.
DAY) NO ANSWER
DISCONNECT
The CO call is disconnected. Every
2
DAY) NO ANSWER
ATTENDANT
3
RANGE
F1: Recall No Answer
DEFAULT
-
F2:Transfer No Answer
F3: No Answer
1
4
-
-
The CO call is routed to Attendant.
-
-
DAY) NO ANSWER
CO RING ASSIGN
The CO call is routed according to Ring
-
-
DAY) NO ANSWER
ALT RING TBL(01-80):..
If destination is set to Alt Ring Table and the
01-80
..
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
destination is set to ‘Disconnect’ by default.
Assign Table. (see PGM 167)
table index is assigned, the CO call is routed
according to Alt Ring Table. (See PGM 181)
5
6
7
8
DAY) NO ANSWER
TONE
If destination is set to Tone, the Error / Busy
DAY) NO ANSWER
PILOT HUNT GROUP
The CO call is routed to Pilot Hunt Group of
DAY) NO ANSWER
RING
The call is routed to the same destination
DAY) XFER NO ANS
XFER STA
The CO call is routed to the transferred
tone is heard.
the original destination.
again.
station again.
Only possible for ‘Transfer No Answer’ case.
2.3.4.9 CO Outgoing Inter-Digit Timer – PGM Code 174
When making an outgoing LCO call, the time limit to enter digits can be adjusted. After timeout, the
voice path is automatically connected. This timer does not apply to digital CO lines.
PROCEDURE:
OUTGOING INTER DGT TMR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 174
2.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 INT DGT TMR
PRESS FLEX_KEY(1-7)
See Following Table2.3.4.2-1
DISPLAY
2-48
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.4.9-1 CO OUTGOING INTER DIGIT TIMER (PGM 174)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
SEIZE WAIT TIME
(005-200) : 020(100msec)
Wait time before first digit
005-200 (100msec)
020
2
FIRST DGT
(010-200) : 100(100msec)
Time limit between first digit and
010-200 (100msec)
100
SENCOND DGT
(010-200) : 080(100msec)
Time limit between second digit
010-200 (100msec)
080
THIRD DGT
(010-200) : 070(100msec)
Time limit between third digit and
010-200 (100msec)
070
FORTH DGT
(010-200) : 060(100msec)
Time limit between forth digit and
010-200 (100msec)
060
FIFTH DGT
(010-200) : 050(100msec)
Time limit between fifth digit and
010-200 (100msec)
050
MORE THAN 6TH
(010-200) : 040(100msec)
Time limit between digit and the
010-200 (100msec)
040
3
4
5
6
7
the next digit.
and the next digit.
the next digit.
the next digit.
the next digit.
next digit after sixth digit.
2.3.4.10 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer – PGM Code 175
When making outgoing CO calls, the time interval to send DTMF tones of each digit can be
adjusted. This feature is useful for the Speed Dial or Redial feature.
PROCEDURE:
DTMF SENDING DELAY TMR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 175
2.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 DELAY TMR
PRESS FLEX_KEY(1-7)
See the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.10-1 DTMF SENDING DELAY TMR (PGM 175)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
FIRST DTMF DELAY
(00-90) : 05(100msec)
Delay time before sending first digit
00-90(100msec)
05
2
SECOND DTMF DELAY
(00-90) : 02(100msec)
Delay time before sending next digit
00-90(100msec)
02
THIRD DTMF DELAY
(00-90) : 02(100msec)
Delay time before sending next digit
00-90(100msec)
02
FORTH DTMF DELAY
(00-90) : 02(100msec)
Delay time before sending next digit
00-90(100msec)
02
FIFTH DTMF DELAY
(00-90) : 02(100msec)
Delay time before sending next digit
00-90(100msec)
02
3
4
5
after sending first digit DTMF tone
after sending second digit DTMF tone
after sending third digit DTMF tone
after sending forth digit DTMF tone
2-49
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
6
7
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
SIXTH DTMF DELAY
(00-90) : 02(100msec)
Delay time before sending next digit
MORE THAN 7
(00-90) : 02(100msec)
Delay time before sending next digit
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-90(100msec)
02
00-90(100msec)
02
after sending fifth digit DTMF tone
after sending sixth digit DTMF tone
2.3.4.11 CO COS Assignment – PGM Code 177
Every CO line has its own COS and the toll of assigned COS is applied to the CO call (refer to Toll
Table, PGM 250).
PROCEDURE:
CO COS ASSIGNMENT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 177
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the
same number twice. For MG-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MG-300,
the acceptable range is 001-240
After select desired day mode, use the dial-pad to assign COS table bin
number
ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 CO COS ASSIGN
F1:DAY/F2:NIGHT/F3:TIMED
3.
001-002 DAY COS
(00-15) : 00
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.4.11-1 CO COS ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
1
001-001 DAY COS
(00-15) : 00
CO COS in Day mode
00-15
0
2
001-001 DAY COS
(00-15) : 00
CO COS in Night mode
00-15
0
3
001-001 DAY COS
(00-15) : 00
CO COS in Timed mode
00-15
0
DEFAULT
2.3.4.12 CO to CO Transfer Attributes – PGM Code 179
When there is CO transit call, transfer options can be set separately to each CO groups.
PROCEDURE:
CO TO CO XFER ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 179
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter the first CO Group Number. Available CO Group
number is 01-72 in MG-300, 01-24 in MG-100 system.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter the second CO Group Number. Available CO
Group number is 01-72 in MG-300, 01-24 in MG-100 system.
ENTER FIRST CO GRP NO
CO TO CO XFER ATTR
ENTER SECOND CO GRP NO
XFER CO GRP 01 TO GRP 02
PRESS FLEX_KEY(1-9)
2-50
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
See the following table
Issue 1.0
4.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.12-1 CO TO CO TRANSFER ATTRIBUTES (PGM 179)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
STA OG CALL XFER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
While stations are connected to outgoing CO
0: Off
call of first CO Group, the station can transfer
1: On
DEFAULT
ON
the call to second CO group.
2
ATD OG CALL XFER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
While ATD is connected to outgoing CO call of
0: Off
first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to
1: On
ON
second CO group.
3
4
OG CALL XFER RLS TYPE
(0-1) : NONE
OG CALL XFER RLS TIME
(000-300) : 060(sec)
If outgoing CO call can be transferred to other
0: None
CO call, release type can be set.
1: Release after Release
None
If set to None, it is not disconnected.
Timer
If an outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call
000-300(sec)
060
If this feature is set to ON, CO incoming call
0: Off
OFF
can be transferred directly without any stations
1: On
and CO – to – CO call is started, the call is
disconnected after release time, when release
type is set to ‘Rls after Rls Time’. Before
disconnecting, a warning tone is provided.
5
IC CALL XFER DIRECTLY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
or ATD to transfer the call.
6
STA IC CALL XFER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
While stations are connected to incoming CO
0: Off
call of first CO Group, the station can transfer
1: On
ON
the call to second CO group.
7
ATD IC CALL XFER
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
While ATD is connected to incoming CO call of
0: Off
first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to
1: On
ON
second CO group.
8
9
IC CALL XFER RLS TYPE
(0-1) : NONE
IC CALL XFER RLS TIME
(000-300) : 060(sec)
If incoming CO call can be transferred to other
0: None
CO call, release type can be set.
1: Release after Release
If set to None, it is not disconnected.
Timer
If an incoming CO call is transferred to CO call
000-300(sec)
None
060
and CO – to – CO call is started, the call is
disconnected after release time, when release
type is set to ‘Rls after Rls Time’. Before
disconnected, warning tone is provided.
2.3.4.13 CO Group Access Code Attribute – PGM Code 180
Each CO Group Access Code allows user to access the CO group using different codes and
different options.
2-51
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 180
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter CO Grp Access Code. Access code can be edited
in Numbering Plan (PGM 113)
3.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to the following Table.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
CO GRP ACCESS CODE ATTR
ENTER ACCESS CODE
9 ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY(1-7)
See Following Table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.13-1 CO GROUP ACCESS CODE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 180)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
9 ACCESS CODE NAME
. . . . . . . . . . . .
DESCRIPTION
When a CO Grp Access code is dialed
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 16 characters
-
Decide to select to CO line priority to
0: Round Robin
Last Line
seize.
1: Last Line
NOTE: When Outgoing Group Number
2: First Line
or Flex Button is pressed; name is
displayed on the station’s LCD.
2
9 CO LINE CHOICE
(0-2) : LAST LINE
is not assigned, this option is not
applied.
3
9 OUTGOING GRP NO
(01-72) : ..
Determines the CO Group number used
01-72 (MG-300)
to seize.
01-24 (MG-100)
NOTE: If not assigned, the access code
is used as LOOP key.
4
9 AND DGT
. . . . . . . .
Automatic Network Dialing (AND) digit
Not assigned to
the first access
code.
01-72(MG-300)
01-24(MG-100) is
assigned
sequentially from
the second access
code
Max 10 digits
-
If Alternate Route Selection (ARS) is
0: Off
OFF
set, ARS digit is dialed instead of CO
1: On
is sent after CO line seized. This feature
allows user to initiate CO calls only by
dialing CO Group Access Code.
5
9 ARS SERVICE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Group Access code when there is no
available path.
6
9 ARS DGT 1
. . . . . . . .
Alternate CO Group Access code to be
Max 8 digits
-
Max 8 digits
-
used when original CO Group Access
code failed to find available CO line.
7
9 ARS DGT 2
. . . . . . . .
Second alternate CO Group Access
code to be used when original CO
Group Access code and first ARS code
failed to find available CO line.
2-52
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.4.14 Alternate Ring Assignment – PGM Code 181
The Supplementary Ring Assignment table, is used for programming alternate ring destinations
which can be stations or any feature code (stations do not have a delay value).
PROCEDURE:
ALT RING ASSIGNMENT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 181.
2.
Enter table index.
3.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TBL INDEX(01-80)
01 RING ASG TBL
PRESS FLEX_KEY(1-4)
See the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.4.14-1 ALTERNATE RING ASSIGNMENT (PGM 181)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE TYPE
(0-3) : ALL RING
If set as 0 ~ 2, ring option is applied to ring
0: All Ring
RANGE
assigned stations. Otherwise, if set to 3, feature
1: First Idle
code is activated for incoming calls.
2: Circular
DEFAULT
ALL RING
3: Feature Code
2
CO RING ASSIGN
... .... .... ....
Destination stations can be edited using a range
(00-30) or one
or one by one. If press Flex 1-4 and then dial
station number
-
station range (up to 30 stations) or edit one
station number.
3
FEATURE CODE
. . . . . . .
If set to Feature Code and valid feature code is
Valid Feature
assigned, then assigned feature is activated
Code (Refer to
when there is an incoming call.
PGM115)
-
NOTE: Feature Code is not applied to rerouted
calls.
4
FEATURE DELAY(3sec)
(00-30) : 00
If Service type is set to Feature code, it can be
00-30
delayed.
2.3.5 SYSTEM GROUP DATA – PGM CODES 200-211
Stations can be grouped for call routing, dialing, call pick-up, or various purposes.
The following groups can be defined:
1. Station Group: Terminal / Circular / Ring / Longest Idle / VM
2. Pick Up Group
3. Paging Group
4. Command call Group
5. PTT Group
6. Interphone Group
7. Pilot Hunt Group
2-53
00
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.5.1 Station Group – PGM Code 200
Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will search (hunt) for an idle station in the group.
The system allows assignment of three hunt processes, Terminal, Circular, Ring, Longest Idle and
VM.
The Station Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in table 2.3.5.1-1.
Table 2.3.5.1-1 STATION GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of Groups
20
50
Member in a Group
50
50
Certain types of groups can incorporate announcements, which are given to the calling party. The
system VMIB can store up to seventy (70) announcements for use with Station Groups.
NOTE: A station can belong to multiple groups.
Under Station Group Assignments the type, members and Pick-Up attribute are assigned to the
Station Group. Refer to Table 2.3.5.1-2 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and
data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
STATION GROUP
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 200.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number (620-639 for the
iPECS-MG 100 and 620-669 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following table.
ENTER NO(620-669)
620 STATION GR.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
4. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group data.
NOTE: for group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual
station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group
and dial the station number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.5.1-2 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT (PGM 200)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
620 GROUP TYPE
0.NOT ASG (0-5)
DESCRIPTION
This entry defines the type of station group.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0:Not Assign
0
1: Terminal
2: Circular
3: Ring
4: Longest Idle
5: Voice Mail
2-54
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
This entry defines the name of group
620 TENANT NO
(1-9) : 1
This entry assigns a tenant of station group
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 16
-
characters
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
Time table index
620 TIME TABLE IDX
(1-9) : 1
5
DESCRIPTION
620 GROUP NAME
............
Issue 1.0
620 PICKUP OPTION
0. DISABLE (0-3)
1-9
1
Stations can pick-up group calls ringing at other
0: Disable
Disable
stations in the group.
1: All Call
2: Intercom
3: External
6
620 MEMBER ASSIGN
....
....
....
This entry assigns stations as members of a
-
station group.
2.3.5.2 Station Group Greeting/Queuing Attributes – PGM Code 201
Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing
announcements, time. Table 2.3.5.2-1 provides descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and
data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
GREETING/QUEUING ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 201.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number (620~639 for
the iPECS-MG 100 and 620~669 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute; refer to the following table.
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Group Attributes data, refer to the
following table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER NO(620-669)
620 GRT/QUEUE ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-12)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.5.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 201)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
1
620 GREETING TYPE
0.NORMAL(0-4)
This entry defines the type of greeting tone.
2
620 GREETING PLAY
(000-180) : 000 (sec)
This entry defines greeting play time.
3
620 GREETING TONE NO
(01-19) : ..
This entry defines greeting tone number in case
620 GREETING PRT/ANNC
(001-255) : ...
This entry defines greeting prompt / annc
4
RANGE
0. Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
000~180
(seconds)
DEFAULT
0
000
01~19
NOT ASG
001-255
NOT ASG
greeting type is normal.
Number in case greeting type is
PROMPT/ANNC.
2-55
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
5
620 GREETING REPEAT NO
(000-100) : 003
This entry defines greeting repeat number
000-100
3
6
620 GREETING RPT DELAY
(000-100) : 000 (sec)
This entry defines the pause timer before
000-100
(seconds)
0
0. Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
010~300
(seconds)
3
greeting repeat.
7
620 QUEUING TYPE
3.INT MOH(0-4)
This entry defines the type of queuing tone.
8
620 TIMEOUT TIMER
(000-180) : 030 (sec)
This entry defines greeting/queuing timeout
620 QUEUING TONE NO
(01-19) : ..
This entry defines queuing tone number in case
620 QUEUING PRT/ANNC
(001-255) : ...
This entry defines queuing prompt / annc
9
10
timer.
30
01~19
NOT ASG
001-255
NOT ASG
queuing type is normal.
Number in case queuing type is
PROMPT/ANNC.
11
620 QUEUING REPEAT NO
(000-100) : 003
This entry defines queuing repeat number
000-100
3
12
620 QUEUING RPT DELAY
(000-100) : 000 (sec)
This entry defines the pause timer before
000-100
(seconds)
0
queuing repeat.
2.3.5.3 Station Group Attributes – PGM Code 202
Each type of group has available attributes relating to announcements, timers, forward, etc.
Table2.3.5.3-1 provides descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
STATION GROUP ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 202.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number (620~639 for
the iPECS-MG 100 and 620~669 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute; refer to the following table
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Group Attributes data, refer to the
following table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER NO(620-669)
620 GROUP ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-56
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.5.3-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 202)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
620 CALL IN GREETING
(0-1): AFTER GREETING
This entry defines if a call is routed to
2
620 MAX QUEUE COUNT
(00-99) : 00
This entry defines queue count.
0.After
Greeting
1. In Greeting
00~99
3
620 FORWARD TYPE
0.NOT USED (0-4)
This entry defines forward type.
1
destination during greeting tone is played.
0. Not used
1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward
destination unconditionally.
2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward
DEFAULT
0
00
0. NOT USED
1. UNCOND
2. Q Overflow
3. Time out
4. All
0
0. ALL
1. DAY
2. NIGHT
3. TIMED
Max 16 digits
0
None
000-600
010
050-600
150
destination when a queue is overflow.
3.Tmeout: a call is routed to a forward
destination when a timeout timer is expired.
4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination
when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is
expired.
4
620 APPLY TIME TYPE
0. ALL (0-3)
5
620 FWD DESTINATION
................
6
This entry defines a time to apply forward type.
This entry defines a forward destination.
(Trunk access code should be included)
620 WRAP UP TMR
(000-600) : 010 (100ms)
This entry defines a wrap up timer.
A member is available when this timer is expired
after a member goes to idle.
7
620 MEMBER NO ANS TMR
(050-600): 150 (100ms)
This entry defines no answer timer.
If this timer is expired, a call is routed to the next
member.
2.3.5.4 Voice Mail Group Attributes – PGM Code 203
Voice Mail group has available attributes relating to dialing service as put mail, get mail, etc.
Table2.3.5.4-1 provides descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
VM GROUP ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 203.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number (620-639 for the
iPECS-MG 100 and 620-669 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute; refer to the following table
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Group Attributes data, refer to the
following table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER NO(620-669)
620 VM ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-57
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.5.4-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 203)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
620 VM PUT MAIL INDEX
(1-9) : 1
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to
RANGE
DEFAULT
1~9
1
1~9
2
1~9
3
1~9
4
1~9
9
0.Type1
1.Type2
0
ON/OFF
OFF
the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the “Put
Mail” dial code.
2
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to
620 VM GET MAIL INDEX
(1-9) : 2
the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the “Get
Mail” dial code.
3
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to
620 VM BUSY INDEX
(1-9) : 3
the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the
“Busy” dial code.
4
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to
620 VM NO ANS INDEX
(1-9) : 4
the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the “No
answer” dial code.
5
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to
620 VM DISCONNECT
(1-9) : 1
the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the
“Disconnect” dial code.
6
620 SMDI TYPE
0. TYPE 1(0-1)
This entry defines SMDI Type.
7
SMDI CLI INFO
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
This entry defines SMDI CLI Information.
If this is enable, system sends SMDI with CLI.
2.3.5.5 Pick Up Group – PGM Code 204
Members are assigned to Station Pick-Up Groups (refer to Table 2.3.5.5-2 for a description of the
functions, the LCD displays and data entries required). Station Pick-up Group capacities for the
iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 2.3.5.5-1 below.
Table 2.3.5.5-1 STATION PICK-UP GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of Groups
50
100
Member in a Group
50
50
PROCEDURE:
PICK UP GROUP INDEX
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 204.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group (01~50 for the iPECSMG 100 and 001~100 for the iPECS-MG 300). The system will display the
attribute of pickup group.
ENTER BIN NO(001-100)
001 PICK UP GRP. ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
Refer to table 2.3.5.5-2
DISPLAY
NOTE: for group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual
station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group
and dial the station number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
2-58
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.5.5-2 PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT (PGM 204)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
001 PICK UP CONDITION
0.ALL CALL(0-2)
This entry defines pick up condition.
0. ALL CALL
(All/Internal/External)
1. INT CALL
001 PICK UP MEMBER ASG
....
....
....
Assigns stations as members of a Station pickup
DEFAULT
0
2. EXT CALL
2
-
group.
2.3.5.6 Page Group – PGM Code 205
Under Page Group Assignments members are assigned to the Page Group (refer to Table 2.3.5.62 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries required).
The Page Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 2.3.5.6-1, below.
Table 2.3.5.6-1 PAGE GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of Page Groups
15
30
Member in a Group
50
50
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 205.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Page Group (01-15 for the iPECS-MG
100 and 01-30 for the iPECS-MG 300). The system will display the member
of Page group.
PAGE GROUP INDEX
ENTER BIN NO(01-30)
01 PAGE MEMBER ASG
....
....
....
NOTE: for group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual
station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group
and dial the station number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.5.6-2 PAGE GROUP ATTR (PGM 205)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
01 PAGE MEMBER ASG
....
....
....
Assigns stations as members of a Page group.
RANGE
DEFAULT
-
2.3.5.7 Command Call Group – PGM Code 206
Stations and external contacts can be arranged in groups so that a user may create a conference
with all members of the group via a single call. Member assignment is only available using the
Web admin (refer to Table 2.3.5.7-2 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data
entries required).
2-59
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.5.7-1 COMMAND CALL GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of Groups
10
10
Member in a Group
12
12
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 206.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Command Call group (01~10 for the
iPECS-MG 100 and iPECS-MG 300). The system will display the attribute
of Command Call group.
CMD CALL GROUP INDEX
ENTER BIN NO(01-10)
01 CMD CALL GROUP ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
NOTE: for group members, only available with web admin
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.5.7-2 COMMAND CALL GROUP ASSIGNMENT (PGM 206)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01 ON HOOK SERVICE
(0-1): ON HOOK ALLOW
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines the On Hook Service; if On Hook Allow
0: ON HOOK
0
is set, the system allows ON HOOK service. When
ALLOW
Recall is selected, system will RECALL when user
1: RECALL
Station is on-hook.
2
Determines handling of ONE WAY BUSY calls.
01 ONE WAY BUSY
0. BUSY (0-2)
0: BUSY
1:
0
REQEST
QUEUING
2: RECOVER
CALL
3
Determines handling of BOTH WAY BUSY calls.
01 BOTH WAY BUSY
0. BUSY (0-2)
0: BUSY
1:
0
REQEST
QUEUING
2: RECOVER
CALL
2.3.5.8 PTT Group – PGM Code 208
Each Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more Push-To-Talk groups. The PTT Group
capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 2.3.5.8-1 as below.
Table 2.3.5.8-1 PTT GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of PTT Groups
10
10
Member in a Group
50
50
2-60
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 208.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Page Group (0-9 for the iPECS-MG
100 and the iPECS-MG 300). The system will display the member of PTT
group.
PTT GROUP INDEX
ENTER BIN NO(0-9)
0 PTT MEMBER ASG
....
....
....
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
NOTE: for group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual
station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group
and dial the station number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.5.8-2 PTT GROUP ATTR (PGM 208)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This entry assigns stations as members of a
0 PTT MEMBER ASG
....
....
....
DEFAULT
-
PTT group.
2.3.5.9 Interphone Group – PGM Code 209
To call the stations using only one or two digits, some stations can be gathered to the same
‘Interphone Group’ (refer to Table 2.3.5.9-2 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and
data entries required).
The Interphone Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 2.3.5.9-1, below.
Table 2.3.5.9-1 INTERPHONE GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of Groups
10
10
Member in a Group
10
10
PROCEDURE:
INTERPHONE GRP. INDEX
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 209.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Interphone Group. The system will
display the attribute of pickup group.
ENTER BIN NO(01-10)
01 DIGIT NUMBER
ENTER BIN NO(0-9)
Refer to the following table
NOTE: for group members, enter a station number for each bin index
DISPLAY
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
2-61
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.5.9-2 INTERPHONE GROUP DIGIT DESTINATION (PGM 209)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Station
Number
This entry defines the digit destination of
01-DGT(0) DEST.
....
Interphone group.
DEFAULT
-
2.3.5.10 Pilot Hunt Group – PGM Code 210
Under Pilot Hunt Group Assignments, members are assigned to the Pilot Hunt Group. Refer to
Table 2.3.5.10-2 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries required.
The Pilot Hunt Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 2.3.5.10-1 as below.
Table 2.3.5.10-1 PILOT HUNT GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM
CAPACITY
iPECS-MG 100
iPECS-MG 300
Number of Groups
20
50
Member in a Group
20
20
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 210.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group (01~20 for the iPECSMG 100 and 01~50 for the iPECS-MG 300). The system will display the
attribute of Pilot Hunt group.
PILOT HUNT GRP. INDEX
ENTER BIN NO(01-50)
01 PILOT GRP. ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
NOTE: for group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual
station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group
and dial the station number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.5.10-2 PILOT HUNT GROUP ATTR IBUTES (PGM 210)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
01 CONDITION
0.ALL (0-2)
Determines call coverage condition for Pilot
0. ALL
Hunt group.
1. Intercom
01 SERVICE TYPE
1.CIRCULAR (0-1)
This entry defines Service Type.
0. Terminal
(Terminal/Circular)
1. Circular
3
01 TIME TABLE IDX
(1-9) : 1
Time Table index
1-9
4
01 MEMBER ASG
....
....
1
DEFAULT
0
2. External
2
Assigns stations as members of a Pilot Hunt
....
group.
2-62
1
1
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.5.11 Pilot Hunt Group Forward Attribute – PGM Code 211
Each Pilot Hunt group has available attributes relating to forward; Table 2.3.5.11-1 provides
descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
PILOT HUNT GRP. INDEX
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 211.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group (01~20 for the iPECSMG 100 and 01~50 for the iPECS-MG 300). The system will display the
attribute of Pilot Hunt group.
3.
Press the desired Flex button.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER BIN NO(01-50)
01 PILOT GRP. FWD ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.5.11-1 PILOT HUNT GROUP FWD ATTR (PGM 211)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01 DAY FORWARD TYPE
0.NOT USED (0-4)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines Day time setting for Call Forward
0. NOT USED
0
type.
1.UNCOND
2. BUSY
3. NO ANS
4. BUSY/ NO
ANS
2
3
01 DAY FWD DESTINATION
........
Determines the Day-time setting for Forward
Max. 8 digits
01 NIGHT FORWARD TYPE
0.NOT USED (0-4)
Determines the Night time setting for Call
0. NOT USED
Forward type.
1.UNCOND
destination.
0
2. BUSY
3. NO ANS
4. BUSY/ NO
ANS
4
5
01 NIGHT FWD
DESTINATION
........
Determines the Night time setting for Forward
Max. 8 digits
01 TIMED FORWARD TYPE
0.NOT USED (0-4)
Determines the Timed setting for Call Forward
0. NOT USED
type of Timed.
1.UNCOND
destination.
2. BUSY
3. NO ANS
4. BUSY/ NO
ANS
6
01 TIMED FWD
DESTINATION
........
Determines the Timed setting for Forward
Destination.
2-63
Max. 8 digits
0
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.6 SYSTEM DATA – PGM CODES 220-240
2.3.6.1 System Timers I to III – PGM Codes 220-222
A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect many features and functions of the
System (refer to Tables for a description of the timers and the input required).
PROCEDURE:
1.
SYSTEM TIMER 1
-
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-12)
Refer to the following tables
Press the [PGM] button and dial:
220 for System Timers I
221 for System Timers II
222 for System Timers III.
2.
Press the Flex button for the desired Timer; refer to Tables 2.3.6.1-1 to 3.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Timer data.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Timer data entry.
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM TIMERS I (PGM 220)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
CO-CO TRANS TMR
(000-300) : 030(sec)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines the answer waiting time when CO line is
000~300
030
transferred to another CO line. If not answered in this
(seconds)
time, transferred CO call is disconnected.
2
3
4
5
6
7
HOT-DESK LOGOUT TMR
(00-24) : 00(hour)
Determines the amount of time the attendant receives
00~24
recall after which the system will disconnect the call.
(hours)
ACNR PAUSE TMR
(005-300) : 030(sec)
This timer establishes the time between ACNR attempts.
PAGE TIME OUT TMR
(000-300) : 015(sec)
Determines the maximum duration of a page after which
000~300
the caller and Page Zone are released.
(seconds)
PAUSE TMR
(1-9) : 3(sec)
A Timed pause of this duration is used in Speed Dial and
1~9
during other automatically dialed digits sent to the PSTN.
(seconds)
VM PAUSE TMR
(1-9) : 3(sec)
When the system sends a “Pause” to Voice Mail using In-
VMIB-MSG MIN TMR
(1-9) : 4(sec)
This timer sets the minimum duration allowed for a voice
1~9
mail message in the system’s VMIB. Messages shorter
(seconds)
005~300
00
030
(seconds)
band signals, the Pause interval is defined by this timer.
1~9
15
3
3
(seconds)
4
than this period are not stored.
8
9
10
11
12
VMIB-MSG MAX TMR
(001-999) : 060(sec)
This timer sets the maximum duration allowed for the
000~999
User Greeting in the system’s VMIB.
(seconds)
CALL-WAIT WARN TMR
(010-180) : 030
Determine the call-wait indication tone repeat time.
010~1800
CAMP-ON WARN TMR
(010-180) : 030
Determine the camp-on indication tone repeat time.
CCR INTER-DGT TMR
(01-30) : 03(sec)
Inter-digit timer used with Customer Call Routing function.
WEB PSWD GUARD TMR
(001-999) : 005(min)
If no data packets are received during a Web Admin
001~999
connection for the Guard time, a password check will be
(minutes)
60
030
(seconds)
010~1800
030
(seconds)
01~30
03
(seconds)
initiated by the system.
2-64
5
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.6.1-2 SYSTEM TIMERS II (PGM 221)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
01~25
01
Determines the amount of time the System
SLT HOOK BOUNCE TMR
(01-25) : 01(100ms)
considers an actual state change in the hook-switch
(100 msec.)
and not a momentary contact bounce.
2
3
4
5
SLT MAX H_FLASH TMR
(01—25) : 05(100ms)
Sets the maximum time an SLT user can depress
SLT MIN H_FLASH TMR
(000—250) : 020(10ms)
Sets the minimum time an SLT user must depress
LCO RING ON TMR
(1-9) : 2(100ms)
Sets the ‘ON’ time of the incoming ring cycle for
LCO RING OFF TMR
(010-150) : 060(100ms)
Sets the maximum ‘OFF’ duration of the incoming
the hook-switch for a Flash signal.
the hook-switch for a Flash signal.
System Ring Detect to recognize the incoming call.
ring cycle to determine when a call has been
01~25
05
(100 msec.)
000~250
020
(10 msec.)
1~9
2
(100 msec.)
010~150
060
(100 msec)
abandoned.
6
When an analog CO Line is returned to idle, the
LCO RLS GUARD TMR
(001-150) : 010(100ms)
system will deny access for this time to assure the
001~150
010
(100 msec)
PSTN returns the CO circuitry to idle.
Table 2.3.6.1-3 SYSTEM TIMERS II (PGM 222)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
05~99
20
Sets the minimum contact closure time required to
DOOR OPEN TMR
(05-99) : 20(100ms)
activate the contact assigned as a door open
(100 msec.)
contact.
2
A phone user will receive periodic reminder tones
MSG WAIT ALERT TONE TMR
(00-60) : 00(min)
of a message waiting at intervals based on this
00~60
00
(minutes)
timer.
3
INTER DIGIT TMR
(000-300) : 015(sec)
Sets the maximum allowed time between user
000~300
dialed digits; at expiration, the user will receive an
(seconds)
015
error-tone.
4
Sets the maximum allowed time between dialed
INC CO INTER DIGIT TMR
(01-60): 15(sec)
digits from the Incoming CO.
01-60
15
(seconds)
2.3.6.2 System Attributes – PGM Code 223
System Attributes programs define settings that affect System-wide features and functions.
Generally, these entries will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 2.3.6.21 for a description of the Attributes, LCD displays and the data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
1.
-
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-11)
See the following table
Press the [PGM] button and dial 223
223 for System Attributes I
2.
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute, refer to the following Table.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
DISPLAY
2-65
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.6.2-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 223)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
WEB ADM PSWD ENCRYPTION
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The Web Admin password can be encrypted for
0: OFF
OFF
security using RC-6 block encryption A Java VM
1: ON
must be installed on the user’s PC.
2
PULSE DIAL BREAK RATIO
(0-2): 66/33
The break/make ratio for pulse dialing through
0: 60/40
analog CO line.
1:66/33
1:66/33
2:50/50
3
VM SMDI ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If it is set to “ON, system interfaces SMDI protocol
0: OFF
with external Voice Mail, If ‘OFF’, system interfaces
1: ON
OFF
In-band message with external Voice Mail.
4
VMIB SMTP PORT
(0000-9999) : 0025
SMTP Port for VMIB message e-mail sending.
0000~9999
0025
5
NETWORK DATE/TIME USE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If set to ON, the System updates the Date & Time
0: OFF
OFF
with Network Date & Time when the System Date &
1: ON
Time is different.
6
CLI PRINT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If set to ON, CLI information is printed.
TLS for WEB
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables Transport Layer Security (TLS for Web
0: OFF
access.
1: ON
8
WEB SERVER PORT
(00001-65535): 00080
Web Server port number
9
DB AUTO DOWNLOAD(WEEK)
(1-7): OFF
DB DOWNLOAD(TIME)
(00-23):00H
Sets the time for system database download to
11
UC SERVER IP ADDR
0.0.0.0
UC Server IP Address
12
CTI SERVER IP ADDR
0.0.0.0
CTI Server IP Address
7
10
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
OFF
1-65535
80
Determines when system database downloads to
OFF
OFF
USB automatically,
1-7
00-23
00
USB automatically.
2.3.6.3 System Password – PGM Code 226
Access to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by passwords up to
twelve (12) digits. Three passwords can be defined: User, Admin., and Maintenance. The
Maintenance password has full and unlimited access to the database and maintenance functions
of the system, while the User and Admin password have access to database items defined in the
Web Admin.
NOTE

There are no default passwords, all passwords must be programmed.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM PASSWORD
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 226.
2.
Press the Flex button for the desired password:
- Flex 1: User password.
- Flex 2: Admin password.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
See the following table
DISPLAY
- Flex 3: Maintenance password.
2-66
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
3.
Enter the desired password, up to 12 digits. To erase a password press the
[SPEED] button.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the password entry.
Table 2.3.6.3-1 System Passwords
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Includes configurable database access in Web
USER PASSWORD
…………
RANGE
DEFAULT
12 digits
none
12 digits
none
12 digits
none
Admin. And cannot access Keyset Administration
functions.
2
3
ADMIN PASSWORD
…………
Includes configurable database access in Web
MAINT PASSWORD
…………
Includes full and unlimited access to database and
Admin. And can access Keyset Admin.
maintenance functions.
2.3.6.4 Alarm Attributes – PGM Code 227
The System can monitor an external contact, most often employed as an Alarm indicator or
Doorbell. The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact. An Alarm Signal sent
to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst, the former is often desired. For the
Doorbell, a single tone is sent each time the contact is activated (refer to Table 2.3.6.4-1 for a
description of the features, the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute).
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM ALARM ATT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 227.
2.
Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.4-1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 227)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
OFF
ALARM ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables the external contact monitoring circuitry.
ALARM CONTACT
(1:CLOSE/0:OPEN) : OPEN
Establishes the contact state that will activate the
0: Open
Alarm, close or open.
1: Close
ALARM MODE
(1:ALARM/0:BELL): ALARM
The contact can be designated to function as a
ALARM SIGNAL MODE
(1:RPT/0:ONCE) : RPT
The assigned stations will receive a Repeating signal
1: ON
doorbell instead of an alarm.
or single burst (ONCE) of the alarm tone.
2-67
0: Bell
Open
Alarm
1: Alarm
0: Once
1: Repeat
Repeat
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.6.5 External Control Contacts – PGM Code 228The MPB includes 1 contact, which can be used to control external devices. The contact is
assigned to activate under one of several conditions: As a Loud Bell Contact (LBC), the contact will
activate when the assigned station receives an external call.
NOTE

When using LBC and the System is in the Night or Timed Ring mode, the contact will
activate for incoming UNA calls and will ignore any station assignment.
The contact may alternatively be activated as a Door Lock Release contact, when the External
Page Zone is accessed.
PROCEDURE:
EXT CTRL CONTACT (0-3)
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 228.
….
EXT CTRL CONTACT
2.
-
LBC (150)
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data.
0: Not Used
1: LBC + station number, (ex. 150)
2: Door Lock Release
3: External Page access
Press the [SAVE] button to store the External Contact data entry.
2.3.6.6 Music Sources – PGM Code 229
Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and/or Music-On-Hold source inputs.
iPECS-MG MPB provide for one (1) music input. In addition, a VMIB announcement may be
recorded and played as MOH. In addition, SLT port on SLIB is used as MOH.
PROCEDURE:
MUSIC ASSIGN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 229.
2.
Select the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Use the dial-pad to select the desired Music Source.
4.
To save the Music Source, press the [SAVE] button.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-11)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-68
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.6.6-1 MUSIC SOURCES FOR MOH & BGM (PGM 229)
BTN
1
2
3~6 for MPB300
(3-5 for MPB100)
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
ICM BOX MUSIC CH
(00-11)
NO BGM (00)
Assigns the music source for
INT MOH TYPE (0012)
ROMANCE (00)
Assigns the music for internal
ICM BOX.
MOH.
VMIB MOH X (00-70)
SLOT YY : ..
Assigns the VMIB Prompt index
RANGE
00: NO BGM
01: Internal Music ,
02: External Music
03: VMIB BGM 1
04: VMIB BGM 2
05: VMIB BGM 3
06: VMIB BGM 4
07: SLT MOH 1
08: SLT MOH 2
09: SLT MOH 3
10: SLT MOH 4
11: SLT MOH 5
00: Romance
01: Turkish March
02: Green Sleeves
03: Fur Elise
04: Carmem
05: Waltz
06: Pavane
07: Sichiliano
08: Sonata
09: Spring
10: Campanella
11:Badinerie
12:Blue Dance
01-70
DEFAULT
1
of VMIB Slot YY for VMIB MOH
X.
7~11 for MPB300
(6-10 for MPB100)
Assigns the SLT port for SLT
SLT MOH X
….
MOH.
2.3.6.7 RS-232 Port Settings – PGM Code 230
The system has one RS 232 serial port located on the MPB. Certain characteristics of the port are
programmable: Baud rate, RS 232 control, and Page settings (refer to Table for a description of
the settings, the data entries required and LCD displays).
PROCEDURE:
RS232 PORT SETTING
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 230.
2.
Select the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Port data.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Port Data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-4)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-69
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.6.7-1 RS 232 PORT SETTINGS (PGM 230)
BTN
DISPLAY
1
DESCRIPTION
BAUD RATE (1-5)
5. 115200
RANGE
DEFAULT
Establishes the BAUD rate for the RS-232 serial
1: 9600
115200
port.
2: 19200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
2
3
4
PAGE BREAK
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF
The system can send a page break command
0: OFF
over the serial port at the end of each page.
1: ON
LINE PER PAGE
(001-199) : 066
Determines Page length, the number of lines the
OFF
001~199
66
0: XOFF
XOFF
system will send before sending a Page break.
Enables XON/XOFF protocol.
XON/XOFF
(1:XON /0:XOFF):XOFF
1: XON
2.3.6.8 Serial Port Function Selections – PGM Code 231
The System has one RS 232 serial port located on the MPB. Also, the System can employ IP over
5 TCP channels for the output of various system information.
Each output function is assigned a Serial port or TCP channel that is used to output the information.
In addition, a TCP port must be assigned when a function is defined to use a TCP channel.
NOTE

Each function can be defined to use only one output (refer to Table for a description of the
selections, the data entries required and LCD displays).
PROCEDURE:
PRINT PORT SELECTION
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 231.
2.
Select the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Port data:
0: COM(Serial port on MPB)
1: TCP channel 1
2: TCP channel 2
3: TCP channel 3
4: TCP channel 4
5: TCP channel 5
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.6.8-1 FUNCTION OUTPUT PORT (PGM 231)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
ON-LINE SMDR (0-5)
COM (0)
DESCRIPTION
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the
On-line SMDR.
2-70
RANGE
DEFAULT
0~5
COM
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
3
4
5
6
7
DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
OFF LINE SMDR (0-5)
COM (0)
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for Off-
SMDI (0-5)
COM (0)
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the
CALL INFO (0-5)
COM (0)
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used to
TRAFFIC (0-5)
COM (0)
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the
TRACE (0-5)
COM (0)
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the
ADMIN (0-5)
COM (0)
Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the
RANGE
DEFAULT
0~5
COM
0~5
COM 1
0~5
COM
0~5
COM
0~5
COM
0~5
COM
line SMDR.
SMDI output.
receive Call Information output.
TRAFFIC report output.
Trace output.
ADMIN Report output.
2.3.6.9 SMDR Attributes – PGM Code 232
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) is an ASCII output of details on both incoming and
outgoing calls. Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including: output records for all calls or
Long Distance (LD) only, call cost per pulse when using call metering, etc. (refer to Table for a
description of each Attribute, LCD displays and the data entries required).
PROCEDURE:
SMDR ATTRIBUTES
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 232.
2.
Select the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data.
4.
To save SMDR Attribute data, press the [SAVE] button.
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-18)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.9-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 232)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
OFF
SMDR SAVE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
The System can store all outgoing calls.
SMDR PRINT
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
If set to ON, SMDR output is automatic at call
0: OFF
completion; the System can output SMDR records
1: ON
1: ON
OFF
automatically as they occur (real-time) or only when
requested.
3
RECORD TYPE
(1 : LD/ 0: ALL) : LD
If set to on, LD calls are identified by the LD Digit
counter; the system can record all outgoing calls or
only long distance calls.
2-71
1: LD
0: ALL CALL
ALL CALL
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
4
DISPLAY
LONG DIST CALL DGT CNT
(07-15) : 07
DESCRIPTION
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
07-15
07
If set to ON, incoming calls are recorded as well as
0: OFF
OFF
outgoing calls; the System can output records for
1: ON
Dialed numbers, which exceed the assigned LD
Digit count, are considered long distance calls for
SMDR.
5
PRINT INCOMING CALL
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
incoming calls as well as outgoing calls.
6
7
8
9
10
PRINT LOST CALL
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
The System can provide lost call records, records for
0: OFF
unanswered incoming (abandoned) calls.
1: ON
CURRENCY UNIT
…
The unit of currency used for call cost can be
COST PER PULSE(6DGT)
000000
When metering is provided by the PSTN, the cost
SMDR FRACTION
(0-5) : 0
Determines the position of the decimal in the Cost
TRANSFER CHARGE MODE
(0-2):INDIVIDUAL
identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference.
Max 3
OFF
-
characters
6 digits
000000
0~5
0
0:INDIVIDUA
0:INDIVIDU
L
AL
per metering pulse can be assigned.
per Pulse, starting from the right-most digit.
1. INDIVIDUAL: When a call is transferred to
another station, the transferred call is charged to two
stations respectively.
1:INTEGRAT
2. INTEGRATE XFERING: When a call is
E XFERING
transferred to another station, the call is charged to
2:INTEGRAT
the transferring station.
E XFERED
3. INTEGRATE XFERED: When a call is transferred
to another station, the call is charged to the
transferred station.
11
ATD TRANSFER CHARGE
(0-2):NORMAL CHARGING
1. NORMAL CHARGING: When Attendant make
0:NORMAL
0: NORMAL
outgoing call and transfer this call to another station,
CHARGING
CHARGING
the transferred will follow the Transfer Charge Mode.
1:ATD
2. ATD CHARGING: When Attendant makes
CHARGING
outgoing call and transfers this call to another
2:XFERED
station, the call is charged to the Attendant.
CHARGING
3. XFERED CHARGING: When Attendant makes
outgoing call and transfers this call to another
station, the call is charged to the transferred station.
12
HIDDEN DIALED DGT
(0-9) : 0
0~9
0
When “HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT” is enabled, button
0: Left
Right
12 above, this field determines if leading or trailing
1: Right
Determines the number of dialed digits to hide for
security purposes, and replaced with “*”. Button 13
below defines whether leading or trailing digits are
hidden. In addition, the station must be assigned for
SMDR HIDE, PGM CODE 131 button 7.
13
HIDDEN DGT POSITION
(1:RIGHT/0:LEFT): RIGHT
digits are hidden.
14
15
16
17
18
ICM SMDR SAVE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When enabled, intercom call data is stored as part of
0:OFF
the SMDR data.
1:ON
ICM SMDR PRINT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When enabled, intercom call data is printed as part
0:OFF
of the On-line SMDR.
1:ON
SMDR INTERFACE SVC
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
When enabled, the system stores SMDR data to
0:OFF
send to applications including NMS upon request.
1:ON
I-SDMR CONN TYPE
(1:LAN/0:SIO) : SIO
This assigns port to be used for SMDR Interface.
0:SIO
1:LAN
SIO
I-SMDR AUTH INDEX
(1:ON/0:OFF)
Reserved
0:OFF
1:ON
OFF
SMDR Interface is served through LAN or SIO
2-72
OFF
OFF
OFF
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Web only
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
SMTP MAIL SERVER IP
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
SMTP Mail Server IP Address
SMDR USER MAIL ADDR
……….
SMDR User Mail Address.
SMDR SYSTEM DOMAIN NAME
……….
SMDR System Domain Name
SMDR Mail Send Weekly Set
Select SMDR Mail Send Day
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 64
Characters
Max 64
Characters
N/A
N/A
(Monday ~
Sunday
Sets time-of-day for SMDR data to be sent on a
SMDR MAIL SEND DAILY SET
00(00-23)
00-23
00
OFF
daily basis (00 for no daily records, 01-23 for hour of
the day).
SMDR MAIL AUTO SEND MODE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
If the SMDR buffer is full, the system can
0: OFF
automatically send a notification by e-mail.
1: ON
SMDR MAIL AUTO DELETE MODE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
Deletes SMDR records after sending e-mail.
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
2.3.6.10 System Date, Time – PGM Code 233
The system Date, Time is established by this entry. The date and time are employed for several
features and functions including; LCR, LCD displays, SMDR outputs, Auto Ring Mode Selection,
Wake-Up Alarm, etc.
PROCEDURE:
1.
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE
Press the [PGM] button and dial 233.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1 – 5)
2.
See the following table
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute, refer to the following Table.
Flex 1: Time
Flex 2: Date
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
-
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.10-1 SYSTEM TIME, DATE (PGM 233)
BTN
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
1
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE
TIME 00:22(HH:MM)
Sets the system time.
HH:MM
2
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE
DATE : 01/13/08(MMDDYY)
Sets the system date.
MMDDYY
3
DST ENABLE MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables DST feature for System Time.
0 : OFF
1: ON
2-73
DEFAULT
OFF
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
BTN
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Web only
DST START TIME
ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEBADM
The DST start time.
See DST
2
DST END TIME
ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEBADM
The DST end time.
nd
Sunday
Table
of March at
See DST
1 Sunday
Table
in Nov., at
2:00 AM
Web only
st
2:00 AM
2.3.6.11 Button LED Flash Rate – PGM Code 234
The LED Color and Flash Rate for various functions and states can be assigned any one of 15
System signals. The various functions and states are shown in the Tables (refer to [COLOR] and
[FLASH RATE] Tables).
PROCEDURE:
1.
LED COLOR/FLASH RATE
Press the [PGM] button and dial 234.
ENTER LED RANGE (01-48)
Table 2.3..- [CALLBK]
INTERCOM
2. Enter the Function range to change the LED Color or Flash rate (refer to
Tables).
F1:RED F2:30 IPM
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3.
4.
Press the Flex button 1 and dial (1-3) for LED color
OR
Press the Flex button 2 and dial (00~14) for LED flash rate.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store.
Table 2.3.6.11-1 BUTTON LED FLASH RATE (PGM 234)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
[CALL BK] INTERCOM
DESCRIPTION
[CALL BACK] button LED status intercom call
back is active.
2
[CALL BK] CO LINE
[CALL BACK] button LED status CO queuing
is in use.
3
[CALL BK] MSG WAIT
[CALL BACK] button LED status when a
message is left.
[MUTE] button LED status when voice is
RANGE
DEFAULT
Color (1-3)
Flashing
Rate (00-14)
Flash: 30 IPM
Color: RED
Flash: 120 IPM
Color: RED
Flash: 120 IPM
Color: RED
4
[MUTE] TRANSMISSION
5
[MUTE] COS CHANGE
6
[DND] DND
[DND] button LED status in DND.
Flash: Steady
7
[DND] ONE-TIME
[DND] button LED status in one time DND.
Flash: 60 IPM
8
[DND] PRESELECT MSG
[DND] button LED status when Station
Flash: 15 IPM
9
[CALL BK] ACNR
muted.
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
[MUTE] button LED status when COS is
downed.
Flash: 120 IPM
Color: RED
Color: RED
Color: RED
assigns a preselected message.
[CALL BACK] button LED status when ACNR
is in use.
2-74
Color: RED
Flash: 480 IPM
Color: RED
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
10
[SPK] SPEAKER
11
[SPK] HEADSET
12
[SPK] INCOMING CALL
DESCRIPTION
[SPEAKER] button LED status when on a
conversation using the speakerphone.
[SPEAKER] button LED status when on a
conversation using the headset.
[SPEAKER] button LED status when receiving
an intercom call.
13
[HOLD] PAGING
[HOLD] button LED status while Paging.
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
Flash: 60 IPM
Color: RED
Flash: 60 IPM
Color: RED
14
15
[HOLD] VOICE OVER
[HOLD] RESERVED
[HOLD] button LED status when in Voice-over
Flash: 60 IPM
mode.
Color: AMBER
[HOLD] Reserved
Flash: 60 IPM
Color: AMBER
16
[RING] ICM RING
[RING] LED status when receiving an
intercom call.
[RING] LED status when receiving an
Flash: 60 IPM
Color: RED
17
[RING] CO RING
18
[RING] MSW WAIT
[RING] LED status when a message is left.
Flash: 60 IPM
19
[HEADSET] HEADSET
[HEADSET] LED status when the headset is
Flash: Steady
20
[HEADSET] BLUETOOTH
incoming CO call.
Flash: 60 IPM
Color: RED
Color: RED
used (LIP-8000 Phone).
HEADSET] LED status when Bluetooth™ is
used (LIP-8000 Phone).
21
[DN] I USE
[DN] button LED status when I use is active.
Color: RED
Flash: 60 IPM
Color: RED
Flash: Steady
Color: GREEN
22
[DN] OTHER USE
[DN] button LED status when another station
is in use.
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
23
[DN] DND
[DN] button LED when status in DND.
Flash: Steady
24
[DN] INCOMING CALL
[DN] button LED status when receiving an
Flash: 60 IPM
intercom call.
Color: GREEN
25
[DN] HOLD
Color: RED
26
[DN] CALL FORWARD
[DN] button LED status when call is in Held
Flash: 60 IPM
state.
Color: AMBER
[DN] button LED status when Call forward is
Flash: 120 IPM
set.
27
[DN] I CONFERENCE
28
[DN] OTHER CONFERENCE
Color: RED
[DN] button LED status when I am in
Flash: Steady
conference.
Color: GREEN
[DN] button LED status when another station
Flash: Steady
is in conference mode.
29
30
[DN] CONF SUPERVISOR
[DSS] INCOMING CALL
Color: RED
[DN] button LED status when active
Flash: 60 IPM
conference supervisor.
Color: AMBER
[DSS] button LED status when receiving an
Flash: 60 IPM
intercom call.
31
[DSS] ICM TALK
[DSS] button LED status in conversation.
32
[DSS] DND
[DSS] button LED status in DND.
Color: RED
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
Flash: OFF
Color: RED
33
34
35
[DSS] CALL FORWARD
[DSS] HANDSET-LIFT
[DSS] PRESELECTED MSG
[DSS] button LED status when call forward is
Flash: OFF
set.
Color: RED
[DSS] button LED status when handset is
Flash: OFF
lifted.
Color: RED
[DSS] button LED status when a preselected
Flash: OFF
message is assigned.
Color: RED
2-75
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
[DSS] button LED status when call is in Held
DEFAULT
36
[DSS] HOLD
37
[CO] CALL SETUP
[CO] button LED status in call setup.
Flash: 60 IPM
38
[CO] CO TALK
[CO button LED status in conversation.
Flash: Steady
[DN] VM MSG WAIT
[DN] button LED status in VM Message Wait
state.
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
Color: RED
Color: RED
39
Flash: 120 IPM
Color: AMBER
40
[DSS] VM MSG WAIT
[DSS] button LED status in VM Message Wait
Flash: 120 IPM
41
[CO] CMD GRP RING
[CO] button LED status in Command Group
Flash: 60 IPM
42
[CO] CMD GRP TALK
43
[CO] I TALK
[CO] button LED status in Talk state
44
[CO] HOLD
[CO] button LED status in Hold State
Flash: 60 IPM
45
[CO] TRANSFER
[CO] button LED status in CO transfer state
Flash: 120 IPM
46
[CO] RECALL
[CO] button LED status in CO Recall state.
Flash: 480 IPM
Color: RED
Call ring state
Color: RED
[CO] button LED status in Command Group
Call Talk state.
Flash: Steady
Color: RED
Flash: Steady
Color: GREEN
Color: RED
Color: RED
Color: RED
47-48
Reserved
Table 2.3.6.11-2 COLOR TABLE (PGM 234)
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
1
RED
2
GREEN
3
AMBER
NOTE: If Green/Amber color is not supported by digital phone, Red Color is
applied.
Table 2.3.6.11-3 FLASH RATE TABLE (PGM 234)
FLASH RATE
DESCRIPTION
00
Flash OFF
01
Steady On
02
30 ipm flash (30% On)
03
60 ipm flash (30% On)
04
60 ipm double wink (30% On-Off-On-Off 70% On)
05
240 ipm flash (30% On)
06
240 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
07
480 ipm flash (30% On)
08
480 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
09
15 ipm flash (30% On)
10
120 ipm flash (30% On)
11
120 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
12
30 ipm double flash (30% On-Off-On & 70% Off)
13
480 ipm double wink (30% On-Off-On-Off 70% On)
14
480 ipm double flash (30% On-Off-On & 70% Off)
2-76
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.6.12 ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes -PGM Code 235
In addition to remote access via an IP network connection, the system database may be accessed
remotely via an ISDN connection. Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated PPP Station
will provide a connection to the system database. The system will request a user id and password,
which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned. After matching id and password
are entered, the iPECS-MG Home page is provided and Web Admin is available.
PROCEDURE:
PPP ATTRIBUTES
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 235.
2.
Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Used the dial pad to enter desired data.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.12-1 PPP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 235)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
OFF
PPP USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Determines if PPP is enabled or disabled.
PPP DESTINATION NUMBER
….
If the incoming capability is 64 Kbps unrestricted
Station
digital and the called party number matches the
number
1: ON
None
PPP destination number, the system will
automatically answer the call and request PPP ID
and password.
3
4
5
6
PPP USER ID 1
…………………….
System accepts this PPP ID 1
PPP PASSWORD 1
……………………..
The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID
PPP USER ID 2
…………………….
System accepts this PPP ID 2
PPP PASSWORD 2
……………………..
The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID
Max 12.
1.
Max 12.
None
Character
Max 12.
None
Character
2.
Max 12.
Character
2.3.6.13 MOBILE Attributes -PGM Code 236
The flash digit and input timer for call transferring from mobile extension can be assigned.
PROCEDURE:
MOBILE ATTRIBUTE
None
Character
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 236.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
2-77
None
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Refer to the following table
Issue 1.0
2.
Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Used the dial pad to enter desired data.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.13-1 MOBILE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 236)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
1
FLASH DIGIT
*
The flash digit from mobile extension
1
INPUT TIMER(sec)
(01-20) : 05
The inter-digit timer of the mobile flash digit (2
sec.).
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 2 digits
*
01-20
05
(seconds)
2.3.6.14 One Digit Service Attributes -PGM Code 237
When performing a call transfer from a mobile extension, the flash digit and input timer can be
assigned.
PROCEDURE:
ONE-DIGIT SERVICE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 237.
2.
Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Used the dial pad to enter desired data.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-13)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.6.14-1 ONE-DIGIT SERVICE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 237)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
STEP CALL
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
Determines if step call is enabled or disabled.
0: Disable
Disable
Digit ‘1’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
When accessing a busy tone, User may dial for one
1: Enable
of the one-touch services.
0: N/A
2:Camp On
Digit ‘2’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
Digit ‘3’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
5
Digit ‘4’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
6
Digit ‘5’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
N/A
3:Call Wait
4:Voice
4
N/A
1:Call-Back
Over
N/A
5:Intrusion
6: Hunt
N/A
N/A
2-78
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
7
Digit ‘6’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
N/A
8
Digit ‘7’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
N/A
9
Digit ‘8’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
N/A
10
Digit ‘9’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
N/A
11
Digit ‘0’ (0-6)
0. NOT ASSIGNED
N/A
12
Digit ‘*’ (0-6)
3. CALL-WAIT
Call Wait
13
Digit ‘#’ (0-6)
4. VOICE-OVER
Voice-Over
2.3.6.15 Dummy Dial Tone Digit-PGM Code 240
When digit conversion is programmed, the CO line is seized after digit conversion is completed.
When programmed, in the event a user can not obtain the CO dial tone from PX, a dummy dial
tone can be provided.
PROCEDURE:
DUMMY DIAL-TONE DGT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 240.
2.
Dial bin no.
3.
Used the dial pad to enter desired data.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry
ENTER BIN NO(01-20)
01 DUMMY DIAL-TONE DGT
……
Table 2.3.6.15-1 PPP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 240)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01 DUMMY DIAL-TONE DGT
…..
DESCRIPTION
Dummy Dial tone digits.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 6 digits
(0~9, *,#, X)
2.3.6.16 Executive/Secretary Assign -PGM Code 241
Stations can be grouped as Executive/Secretary so that when the Executive enters DND, intercom
and transferred calls are automatically routed to the Secretary. An Executive may have up to 3
Secretaries. A Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives. The Secretary of one pair may
be the Executive of another however, assignments that form a loop-back are not allowed.
2-79
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 241.
EXEC/SEC ASSIGN
ENTER BIN NO (01-48)
2. Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Executive/Secretary pair bin.
01 EXEC/SEC
PRESS FLEX KEY(1-7)
Refer to the following table
3. Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
DISPLAY
4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.6.16-1 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY ASSIGN (PGM 241)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01 EXECUTIVE NUMBER
….
2
01 SECRETARY ASSIGN
…. …. ….
3
01 ICM CALL TO EXEC
0. SECRETARY (0-1)
4
01 CO CALL TO EXEC
0. SECRETARY (0-1)
DESCRIPTION
Assigns Secretary stations; enter secretary station
range, or press FLEX 1 ~ 3 and enter station number
to assign.
Determines call forwarding when Executive/Secretary
is in use.
SECRETARY: all internal calls to the Exec. Station
(except for calls from executives having executive
access privilege) are routed to the Secretary station
regardless of the Executive station status.
SEC IF EXEC IN DND: internal calls are routed to
secretary when executive is in ‘DND’.
Determines call forwarding when Executive/Secretary
is in use.
SECRETARY: all incoming CO calls to the Exec.
Station are routed to the Secretary station regardless
of the Executive status.
SEC IF ECEC DND: incoming CO calls are routed to
secretary when executive is in ‘DND’.
This option is to directly route calls to the Executive
station.
OFF: executive calls are routed to secretary.
FIRST SEC. DND: the executive receives call when
first secretary is in ‘DND’.
ALL SEC. DND: the executive receives call when all
secretaries in ‘DND’.
5
01 CALL EXECUTIVE
0.OFF (0-2)
6
01 SECRETARY CHOICE
0. FIRST IDLE(0-1)
Determines order in which secretary stations will
01 MSG WAIT STATION
0.EXECUTIVE (0-1)
Determines if message wait indication is left at
Executive Station or Secretary.
EXECUTIVE: message left at Executive station.
FIRST SEC: message is left at the first secretary.
7
RANGE
DEFAULT
Assigns Executive station.
FLEX 1-3
0: Secretary
Secretary
1: Secretary
if Executive
in DND
0: Secretary
Secretary
1: Secretary
if Executive
in DND
0-2
0-1
0
0
receive calls (First Idle/Longest Idle).
0: Executive
0
1: First
Secretary
2.3.6.17 Executive-Executive Access -PGM Code 242
Each Executive can be allowed or denied access to other Executives. As a default, calls between
executives are disabled.
2-80
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
PROCEDURE:
EXEC/EXEC ACCESS
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 242.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a bin no.
ENTER BIN NO (01-48)
SELECT EXEC BIN IDX
F1(1-24)/F2(-48)
3.
-
Press desired Flex button number (1~2),
Flex 1: access for 1 to 24
Flex 2: access for 25 to 48
4.
Press the desired Flex button to toggle access.
LED on: access allowed, LED off: access not allowed.
5. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry
2.3.7 TABLES DATA – PGM CODES 250-269
2.3.7.1 Toll Tables -PGM Code 250
Based on Table entries, Stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers.
The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries:



If entries are only made in the Allow Table, only those numbers entered can be dialed, all
other dialed numbers will be restricted.
If entries are only made in the Deny Table, only those numbers entered will be restricted
and all other numbers can be dialed.
When there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Table pair, if the number is in the Deny
Table, the number will be restricted otherwise the number can be dialed without restriction.
COS values from 2 to 15 have an Allow and a Deny entry in the Toll Table. For each Table, there
can be up to 100 separate Allow and Deny entries of up to 16 digits. Entries in the Tables can be
any digit (0-9), “*”, “#”.
PROCEDURE:
TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 250.
2.
Press Flex button 1~2:
Flex 1: Allow Table
Flex 2: Deny Table
Use the dial-pad to select a bin number (001~100).
ENTER COS NO(02-15)
02 TOLL TABLE
F1: ALLOW / F2: DENY
02 ALLOW TABLE
3.
ENTER BIN NO(001-100)
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number desired (up to 16 digits). To
delete a Toll Table entry, press the [SPEED] button.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
2-81
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.7.1-1 TOLL TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 250)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
02 ALLOE TABLE
BIN001: …..
Allow digits
02 DENY TABLE
BIN001: …..
Deny digits
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 16
digits
Max 16
digits
2.3.7.2 Digit Conversion Tables -PGM Code 251
The Digit Conversion Table index is assigned to the Station and CO line. And the digit conversion
can be applied according to the Apply Time Type (Unconditional, Day/Night/Timed or LCR
Day/Time) differently.
Each Table includes 300 entries of up to 16 digits; entries in the Tables can be any digit (0-9), or
“*”, “#”.
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 251.
2.
Dial Digit Conversion Table Number (1~9).
DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE
ENTER TABLE NUM(1-9)
1 DIGIT CONVERSION
ENTER BIN NO(001-300)
1/001 DIGIT CONV.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-17)
3. Dial conversion Bin No (001~300)
- Flex 1: Apply Time Type
Flex 2: Dialed Digit
Flex 3: Unconditional Changed Digit
Flex 4-6: Day/Night Timed Changed Digit
Flex 7-15: LCR Time (Day/Time Zone Changed Digit)
Flex 16-17: DNT/LCR Time Table Index
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.7.2-1 DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 251)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1/001 APPLY T-TYPE
(0-2): UNCONDITIONAL
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The Apply time type to be applied when the
0: Unconditional
0:Uncontional
dialed digit is dialed.
1:Follow DNT
2: Follow LCR
2
1/001 DIALED DIGIT
…………………..
The dialed digits
Max 16 digits
3
1/001 UNCOND CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX when the dialed digit is
pressed if Apply time type is ‘unconditional’.
2-82
*
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1/001 DAY CHANGED
…………………..
DESCRIPTION
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is
pressed if Apply time type is ‘FOLLOW
DNT’.
5
1/001 NIGHT CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in Night when the dialed digit
is pressed if Apply time type is ‘FOLLOW
DNT’.
6
1/001 TIMED CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in Timed when the dialed digit
is pressed if Apply time type is ‘FOLLOW
DNT’.
7
1/001 D1/T1 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 1/Time 1’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
8
1/001 D1/T2 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 1/Time 2’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
9
1/001 D1/T3 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 1/Time 3’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
10
1/001 D2/T1 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 2/Time 1’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
11
1/001 D2/T2 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 2/Time 2’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
12
1/001 D2/T3 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 2/Time 3’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
13
1/001 D3/T1 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 3/Time 1’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
14
1/001 D3/T2 CHANGED
…………………..
The digits to be dialed in ‘Day 3/Time 2’
Max 16 digits
when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time
type is ‘FOLLOW LCR’.
15
1/001 D3/T3 CHANGED
…………………..
The CO Group Access Code and digits to
Max 16 digits
be sent to PX in ‘Day 3/Time 3’ when the
dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’.
16
1/001 DNT TIME INDEX
(1-9): .
Day/Night/Timed Time Table Index
1-9, none
none
17
1/001 LCR TIME INDEX
(1-9): .
LCR Time Table Index
1-9, none
none
2-83
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.7.3 Digit Conversion Options -PGM Code 252
There are two options for Digit conversion: LCD Display and PRINT (refer to Tables).
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 252.
2.
Dial Digit Conversion Table Number (1-9).
3.
Press the Flex button (1-2)
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
DIGIT CONVERSION OPTION
ENTER TABLE NUM(1-9)
1) DIGIT CONVE. OPTION
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
Table 2.3.7.3-1 DIGIT CONVERSION OPTION ATTRIBUTES (PGM 252)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1) DISPLAY CONV. DIGIT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If it is set to ON, the station LCD is updated
0: OFF
OFF
to the dialed digits when alerting message is
1: ON
received from the PX after dialing.
2
1) PRINT CONV. DIGIT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If it is set to ON, the dialed digits are printed
0: OFF
to the SMDR.
1: ON
OFF
2.3.7.4 Time Table Attribute -PGM Code 253
The system can automatically select the Ring and COS Mode based on the system time table.
Three Ring and COS modes are supported: Day, Night, and Timed modes.
Each Time Table has a ring mode relating to the different ring assignments, COS, and answering
method for the system. The ring mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the
Auto Ring Mode & weekly timetable based on the Time Table. The Attendant may change the
system mode selection from automatic to manual. Refer to Table 2.3.7.4-1 for a description of the
functions, the LCD displays and data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
TIME TABLE ATTRIBUTE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 253.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired table range
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following table.
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired flexible button
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TABLE RANGE (1-9)
1-1 TIME TABLE ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-84
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.7.4-1 TIME TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 253)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1-1 TIME ZONE COMMENT
……………………………………………………………
DESCRIPTION
Defines the comment of the Time table.
1-1 SYS TIME ZONE(0-73)
0. SYSTEM TIME
Defines the Time Zone of the Time Table
3
1-1 DAYLIGHT SAVING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Defines Daylight Saving Time of Time Table.
4
1-1 RING MODE (0-2)
0. DAY
Defines the ring mode of Time Table.
RANGE
DEFAULT
32 Character
None
0-73
0. SYSTEM
TIME
ON/OFF
OFF
0-2
DAY
ON/OFF
OFF
0. Day
1. Night
2. Timed
5
Defines the Auto Ring mode of the Time Table.
1-1 AUTO RING MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
2.3.7.5 Weekly Time Table -PGM Code 254
The ring mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode and
Weekly Time Table based on the Time Table.
The start times for Day, Night and start and end times for timed modes are entered for each day of
week.
PROCEDURE:
WEEKLY TIME TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 254.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant range
3.
4.
Press the Flex 1-7 for the desired day of week (Monday-Sunday).
Press Flex 1-3 for the desired ring mode (Day, Night, Timed), refer to the
Table.
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter a time (military time), 0000 to 2359.
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
ENTER TABLE RANGE(1-9)
1-1 WEEKLY TIME TBL
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.8.8.2-1 WEEKLY TIME TABLE (PGM 254)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
MON DAY-09:00 NITE18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Monday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times
TUE DAY-09:00 NITE18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Tuesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times
2
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0000~2359
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
and TIMED mode end times.
and TIMED mode end times.
2-85
0000~2359
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
3
WED DAY-09:00 NITE18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Wednesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start
THU DAY-09:00 NITE18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Thursday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times
FRI DAY-09:00 NITE18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Friday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times
SAT DAY-..:.. NITE..:..
TDS-00:00 TDE-..:..
Saturday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times
SUN DAY-..:.. NITE..:..
TDS-00:00 TDE-..:..
Sunday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times
4
5
6
7
DESCRIPTION
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0000~2359
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: ..:..
NITE: ..:..
TDS: 00:00
TDE: ..:..
DAY: ..:..
NITE: ..:..
TDS: 00:00
TDE: ..:..
times and TIMED mode end times.
0000~2359
and TIMED mode end times.
0000~2359
and TIMED mode end times.
0000~2359
and TIMED mode end times.
0000~2359
and TIMED mode end times.
2.3.7.6 LCR Time Table -PGM Code 255
The LCR Time Tables provide a mechanism to define the database with Digit Conversion Table
(PGM251~252), which will route outgoing calls, particularly long distance, using the most costeffective route.
Additionally, days of the week are grouped into zones (Day Zones) and the time of day can be set
into three groups (Time Zones). Table 2.3.7.6-1 provides general descriptive information and input
ranges.
PROCEDURE:
LCR TIME TABLE ATTR.
1.
Press the [PGM] Button and dial 255
2.
Press Flex button 1~4, refer to the Table.
ENTER TABLE INDEX (1-9
1 LCR TIME ATTR.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3.
For LCR Time Zones, use the dial-pad to enter desired data. Refer to the
Table for input ranges.
- Flex 1-7: to select the day of week (1=Monday, 7=Sunday).
4. Enter the desired Day Zone (1-3).
5. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
Table 2.3.7.6-1 LCR TIME TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 255)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DAY ZN 1:1234567 2: 3:
M1 T2 W3 T4 F5 SA6 SU7
DESCRIPTION
For each day of the week, a Day Zone
(1 to 3) is assigned. The active Day Zone is the
Zone assigned to the current day of the week (Flex
button 1~7).
2-86
RANGE
DEFAULT
Flex 1~7 +
Zone 1: all
1~3
days of the
week
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
DAY ZONE 1
1:00-24 2:..-.. 3:..-..
This entry defines the time zone of day zone 1 when
DAY ZONE 2
1:00-24 2:..-.. 3:..-..
This entry defines the time zone of day zone 2 when
DAY ZONE 3
1:00-24 2:..-.. 3:..-..
This entry defines the time zone of day zone 3 when
RANGE
DEFAULT
00~24
00-24
Day Zone 1 is active.
00~24
Day Zone 2 is active.
00~24
Day Zone 3 is active.
2.3.7.7 Holiday Time Table -PGM Code 256
Each Time Table has a Holiday Time table and Ring mode is operated as Night mode when the
current date is set as a Holiday time table election from automatic to manual.
PROCEDURE:
HOLIDAY TIME TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 256.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired table index..
3.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin.
4.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following table.
5.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired flexible button
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TABLE INDEX (1-9)
1 HOLIDAY TABLE
ENTER BIN NO (01-50)
1/01 HOLIDAY ATTR
ENTER FLEX KEY (1-2)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.7.7-1 HOLIDAY TIME TABLE (PGM 256)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1/01 LUNAR CALENDAR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Defines the Lunar Calendar for Holiday
ON/OFF
OFF
1/01 HOLIDAY DATE
01 : ../..
Defines Holiday Date for Holiday table
MM/DD
None
table.
2-87
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.7.8 System Speed Table -PGM Code 257
The System Speed can be assigned.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 257.
2.
Use the dial-pad for the desired speed range..
3.
4.
Press the Flex button (1~4)
- Flex 1: System Speed Dial
- Flex 2: System Speed Dial Name
- Flex 3: Toll Free
- Flex 4: Tenant No
Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
ENTER RANGE (2000-3999)
2000-2000 SYS SPD DIAL
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-4)
Table 2.3.7.8-1 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 257)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
1
2000-2000 SYS SPD DIAL
…………………..
The System Speed Dial Digits
2
2000-2000 SYS SPD NAME
…………………..
The System Speed Dial Name
2000-2000 TOLL FREE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Assignment to apply toll free
2000-2000 TENANT NO
(1-9) : 1
The tenant number to be applied the
1~9(MG-300)
System Speed Access
1-5(MG-100)
3
4
DEFAULT
Max 32 digits
Max 16
characters
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
1
2.3.7.9 Emergency Code Table -PGM Code 258The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which, when dialed, will
override all COS dialing restrictions. An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen (16) digits
in length.
PROCEDURE:
EMERGENCY CODE TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 258.
2.
Use the dial-pad for the desired Emergency code entry, 01 ~ 50.
ENTER BIN NO (01 - 50)
01 EMERGENCY CODE
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
2-88
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
3.
Press the Flex button (1~3)
- Flex 1: Dialed Digit
- Flex 2: Changed Digit (To be dialed digits)
- Flex 3: Tenant number
4. Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
Table 2.3.7.9-1 EMERGENCY CODE TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 258)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
1
01 DIALED DIGIT
…………………..
The dialed digits from user.
Max 16 digits
2
01 CHANGED DIGIT
…………………..
CO Group Access Code and digits to be
Max 16 digits
01 TENANT NO
(1-9) : 1
The tenant number to be applied when user
1~9(MG-300)
dials emergency code.
1-5(MG-100)
3
DEFAULT
sent to PX when user dials the dialed digit.
1
2.3.7.10 Announcement Table -PGM Code 259
The System Speed can be assigned (refer to Tables).
PROCEDURE:
ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 259.
2.
Use the dial-pad for the desired announcement bin no.
ENTER BIN NO (001-100)
001 1ST- ../.. 2ND-../..
3-../.. 4-../.. CCR:…
3.
4.
Press the Flex button (1~4)
Flex 1: The 1st VMIB Slot & Announcement No
Flex 2: The 2nd VMIB Slot & Announcement No
Flex 3: The 3rd VMIB Slot & Announcement No
Flex 4: The 4th VMIB Slot & Announcement No
Flex 5: CCR Index Number
Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store data entered.
-
Table 2.3.7.10-1 ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 259)
BTN
1~4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
001 1ST-../.. 2ND-../..
3-../.. 4-../.. CCR:…
The VMIB slot & Prompt No. to be used for
001 1ST-../.. 2ND-../..
3-../.. 4-../.. CCR:…
CCR index used for playing the VMIB
playing the VMIB Announcement No.
RANGE
VMIB Slot(0018) & Prompt No
(01-70)
5
Announcement No.
2-89
1~100
DEFAULT
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.7.11 Customer Call Routing Table -PGM Code 260
The system incorporates Integrated Voice Response (IVR) capabilities called Customer Call
Routing (CCR). After or during a VMIB Announcement, a caller may dial a digit to select a
destination or route for the call. The CCR Table defines the destination associated with digits
dialed by the caller in response to the VMIB Announcement (001-100); up to 100 single-level Audio
Text menus may be assigned, or multi-level menu structures (maximum 100 levels) can be
established using one menu as a destination for the previous level.
PROCEDURE:
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 260.
2.
Use the dial-pad to select a CCR Table index, 001~100. The index number
is the index of Announcement Table (PGM 259)
3.
Press a Flex button (1~12, 10=0, 11=*, 12=#) to assign a route for the
associated CCR dialed digit.
4.
Use the dial-pad for Destination.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
SELECT BIN NO (001-100)
001 CCR TABLE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-12)
001 CCR TABLE
INPUT 1 : NOT ASSIGNED
001 CCR TABLE
INPUT 1 : ...
Table 2.3.7.11-1 CCR TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 260)
BTN
1~12
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
The destination of CCR input digit; the
001 CCR TABLE
INPUT 1 : ……..
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max 8 Digits
destination can be a Station number, Station
group number or Feature code. NOTE: For
Feature codes, refer to the Numbering Plan
for the applicable codes.
2.3.7.12 ICLID Route Table -PGM Code 262
The system can employ Incoming Calling Line ID (ICLID) to determine the routing of incoming
external calls. Each CO/IP Line may be assigned to employ ICLID routing. The System will
compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route Table, and if a match is found, the
System will route the call to the destination indicated by the index (bin) number (PGM 181).
PROCEDURE:
ICLID TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 262.
2.
To program ICLID Route table, dial Bin No (001 – 250).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired ICLID Table entry; refer to Table.
ENTER BIN NO (001-250)
001 ICLID TABLE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-90
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Table data
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Table data entered.
Table 2.3.7.12-1 ICLID TABLE (PGM 262)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
001 ICLID NUMBER
…………………….
ICLID used to match the index.
24-digits
None
2
001 ICLID NAME
……………………..
ICLID name that is sent by the System to the
16. Character
None
001 INC CO GROUP NO
(01-72)..
The CO Group Number to apply ICLID route; if
001 DAY RING INDEX
(01-80) ..
The index to be routed in Day; the Alternative
001 NIGHT RING INDEX
(01-80) ..
The index to be routed in Night; the Alternative
001 TIMED RING INDEX
(01-80) ..
The index to be routed in Timed; the Alternative
001 TENANT NO
(1-9) 1
The tenant number to be applied the ICLID.
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
destination for the ICLID routed call.
1 - 72
not assigned, ICLID is applied to all CO Groups.
1 – 80
Ring Index (PGM 181).
1 – 80
Ring Index (PGM 181).
1 – 80
Ring Index (PGM 181).
1~9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
2.3.7.13 CLI Conversion Table -PGM Code 263
The system can convert Incoming or outgoing CLI using the CLI Conversion Table. The system
will compare the received CLI or Calling CLI to the Conversion table.
PROCEDURE:
CLI CONVERSION TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 263.
2.
To select CLI Conversion table, dial table number (1–9).
3.
To program CLI Conversion table, dial the appropriate bin number (01-50),
and refer to the Table.
4.
Press the Flex button for the desired ICLID Table entry, refer to Table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Table data entered.
ENTER TABLE NUM(1-9)
1 CLI CONVERSION
ENTER BIN NO (01-50)
1/01 CONV. INDEX
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
2-91
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.7.13-1 CLI CONV TABLE (PGM 263)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
1/01 ORIGINAL CLI
………………………………………….
Original CLI
24-digits
None
2
1/01 CONVERTED CLI
……………………………..
Converted CLI
24 digits
None
2.3.7.14 Tone Port Table – PGM Code 264 (Web Admin Only)
The system provides 19 types of tone ports. Each tone port may be selected as a tone type from
the Tone Table (PGM 290).
Table 2.3.7.14-1 TONE PORT TABLE (Default)
INDEX
FREQUENCY
FREQ 1
FREQ 2
01
425 Hz
0 Hz
02
620
0
03
1000
1020
04
440
0
CADENCE
REPEAT
300 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF
3
1 sec ON / 4 sec OFF
255(Cont.)
255(Cont.)
05
950
0
1 sec ON / 2 sec OFF
06
950
0
400 ms ON / 100 ms OFF
07
950
0
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
3
08
1400
0
1200 ms ON / 320 ms OFF
1
09
1400
0
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
10
350
440
11
425
12
620
13
950
0
100 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
14
425
0
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 msec ON / 3400 msec OFF
255(Cont.)
15
620
0
100 ms ON / 100 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
16
425
620
500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
17
350
0
1 sec ON
255(Cont.)
18
425
0
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 ms ON / 1400 ms OFF
19
1260
1633
2
3
1 sec ON
255(Cont.)
0
320 ms ON / 30 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
0
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
3
500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF
2
1
255(Cont.)
2.3.7.15 Ring Table – PGM Codes 265-266 (Web Admin Only)
Each Ring can have 4 different types among 15 Ring. After 4 different ring index programmed, CO
line or Station may select one of 4 types.
Table 2.3.7.1510-1 RING TABLE (PGM 265)
INDEX
RING NAME
1
Normal Call Ring (Station)
2
Normal Call Ring (CO)
3
Recall Ring (Station)
2-92
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
INDEX
RING NAME
4
Recall Ring (CO)
5
Forward Call Ring (Station)
6
Forward Call Ring (CO)
7
Transfer Call Ring (Station)
8
Transfer Call Ring (CO)
9
Call Back Indication Ring
10
Wakeup Indication Ring
11
Revertible Ring
12
Paging Call Ring
13
Handsfree Answer Ring
14
Command Call Ring
15
Alert Ring
16
Alarm Ring
17
Fault Ring
Table 2.3.7.1510-1 RING FREQ/CADENCE TABLE (PGM 266)
INDEX
FREQUENCY
FREQ 1
FREQ 2
CADENCE
REPEAT
01
1000
1020
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
02
1000
1020
400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF
255(Cont.)
03
1000
1020
400 ms ON / 600 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
04
1000
1020
1 sec ON
05
1000
1020
800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
1
255(Cont.)
06
890
910
800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
07
1260
1280
800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
08
800
820
800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
09
1000
1020
400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF
255(Cont.)
10
890
910
400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF
255(Cont.)
11
1260
1280
400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF
255(Cont.)
12
800
820
400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF
255(Cont.)
13
1000
1020
200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
14
1000
1020
400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
15
1000
1260
300 ms ON / 300 ms OFF
255(Cont.)
2.3.7.16 Voice Mail Dialing Table -PGM Code 269
When an external Voice Mail system is used that employs in-band signaling, a digit sequence must
be defined for the system to signal various call characteristics to the Voice Mail system. The voice
mail uses the sequences to determine appropriate announcements or further call routing. The
Table permits the definition of digits as either a prefix or suffix to other digits (station number for
mailbox identification). Sequences are defined for such call characteristics as Put Mail, Get Mail,
No Answer call, etc.
PROCEDURE:
VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 269.
DIAL DIGIT (1-9)
2-93
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Refer to the following table
Issue 1.0
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter a table entry (1-9), refer to Table.
3.
Use the dial-pad to select Prefix or Suffix and the digit sequence, use the
[MSG/CALLBK] button to enter a Pause, refer to the Table.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.7.161-1 VOICE MAIL DIAL (PGM 269)
BTN
1
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
VOICE MAIL 1
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive
0: Prefix
P#
call to record a message.
1: Suffix
VOICE MAIL 2
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
Get Mail code sent when the voice mail is to
0: Prefix
playback recorded messages.
1: Suffix
VOICE MAIL 3
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
Busy Mail code sent when the voice mail is to
0: Prefix
receive a call while the user is busy.
1: Suffix
VOICE MAIL 4
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
DND Mail code sent when the voice mail is to
0: Prefix
receive a call while the user is in DND.
1: Suffix
VOICE MAIL 5
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
No Answer Mail code sent when the voice mail is to
0: Prefix
receive a call when the user did not answer.
1: Suffix
Any digits
2
P##
Any digits
3
P#*3P
Any digits
4
P#*4P
Any digits
5
P#*5P
Any digits
6
VOICE MAIL 6
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
Error Mail code sent when the voice mail is to
0: Prefix
receive a call when a dialing error exists.
1: Suffix
P#*6P
Any digits
7
0: Prefix
VOICE MAIL 7
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
1: Suffix
Any digits
8
0: Prefix
VOICE MAIL 8
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
1: Suffix
Any digits
9
VOICE MAIL 9
DISCONNECT [DIAL DGT_1]
Disconnect Mail code sent when the voice mail is to
0: Prefix
disconnect a call.
1: Suffix
Any digits
2-94
*****
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.8 TENANTS DATA – PGM CODES 270-296
2.3.8.1 Attendant Group -PGM Codes 270-272
Each tenant on the System can have an Attendant Group an Attendant group can have up to 5
Attendants.
2.3.8.1.1
Attendant Group Assign -PGM Code 270
Attendant Stations can be grouped so that calls will search for an idle Attendant in the group. The
System allows assignment of the process to be in Circular, Terminal, Ring, Longest Idle modes.
Refer to the following table for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries
required.
PROCEDURE:
ATTENDANT GR ASSIGN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 270.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100 and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following table.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
TENANT 1 ATTD GR.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
4. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Attendant Group data.
NOTE: for group members, enter an attendant number or attendant range. For an
individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in
the group and dial the attendant number. For a range, enter the first and last
station number in the range (only LKD/LDP/LIP model can be assigned).
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
Table 2.3.8.1-1 ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (PGM 270)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Defines the type of Attendant group.
T1 ATTD GR TYPE
0.TERMINAL (0-3)
RANGE
0: Terminal
DEFAULT
0
1: Circular
2: Ring
3: Longest Idle
2
Defines the name of attendant group
T1 ATTD GR NAME
............
3
T1 CO ATD NUMBER
....
4
T1 MEMBER ASG
....
....
Defines attendant call number for CO line
Assigns stations as members of an Attendant
....
group.
2-95
Max 16.
-
Max 4
First Station
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.8.1.2
Issue 1.0
Attendant Group Greeting/Queuing -PGM Code 271
Each attendant group has available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing announcements,
time. Table 2.3.8.1.2-1 provides descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and data entries
required.
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 271.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute, refer to Table.
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired attendant group attributes data, refer to
the Table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
ATTD GR GREETING/QUEUING
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
T1 GREETING/QUEUING
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-12)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.1.8.2-1 ATTENDANT GROUP GREETING/QUEUING (PGM 271)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
T1 GREETING TYPE
0.NORMAL(0-4)
Determines the type of Greeting Tone to be
2
T1 GREETING PLAY
(000-180) : 0000 (100ms)
Determines the Greeting Play time.
3
T1 GREETING TONE NO
(01-19) : ..
Determines the Greeting Tone number when
T1 GREETING PROMPT/ANNC
(001-255) : ...
Determines the Greeting Prompt/ Announce
4
used.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0. Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
000~180
(sec)
0
000
01~19
04
001-255
NOT ASG
000-100
3
000-100
(seconds)
0
0. Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
010~300
(sec)
3
greeting type is set to Normal.
Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or
Announce.
5
6
T1 GREETING REPEAT NO
(000-100) : 003
Determines the number of times the Greeting
T1 GREETING RPT DELAY
(000-100) : 000 (sec)
Determines the length of time the timer will
will repeat.
pause before the greeting is repeated.
7
T1 QUEUING TYPE
0.NORMAL(0-4)
Determines the type of Queuing Tone.
8
T1 TIMEOUT TIMER
(000-180) : 030(sec)
Determines the Greeting/Queuing Timeout
T1 QUEUING TONE NO
(01-19) : ..
Determines the Queuing Tone number used
9
Timer.
when Queuing Type is set to Normal.
2-96
01~19
030
00
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
T1 QUEUING PROMPT/ANNC
(001-255) : ...
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines the Queuing Prompt/ Announce
001-255
NOT ASG
000-100
3
000-100
(seconds)
0
Number when the Queuing Type is set to
Prompt or Announce.
11
T1 QUEUING REPEAT NO
(000-100) : 003
Determines the Queuing Repeat number.
12
T1 QUEUING RPT DELAY
(000-100) : 000 (sec)
Determines the Pause Timer before Queuing is
2.3.8.1.3
repeated.
Attendant Group Attributes -PGM Code 272
Each attendant group has available attributes relating to announcements, timers, forward, etc.
Table 2.3.8.1.3-1 provides descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 272.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute; refer to the Table
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired attendant group attributes data, refer to
the following table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ATTENDANT GR ATTR
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
T1 ATTENDANT ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-8)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.8.1.3-1 ATTENDANT GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 272)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
T1 CALL IN GREETING
(0-1): AFTER GREETING
Determines if call is routed to the Attendant
2
T1 MAX QUEUE COUNT
(00-99) : 05
Determines the Queue count.
3
T1 FORWARD TYPE
0.NOT USED (0-4)
Determines the Forward type to use.
when Greeting Tone is played.
0: Not used
1: Unconditional – call is routed to a forward
destination unconditionally.
2: Queuing overflow – call is routed to a forward
destination when a queue overflows.
3: Queuing timeout – call is routed to a forward
destination when queuing time expires.
4: Queuing all – call is routed to a forward
destination when a queue overflows or queuing
time expires.
2-97
RANGE
0.After
Greeting
1. In Greeting
00~99
0. NOT USED
1. UNCOND
2. Q Overflow
3. Time out
4. All
DEFAULT
1
05
0
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Determines the time setting for applying the
T1 APPLY TIME TYPE
0. ALL (0-3)
Forward type.
Determines the forward destination (trunk
T1 FWD DESTINATION
................
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0. ALL
1. DAY
2. NIGHT
3. TIMED
Max 16 digits
0
000-600
(100ms)
5
050-600
(100ms)
150
access code should be included).
T1 WRAP UP TMR
(000-600) : 005 (100ms)
Determines the Wrap-up Timer; a member is
available when this timer expires after a member
goes to idle.
7
8
T1 MEMBER NO ANS TMR
(050-600): 150 (100ms)
Determines the No Answer timer; if this timer is
T1 ATD CALL BY STA NO
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
This entry defines attendant call by dialing
expired, a call is routed to the next attendant.
OFF
attendant member.
0 : the call for attendant follows normal call.
1: the call for attendant follows attendant group
call
2.3.8.2 Night Attendant Group -PGM Codes 275-277
Night Attendant Group covers a call while the Attendant station is in an unavailable mode or
system goes to night mode.
2.3.8.2.1
Night Attendant Group Assign -PGM Code 275
Stations can be grouped as night attendant group so that calls will search for an idle station in the
night attendant group. The system allows assignment of processes, Circular, Terminal, Ring, and
Longest Idle.
Refer to table 2.3.8.2.1-1 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries
required.
PROCEDURE:
NIGHT ATTD GR ASSIGN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 275.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following table.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
TENANT 1 NIGHT ATTD GR.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
4. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Attendant Group data.
NOTE: for group members, enter an attendant number or attendant range. For
an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in
the group and dial the attendant number. For a range, enter the first and last
station number in the range (only LKD/LDP/LIP model can be assigned).
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
2-98
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.8.2.1-1 NIGHT ATTENDANT GROUP ASSIGNMENT (PGM 275)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
T1 NIGHT ATTD GR TYPE
0.TERMINAL (0-3)
DESCRIPTION
Determines the type of Night Attendant group.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Terminal
0
1: Circular
2: Ring
3: Longest Idle
2
T1 NIGHT ATTD GR NAME
............
3
T1 NIGHT MEMBER ASG
....
....
....
2.3.8.2.2
Determines the name of the night Attendant
Max 16.
-
group
Assigns Stations as members of a Night
Attendant group.
Night Attendant Group Greeting/Queuing -PGM Code 276
Each night attendant group has available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing
announcements, time. Table 2.3.8.2.2-1 provides descriptions for the attributes, LCD displays and
data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
NIGHT GREETING/QUEUING
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 276.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute; refer to the Table
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired attendant group attributes data, refer to
the following table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
T1 GREETING/QUEUING
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-12)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.8.2.2-1 NIGHT ATTENDANT GROUP GREETING/QUEUING (PGM 276)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
1
T1 GREETING TYPE
0.NORMAL(0-4)
Determines the type of Greeting Tone used.
2
T1 GREETING PLAY
(000-180) : 0000 (sec)
Determines greeting play time.
3
T1 GREETING TONE NO
(01-19) : ..
Determines the Greeting Tone number in case
T1 GREETING PROMPT/ANNC
(001-255) : ...
Determines the Greeting Prompt / Annc
4
RANGE
0. Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
000~180
(sec)
DEFAULT
0
000
01~19
..
001-255
NOT ASG
greeting type is normal.
Number when the greeting type is set to Prompt,
or Announce.
2-99
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
5
T1 GREETING REPEAT NO
(000-100) : 003
Determines the Greeting Repeat number.
000-100
3
6
T1 GREETING RPT DELAY
(000-100) : 000 (sec)
Determines the Pause timer used before
000-100
(seconds)
0
0. Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
010~300
(sec)
3
Greeting is repeated.
7
T1 QUEUING TYPE
0.NORMAL(0-4)
Determines the type of Queuing Tone.
8
T1 TIMEOUT TIMER
(000-180) : 030(sec)
Determines greeting/queuing timeout timer.
9
T1 QUEUING TONE NO
(01-19) : ..
Determines Queuing Tone number when
T1 QUEUING PROMPT/ANNC
(001-255) : ...
Determines Queuing Prompt / Annc.
10
30
01~19
..
001-255
NOT ASG
000-100
3
000-100
(seconds)
0
Queuing Type is set to Normal.
Number when Queuing Type is set to Prompt or
Announce.
11
T1 QUEUING REPEAT NO
(000-100) : 003
Determines the Queuing Repeat number.
12
T1 QUEUING RPT DELAY
(000-100) : 000 (sec)
Determines the Pause Timer before Queuing is
2.3.8.2.3
repeated.
Night Attendant Group Attributes (PGM 277)
Each Night Attendant group has available attributes relating to Announcements, Timers, Forward,
etc. (refer to Table 2.3.8.2.3-1 for descriptions of the attributes, LCD displays and data entries
required).
PROCEDURE:
NIGHT ATTD GR ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 277.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute (refer to Table).
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Attendant group attributes data (refer
to Table).
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
T1 NIGHT ATTD ATTR
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
2-100
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.8.2.3-1 NIGHT ATTENDANT GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 277)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
0: After
Greeting
1: In Greeting
00-99
DEFAULT
1
T1 CALL IN GREETING
(0-1): AFTER GREETING
Determines if a call is routed to the Night
2
T1 MAX QUEUE COUNT
(00-99): 05
This entry defines queue count.
3
T1 FORWARD TYPE
0.NOT USED (0-4)
This entry defines forward type.
0: Not used
1: Unconditional – call is routed to a forward
destination unconditionally.
2: Queuing overflow – call is routed to a forward
destination when queue overflows.
3: Timeout – call is routed to a forward
destination when timeout timer expires.
4: All – call is routed to a forward destination
when queue overflows or timeout timer expires.
0: NOT USED
1: UNCOND
2: Q Overflow
3: Q Time out
4: Q All
0
4
T1 APPLY TIME TYPE
0. ALL (0-3)
Determines a time to apply the Forward type.
0
5
T1 FWD DESTINATION
................
Determines a forward destination (trunk access
0. ALL
1. DAY
2. NIGHT
3. TIMED
Max 16 digits
6
T1 WRAP UP TMR
(000-600): 010 (100ms)
Determines the Wrap-up timer (member is
available when timer expires after a member
goes to idle).
000-600
010
7
T1 MEMBER NO ANS TMR
(050-600): 150 (100ms)
Determines the no answer timer (if timer expires,
050-600
150
Attendant while the Greeting Tone is played.
05
code should be included).
a call is routed to the next night attendant).
2.3.8.3 Tenant Attributes – PGM Codes 280-281
One System can be divided as several systems; each Station and CO line are assigned to a
specific Tenant group.
2.3.8.3.1
Tenant Attributes I -PGM Codes 280
Each tenant has available attributes relating to tenant name, retry count of ACNR, Wake Up, Auth
etc. (refer to Table 2.3.8.3.1-1 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries
required).
PROCEDURE:
TENANT ATTRIBUTE 1
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 280.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant range (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting (refer to Table).
4.
5.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired flexible button.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT RANGE (1-9)
1-1 TENANT ATT 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-8)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
2-101
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.8.3.1-1 TENANT ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 280)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
1-1 TENANT NAME
......................
Determines the name of Tenant.
Max 24
2
TENANT NAME DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
Determines the Tenant name to display.
0: OFF
3
TIME TABLE INDEX
(1-9) : 1
Determines Time Table index of tenant group
1-9
1
4
ACNR RETRY COUNT
(0-5): 3
Determines the ACNR retry count.
0-5
3
5
WAKEUP RETRY COUNT
(0-5): 3
Determines the Wake Up retry count.
0-5
3
6
WAKEUP RETRY TIME(min)
(00-20): 01
Determines the Wake Up retry time (min).
00-20
01
7
AUTH RETRY COUNT
(0-5): 3
Determines the AUTH retry count.(Reserved)
0-5
3
8
MULTI-CFW SVC COUNT
(01-10): 05
Determines the Multi-Call forward count.
01-10
05
2.3.8.3.2
0
1: ON
Tenant Attributes II –PGM Code 281
Each tenant has available attributes relating to tenant name, retry count of ACNR, Wake-Up, and
Auth., etc. (refer to Table 2.3.8.3.2-1 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data
entries required).
PROCEDURE:
TENANT ATTRIBUTE 2
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 281.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for iPECS-MG 100,
and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting (refer to Table).
4.
5.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired flexible button.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT RANGE (1-9)
1-1 TENANT ATT 2
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
2-102
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.8.3.2-1 TENANT ATTRIBUTE II (PGM 281)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CONF-MEMBER MANUAL ADD
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines if conf-member manual add will be
DESCRIPTION
0: OFF
1
used; when set to ON, each CONF member can
1: ON
be added using the CONF button, when set to
OFF, each CONF member will be added
automatically.
2
REDIAL METHOD
2. LIST DIAL
This entry defines the redial method when the
User presses the [REDIAL] button.
1: One Touch Call – When [REDIAL] button is
0: One Touch
2
Dial
1: One Touch
pressed, the phone will redial the previously
Log Phone
called number.
2: List Dial
2: One Touch Log Phone – When [REDIAL]
button is pressed on phone with 3-soft button,
redialing can be initiated, if phone does not
have 3-soft button, a redial list will be displayed.
3: List Dial – When the [REDIAL] button is
pressed, redial list is displayed, and user can
3
4
5
6
DIAL DIGIT PROCESS
2. TYPE 3(C-S-R[E])
select which number to redial.
This entry defines the dial digit processing
method.
0: TYPE 1(R-C-S) – If user dials digits, digit are
process as listed:
- 1)Apply Toll Restriction to all digits including
CO access code.
- 2) Converted
- 3) Seize CO Line
1: TYPE 2(C-S-R[A]) – If user dials digits, they
are processed as listed:
- 1) Converted
- 2) Seize CO Line
- 3) Apply toll Restriction to all digits including
CO access code.
2: TYPE 3(C-S-R[E]) – If user dials digits, digit
are processed as listed:
- 1) Converted
- 2) Seize CO Line
- 3) Apply Toll Restriction external telephone
number
0: Type 1
2
1: Type 2
2: Type 3
XFER CO TO COS 0 STA
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
This entry allows transfer to COS 0 station
0: OFF
ADD CO ACCESS CODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
This entry allows add CO Access code to
0: OFF
incoming CLI to return the call
1: ON
CODEC TYPE
1. G711
System Codec type
ON
1: ON
1.G711
OF
1
2.G723
3.G729
4.G722
7
BACKLIGHT USAGE
0.All OFF
This entry allows backlight option of LIP Phone
with ring mode
0.All Off
1.Day On
2.Night On
3.Timed On
4.D/N On
5.D/T On
6.N/T On
7.All On
2-103
0
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.8.4 Tenant Group Access -PGM Code 283
Stations in a group are allowed or denied the ability to place intercom/CO calls to Stations in other
groups on a Group-by-group basis.
PROCEDURE:
TENANT CALL ACCESS
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 283.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant number (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 199 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
4.
Press the Flex button to access/deny tenant.
Each Tenant can be programmed to allow or deny call to other tenant.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
1 TENANT CALL ACCESS
PRESS ACCESS NO (1-9)
1 TENANT CALL ACCESS
PRESS ACCESS NO (1-9)
2.3.8.5 CO Call Restriction PGM Codes 284-285
The CO Call Time Restriction can be applied differently according to Call types (Local, Long
Distance or International Call) based on each Tenant.
2.3.8.5.1
Call Duration Restriction I (CDR) -PGM Code 284
Each tenant has attributes relating Call Duration Restriction (CDR) according to call types (refer to
Table 2.3.8.5.1-1 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries required).
PROCEDURE:
CALL DURATION RESTRICT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 284.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting (refer to Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT RANGE (1-9)
1-1 CDR ATTR 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.8.5.1-1 CALL DURATION RESTRICTION I (PGM 284)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
NORMAL CO LINE
(0-3): NO RESTRICTION
DESCRIPTION
Determines call restriction for Normal CO line.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: No
0
Restriction
1: All Calls
2: Long/
International
3: International
2
DEDICATED LINE
(0-1): NO RESTRICTION
Determines the call restriction for TIE line.
0: No
restriction
1: Restriction
2-104
0
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
LOCAL CALL AFTER R-TIME
(0-2): SINGLE TONE
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines the operation of Local calls after the
0: Single tone
0
Restriction timer expires.
1: Repeat tone
2: Single tone
& Drop
4
LONG CALL AFTER R-TIME
(0-2): SINGLE TONE
Determines the operation of Long Distance calls
0: Single tone
after the Restriction timer expires.
1: Repeat tone
0
2: Single tone
& Drop
5
INTERNAT AFTER R-TIME
(0-2): SINGLE TONE
Determines the operation of International calls
0: Single tone
after the Restriction timer expires.
1: Repeat tone
0
2: Single tone
& Drop
6
DEDICATED CALL AFT R-TM
(0-2): SINGLE TONE
Determines the operation of TIE calls after the
0: Single tone
Restriction timer expires.
1: Repeat tone
0
2: Single tone
& Drop
2.3.8.5.2
Call Duration Restriction II (CDR) -PGM Code 285
Each tenant has available attributes relating the CDR timer according to call types (refer to Table
2.3.8.5.2-1 for a description of the functions, the LCD displays and data entries required).
PROCEDURE:
CALL DURATION RESTRICT
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 285.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting (refer to Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT RANGE (1-9)
1-1 CDR ATTR 2
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-12)
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.8.5.2-1 CALL DURATION RESTRICTION II (PGM 285)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
LOCAL CALL TONE RPT-TMR
(010-254): 020(sec)
Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Local
LONG CALL TONE RPT-TMR
(010-254): 020(sec)
Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Long
INTNATION CALL TONE RPT
(010-254): 020(sec)
Determines the Tone Repeat timer of
DEDICATED CALL TONE RPT
(010-254): 020(sec)
Determines the Repeat timer of Dedicated Line
LOCAL CALL DISC. TMR
(10-60): 15(sec)
Determines entry defines Disconnect timer of
RANGE
DEFAULT
010-254
020
010-254
020
010-254
020
010-254
020
10-60
15
calls.
Distance calls.
International calls.
calls.
Local calls.
2-105
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
10-60
15
10-60
15
10-60
15
Determines the Restriction timer of Local calls.
001-100
003
LONG CALL REST. TMR
(001-100): 003(min)
Determines the Restriction timer of Long
001-100
003
INTERNATIONAL REST. TMR
(001-100): 003(min)
Determines the Restriction timer of International
001-100
003
DEDICATED CALL REST. TMR
(001-100): 003(min)
Determines the Restriction timer of Dedicated
001-100
003
LONG CALL DISC. TMR
(10-60): 15(sec)
Determines the disconnect timer of Long
INTERNATIONAL DISC. TMR
(10-60): 15(sec)
Determines the Disconnect timer of International
DEDICATED CALL DISC. TMR
(10-60): 15(sec)
Determines the Disconnect timer of Dedicated
9
LOCAL CALL REST. TMR
(001-100): 003(min)
10
7
8
11
12
Distance calls.
calls.
Line calls.
Distance calls.
calls.
Line calls.
2.3.8.6 Call Prefix Table -PGM Codes 286-288
The call type for CDR can be applied differently according to the call Prefix Table based on Tenant.
2.3.8.6.1
Local Call Prefix Table -PGM Code 286
Each tenant has a Local Call Prefix Table relating to CDR.
PROCEDURE:
LOCAL CALL PREFIX TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 286.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin number (up to 4 digits can be
assigned for local call prefix index).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
1 LOCAL CALL PREFIX
ENTER BIN NO (01-50)
1/01 LOCAL CALL PREFIX
....
2.3.8.6.2
Long Distance Call Prefix Table –PGM Code 287
Each tenant has a Long Distance Call Prefix Table relating to CDR.
PROCEDURE:
LONG DIST. PREFIX TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 287.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
2-106
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
1 LONG DIST. PREFIX
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100, and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin number (up to 4 digits can be
assigned for the Long Distance call prefix index).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER BIN NO (01-50)
1/01 LONG DIST. PREFIX
....
2.3.8.6.3
Issue 1.0
International Call Prefix Table -PGM Code 288
Each tenant has an International Call Prefix Table relating to CDR.
PROCEDURE:
INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 288.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant range (1-5 for the iPECS-MG
100 and 1-9 for iPECS-MG 300).
3.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin number (up to 4 digits can be
assigned for the International call prefix index).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER TENANT NO (1-9)
1 INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
ENTER BIN NO (01-50)
1/01 INTERNATION PREFIX
....
2.3.8.7 Tenant Tone Table -PGM Code 290
The system provides 71 tones that can be assigned for use as the normal tone, VMIB
prompt/Announcement or internal/external music.
PROCEDURE:
TENANT TONE TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 290.
2.
Enter tenant range using dial pad. For a single tenant group, just enter the
same number twice.
3.
To program tone, dial tone index (01 – 73). Please refer to the Tone Index
Table of Web-Admin (PGM 264).
ENTER TENANT RANGE(1-9)
1-1 TENANT TONE TABLE
ENTER TONE INDEX (01-73)
1ST DIAL TONE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
Refer to the following table
4.
-
DISPLAY
Press the Flex button.
Flex 1: Tone Type
Flex 2: Tone Time
Flex 3: Tone port index (Please refer to the TONE PORT Table)
Flex 4: VMIB Prompt/Announcement Number
Flex 5: VMIB Prompt/Announcement Repeat Number
Flex 6: VMIB Prompt/Announcement Repeat Interval
5.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired data
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the Table data entry.
2-107
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.8.77-1 TONE TABLE (PGM 290)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1-1/01 TONE TYPE
(01-14): 1 (NORMAL TONE)
DESCRIPTION
Designates the Tone type
RANGE
DEFAULT
01: Normal Tone
Normal
02:VMIB Prompt
Tone
03: VMIB Announcement
04: Internal MOH
05: External MOH
06~09:VMIB MOH 1/2/3/4
10~14: SLT MOH 1~5
2
3
1-1/01 TONE TIME
(001-600) : 010(sec)
Determines the amount of time tone
1-1/01 TONE PORT
(01-19) : 11
Tone port index of PGM 264. The
1 ~ 600
10
is provided.
1 ~ 19
cadence of tone port may be
changed by using Web-Admin
4
1-1/01 PROMPT/ANNC. NO
(001-255):…
The VMIB Prompt or Announcement
1 ~ 255
number when tone type is VMIB
Prompt or announcement.
5
1-1/01 PROMPT/ANNC. RPT
(000-100) : 001
The VMIB Prompt or Announcement
0 ~ 100
1
0 ~ 100
0
Repeat number when tone type is
VMIB Prompt or announcement.
6
1-1/01 PROMPT/ANNC. INTVL
(000-100) : 001
The VMIB Prompt or Announcement
Repeat interval when VMIB Prompt
or announcement. Repeat is
assigned.
Table 2.3.8.777-2 TONE INDEX TABLE
INDEX
1
TONE NAME
1st Dial Tone
2
2nd Dial Tone
3
CO Dial Tone
4
5
DISA Dial Tone
LCR Virtual Tone
6
Digit Conversion Virtual Tone
7
Password Dial Tone
8
Internal Busy Tone
9
10
External Busy Tone
CO Line Busy Tone
11
Uncompleted Dial Error Tone
12
DOD Restriction Tone
13
Internal No-Answer Tone
14
15
16
17
External No-Answer Tone
Internal Vacant Error Tone
External Vacant Error one
Call Duration Restriction Tone
Description
This is provided when station goes off-hook.
This
is provided when station presses [TRANS] button during
conversation to transfer the call.
This is provided to transit CO line if he accesses CO line which does not
provide CO Dial Tone.
This is provided to external caller through DISA
Reserved
This is provided when station dials ‘Dummy Dial-Tone Digit’ in PGM
240.
This is provided when station dials conference room number having
password.
This is provided to external caller through DID/DISA when he calls the
busy station.
This is provided when station makes a external call to telephone in use.
This is provided to station when there is no idle CO line.
This is provided when station does not dial within inter-digit timer during
dialing.
This is provided when station dials the toll restriction digits.
This is provided when the called station does not answer within ‘Normal
Call Ring Time’ of Ring Table.
This is provided when the called external user does not answer.
This is provided when stations calls vacant number.
This is provided when stations calls vacant external telephone number.
Reserved
2-108
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
INDEX
27
28
29
30
TONE NAME
Anonymous Call Restriction
Tone
Error Tone (All the other cases)
Relative Blocking
Relative Line Lock Out
Relative Do Not Disturb
Relative Absence
Relative Out of Order
External Relative Out of Order
External Relative Outgoing
Restriction
Relative Hot Desk Logout
Howling Tone
1st Ring Back Tone
2nd Ring Back Tone
31
CO Ring Back Tone
32
35
36
37
Recall Ring Back Tone
Zone Paging Call Ring Back
Tone
Command Call Ring Back
Tone
Alert Message Wait
Alert Do not Disturb
Alert Call Forward
38
Alert Absence
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Camp on Alarm
Conference Alarm
Conference Join
Call Wait Alarm
Break In Alarm
Conference Room In
Conference Room Out
46
Call Duration Restriction Alarm
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Confirm Tone
Single Error Tone
Transfer Hold Tone
Transfer Hold Tone (Station)
Camp On Hold Tone (CO)
Camp On Hold Tone (Station)
Call Wait Hold Tone (CO)
Call Wait Hold Tone (Station)
Normal Hold Tone (CO)
Normal Hold Tone (Station)
Normal Hold Tone (Attendant)
Call Park Hold Tone
Call Park Hold Tone (Station)
IC Auto Hold Tone
IC Auto Hold Tone (Attendant)
Command Call Answer Tone
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
33
34
Issue 1.0
Description
Reserved
This is provided in all error cases
This is provided when station calls the blocked station.
This is provided when station calls station hearing howling tone
This is provided when station calls station in DND.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
This is provided after error tone.
This is provided when station calls another station.
Reserved
This is provided to external caller if the incoming call is routed to the
destination. And it is provided when station calls external call through
CO line with ‘Provided Ring Back Tone’ in PGM 171.
Reserved
This is provided when station makes a paging.
This is provided when station makes a command conference group call
This is provided when station goes offhook if message is left
This is provided when station goes offhook if DND is set
This is provided when station goes offhook if Call Forward is set
This is provided when station goes offhook if pre-selected message is
set
This is provided to station if camp-on is requested.
This is provided to station if station makes conference call
This is provided when station adds conference member
This is provided to station if call-wait is requested.
Reserved
This is provided when station enters conference room
This is provided when conference member is deleted.
This is provided to station with CDR disconnection indication before the
forced disconnection.
This is confirmation tone
This is provided when stations dials wrong input during programming.
This is provided to the external user when he is transferred
This is provided to the station when he is transferred
This is provided to the external user when he is camped on
This is provided to the station when he is camped on
This is provided to the external user when he is waited
This is provided to the station when he is waited
This is provided to the external user in hold
This is provided to station in hold
Reserved
This is provided to the external user in parked
This is provided to the station in parked
This is provided when conference member is held.
Reserved
Reserved
2-109
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
INDEX
63
64
65
66
TONE NAME
R2 Normal Outgoing Tone
R2 Off-net Call Forward Tone
Wake-up Answer Tone
Service Set Tone
67
DISA Retry Tone
68
69
70
ICLID Restrict Tone
Auto Call Answer Alert Tone
VM Interaction Confirm Tone
71
Authorization Code Dial Tone
72
Tenant Dial Tone
Two-way
Record
Tone
73
Issue 1.0
Description
Reserved
Reserved
This is provided when station answers wake-up ring
This is provided when station sets programming
This is provided as DISA retry tone when external user dials wrong
digits
Reserved
This is provided when station is connected with station in handsfree
This is provided when station records his call through USB module.
This is provided when station is requested auth code dial at the call
forward assign, walking co and so on.
Reserved
Warning
This is provided to the associate party when station starts call recording
2.3.9 Board Data -PGM Codes 300-305
2.3.9.1 ISDN Board Attribute – PGM Code 300
PRIB, BRIB, E1R2 boards have some attributes which can be programmed by the Administrator.
PROCEDURE
ISDN BOARD ATTRIBUTES
1
Press the [PGM] button and dial 300.
ENTER SLOT NO (02-18)
SLOT 03 ISDN BOARD ATTR
2. Enter ISDN slot number with 2 digits.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 3)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
3. Press the Flex button 1-8 for the desired setting (refer to Table); use the dial
pad to enter the required data.
4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
Table 2.3.9.1-1 ISDN BOARD ATTRIBUTE (PGM 300)
BUTTON
1
2
3
4
5
6
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
SLOT 03 CRC CHECK
(1:EN/0:DIS): ENABLE
Enable CRC check.
0: Disable
SLOT 03 NT/TE MODE
(1:NT/:0:TE): TE
NT/TE mode – After change, the board is
0: TE
automatically restarted.
1: NT
SLOT 03/PORT1 TEI MODE
(1:AUTO/0:FIXED) :AUTO
TEI mode of BRIB Port 1
SLOT 03/PORT2 TEI MODE
(1:AUTO/0:FIXED) :AUTO
TEI mode of BRIB Port 2
SLOT 03/PORT3 TEI MODE
(1:AUTO/0:FIXED) :AUTO
TEI mode of BRIB Port 3
SLOT 03/PORT4 TEI MODE
(1:AUTO/0:FIXED) :AUTO
TEI mode of BRIB Port 4
DEFAULT
1
1: Enable
0: Fixed
0
Auto
1: Auto
0: Fixed
Auto
1: Auto
0: Fixed
Auto
1: Auto
0: Fixed
1: Auto
2-110
Auto
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.9.2 ISDN Board– Clock Priority -PGM Code 301
In the iPECS-MG System, Clock synchronization is controlled by the pre-programmed ISDN Clock
priority. The first ISDN board becomes the Clock Master board, and if some error occurs to the
Clock Master board, the next board automatically takes on the role as Clock Master. After the
original master board recovers, the Clock Master board is changed again. If there is no available
ISDN board to become a Clock Master board, the System is synchronized with the internal clock.
PROCEDURE:
ISDN BRD CLOCK PRIORITY
03 04 05 . .
.. .. ..
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 301.
2.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Slot Numbers.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
..
2.3.9.3 IPP Board Attribute – PGM Code 305
The VOIB, and VMIB boards have some attributes that can be programmed by the Administrator.
PROCEDURE
IPP BOARD ATTRIBUTES
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 305.
2.
Enter desired Slot Number with 2 digits.
3.
4.
Press the Flex 1-6 for the desired setting (refer to Table).
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
ENTER SLOT NO (02-18)
SLOT 03 IPP BOARD ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 6)
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.9.3-1 IPP BOARD ATTRIBUTE (PGM 305)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
IP ADDR(SKIP:#)
10 . 10 . 10 . 3
DESCRIPTION
IP Address of selected slot.
RANGE
DEFAULT
IP Address
10. 10. 10. #
(# : slot
number)
2
ROUTER IP ADDR(SKIP:#)
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Router IP Address of selected slot.
IP Address
0.0.0.0
3
SUBNET MASK(SKIP:#)
255 .255.255.0
Subnet Mask of selected slot.
IP Address
255.255.255.0
4
DHCP USAGE
(1:ON/:0:OFF) : OFF
DHCP Usage
0: OFF
OFF
T38 USAGE
(1:ON/:0:OFF) : OFF
T38 Usage
RTP SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
RTP Security Usage
7
VLAN
(0000-4096)
VLan
8
PRIORITY
(0-7) : 0
9
DIFFSERV
(00-63) : 00
5
6
1: ON
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
0000-4096
None
Priority
0-7
0
Diffserv
00-63
0
2-111
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.10 Networking Data – PGM Codes 320-321
2.3.10.1 Net Basic Attribute -PGM Code 320
The Network Basic Attributes are displayed and Table 2.3.10.1-1 provides general descriptive
information and input ranges.
PROCEDURE
NET BASIC ATTRIBUTE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 320.
2.
Press the Flex 1-10 for the desired setting (refer to Table).
3.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10)
Refer to Table)
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.10.1-1 NET BASIC ATTRIBUTE (PGM 320)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
0
NET ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
Enable Networking function
NET CNIP ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
The name of the calling station is sent to the called
0: OFF
System between iPECS systems. CNIP is displayed
1: ON
1: ON
1
at the called party Stations display based on the
programming.
3
4
5
NET CONP ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
Reserved for future usage.
0: OFF
NET SIGNAL METHOD
(0-1): FACILITY
Select the information element type for QSIG
0: UUS
supplementary service message.
1: FAC
NET CC RETAIN
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call
0: OFF
completion retain mode is executed. Used for
1: ON
0
1: ON
1
OFF
networking supplementary signaling type of the call
completion.
6
7
8
9
10
BLF USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Used to set Networking BLF service
TCP PORT FOR BLF
(9000-9999): 9000
TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF
UDP PORT FOR BLF
(9000-9999): 9001
UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF
DURATION OF BLF STS
(01-99): 10(sec)
Duration for sending the BLF status message to the
BLF MANAGER IP
0. 0. 0. 0
IP Address of BLF Server used only when iPECS-
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
9000-9999
9000
9000-9999
9001
01-99
10
Manager.
Manager.
BLF Server.
MG is configured with LDK/iPECS systems for Voce
Networking (Reserved).
2-112
0.0.0.0
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.10.2 NET Numbering Plan Table -PGM Code 321
PROCEDURE:
NET NUM PLAN TABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 321.
2.
Use the dial-pad to enter the 3-digit Table index (bin) number, 001 ~ 250.
3.
Press the Flex button, 1~10 for the desired setting, refer to following table.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to the following table.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
ENTER BIN NO (001-250)
001 NET NUM PLAN TBL
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10)
Refer to the following table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.10.2-1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 321)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
001 NUMBER TYPE
(0-1): NET
Select Number Type
001 NUM PLAN CODE
‘X’ means any digits can be inserted between 0-9.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0:NET
NET
1:TRANSIT
8digits
.
(Select ‘MUTE” button to input X).
3
001 CO GROUP NO
(01-72) : ..
CO Group Number
4
001 AND DIGIT
AND(Automatic Network Dialing) Digit
5
001 DIGIT REPEAT
(1:On/0:OFF) : OFF
Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP
1: ON
message or not.
0:OFF
001 DIGIT SENDING
(0-1) : OVERLAP
Select digit sending mode (Overlap or Enblock)
001 VOIP CPN INFO
PRESS FLEX (1-4)
1: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1
6
7
01-72
10 digits
1: Enblock
OFF
OVERLAP
0:Overlap
2: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2
3: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3
4: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4
8
9
10
001 BLF SYSTEM IP
0. 0. 0. 0
IP Address of BLF Server used only when iPECS is
0.0.0.0
001 BLF SYSTEM PORT
(0000-9999) : 9500
UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF
FIREWALL ROUTING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-
0: OFF
firewall IP address). If the destination system is in
1: ON
configured with LDK systems for Voice Networking
9500
Manager.
same VPN then Non-firewall IP address should be
sent. Otherwise the firewall IP address should be
sent.
ON: Send firewall IP address
OFF: Send Non-firewall(Internal) IP address
2-113
ON
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.11 TNET, Centralized Networking -PGM Codes 330-335
In a Centralized Control TNET (Transparent Networking), remote devices may be registered to a
Central MFIM (CM) and to a Local MFIM (LM). In this way, the CM maintains control of the remote
device. Should the WAN connection between a LM and CM fail (2 sec. polling error), the LM will
initiate operational control of the locally registered devices. Calls between the systems (CM & LM)
can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Fail-over operation. The
configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Fail-over operation.
2.3.11.1 TNET Basic Attributes -PGM Code 330
Each MFIM in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for TNET operation in order
to function as part of the network.
PROCEDURE:
TNET BASIC ATTRIBUTES
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 330.
2.
Press Flex 1.
3.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enable or disable TNET, Central Control networking.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 1)
TNET ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
Table 2.3.11.1-1 TNET BASIC ATTRIBUTE (PGM 330)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Enable T-NET function
TNET ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
0
1: ON
2.3.11.2 TNET CM Attributes -PGM Code 331
Each LM (Local MFIM), which is part of a Central Control Network, must be defined with the IP
Address of the CM (Central MFIM) as well as the LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM
at the time the LM registers with the CM. The port counts define the ports, which are allocated in
the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM. The number of ports defined in the
database of each LM must be equal or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM (refer to
PGM 332), in order to register properly.
PROCEDURE:
TNET CM ATTRIBUTES
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 331.
2.
Press the Flex button, 1-6 for the desired setting (refer to Table)
3.
4.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data (refer to Table).
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 6 )
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
2-114
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.11.2-1 TNET CM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 331)
BTN
1
2
3
RANGE
DEFAULT
CM REGISTER REQ
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Determines if the LM will attempt registration with
0: OFF
1
the CM; must be set to ON for proper registration.
1: ON
CM IP ADDRESS
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
This field defines the IP address of the CM that will
CM IPKTS PORT
(0001 - 9999):5588
In the TNET environment, the IP KTS protocol
be used by the LM.
IPv4
0.0.0.0
address
0001-9999
5588
000-999
000
00-99
05
00-99
02
signaling UDP port is defined; at present, this field
is not used, do not change this port number.
4
CM TOTAL PORT
(000 – 999): 011
Determines if the total number of Ports the LM will
request will be allocated by the CM for devices
attached to the LM; this value must be equal to or
less than the port count in the CM for the LM
devices.
5
6
POLLING COUNT
(00 – 99): 05
This field defines the maximum polling failures an
POLLING INTERVAL
(00 – 99): 02
This field defines the interval time between LM to
LM considers a WAN fault.
CM polling attempts.
2.3.11.3 FoPSTN Attributes -PGM Code 333
The Fail-over function allows the systems in a Centralized Control network (TNET) environment to
complete calls from System to System over a PSTN (analog or digital) line should the WAN
connection to the CM fail. A CO gateway Module must be registered to the LM for local control
and access to CO services. Users may call others in the normal manner and the call is routed
over CO facilities to the remote CM. When calls are directed to a DID line at the receiving system,
the system will select a line from the assigned CO Group and dial the Tel Number with the station
number dialed as the trailing digits.
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 333.
FoPSTN ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1–3)
2. Press the Flex 1-3 for the desired setting (refer to Table).
Flex 1: Enable or disable FO.
Flex 2: Press the [SAVE] button to reset the FO table.
Flex 3: dial the Table bin number to input data.
3. For Flex 3, use the dial-pad to enter the required data (refer to Table).
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
Table 2.3.11.3-1 FAIL-OVER ATTRIBUTES (PGM 333)
BTN
1
DISPLAY
ENABLE FoPSTN
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
DESCRIPTION
Determines if Fail-over operation is enabled or
disabled from the CM or LM.
2-115
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
-
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
2
INIT FoPSTN TABLE
PRESS [SAVE] KEY
3
FoPSTN ATTRIBUTES
ENTER BIN NO(001-200)
3-1
3-2
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines how to initialize the FO table.
FoPSTN 001 NUM PLAN
Xxxxxxxx
Station numbers associated with the remote
FoPSTN 001 CO GROUP
GRP NO (01-72): 01
Determines the CO Group of the Local System that
1-100
(MG-100
1-200
(MG-300)
Max 16
System.
will be used to place calls to the stations entered in
the FO Numbering Plan, should a WAN failure
occur.
3-3
Issue 1.0
FoPSTN 001 TEL NUMBER
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Determines the telephone number the System
1-24
(MG-100
1-72
(MG-300)
Max 10
should dial to place a call to the Stations entered in
the FO Numbering Plan, should WAN failure occur.
2.3.11.4 Board TNET Attributes -PGM Code 334
When a board or iPECS-gateway module is to be connected in a Centralized Control network
(TNET), the TNET operation of board or iPECS-gateway module can be enabled or disabled.
PROCEDURE:
BOARD TNET ATTRIBUTES
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 334.
2.
Enter Slot No.
3.
Use the dial-pad to enable or disable TNET, Central Control networking.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
ENTER SLOT NO (02-56)
SLOT 02 TNET ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
2.3.11.5 IP Phone TNET Attributes – PGM Code 335
When an IP-Phone is to be connected in a Centralized Control network (TNET), the TNET
operation of the IP-Phone can be enabled or disabled.
PROCEDURE:
IP PHONE NET ENABLE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 335.
2.
Enter Bin No of IP Phone (001-108 for iPECS MG-100, 001-324 for iPECSMG 300).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enable or disable TNET, Central Control networking.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
ENTER BIN NO(001-324)
BIN 001 TNET ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
2-116
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.12 H.323 Data – PGM Codes 360-363
The MPB incorporates a 4-channel VoIU. The VOIB8 provides up to eight (8) VoIP channels and
the VOIB24 provides up to 24 VOIP channels. These VOIP channels are used for Distributed
Networking, access to SIP or H.323 networks and for remote iPECS devices.
When VOIP channels are used for H.323 Calls, the following items should be assigned.
2.3.12.1 H.323 Routing Attributes – PGM Code 360
To make a direct H.323, the System assigns an unique number to each H323 IP-Address; direct
H.323 can be made by dialing the assigned number.
PROCEDURE:
H.323 ROUTING ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 360.
2.
Enter the CO Group Number.
3.
Enter the Prefix bin no (01-50).
4.
Press Flex 1 or 2, and dial the desired data.
5.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
ENTER CO GRP NUMBER
H.323 ROUTING ATTR
ENTER ROUTE PREFIX(01-50)
GROUP 01 ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
Table 2.3.12.1-1 H.323 ROUTING ATTR (PGM 360)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
Destination numbers associated with the H.323
01 DIGIT(1)
……..
DEST IP ADDR
0. 0. 0.
DESCRIPTION
routing system.
Destination IP address associated with the H.323
0
RANGE
DEFAULT
MAX 8
digits
0.0.0.0
routing system.
2.3.12.2 H323 Call Setup Info. -PGM Code 361
When the Standard H.323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP call, several attributes of
these channels can be assigned.
The H.323 Call Set-up mode and tunneling (H.245
Encapsulation) can be established. Also for H.323 support, a Registration, Admissions and Status
(RAS) channel can be defined. The RAS channel IP addresses (uni-cast and multi-cast) as well as
the IP port Numbering Plan and other H.323 set-up characteristics are defined.
H323 Call Set-up allows configuring the IP TOS bit for Diffserv, a commonly recognized packet
prioritization protocol. Higher priority packets are given priority in the Router or Layer 3 Switch
queue. However, they are the first to be discarded in the event of long queue delays, which may
cause excess packet loss and poor voice quality (refer to Table for a description of the features
2-117
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
and the input required).
PROCEDURE:
H.323 CALL SETUP INFO
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 361.
2.
Use the dial pad to enter the CO group number
3.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
4.
5.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired data (refer to Table).
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
ENTER CO GRP NUMBER
GROUP 02 ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-9)
Refer to Table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.12.2-1 H.323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 361)
BUTTON
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
1
SETUP MODE
(1:FAST/0:NOR): FAST
H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.323
TUNNEL MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.245
0: OFF
Encapsulation (Tunneling).
1: ON
DTMF SEND MODE
(0-2) INBAND
During a connection, DTMF digits can be sent In-
DIFF SERV
(00-63): 04
Diffserv pre-tagging for Voice packet.
2
3
Normal or Fast Start mode.
band or Out of band (H.245).
RANGE
0: Normal
DEFAULT
1
1: Fast mode
0: Inband
1
0
1: RFC2833
2:out
4
0-63
4
0: NOT USE
1
NOTE: High values may cause high packet discard
levels.
5
6
7
8
9
G.711A CODEC
(1:USE/0:N-USE): OFF
Usage of G.711A Codec Type.
G.711U CODEC
(1:USE/0:N-USE): OFF
Usage of G.711U Codec Type.
G.729 CODEC
(1:USE/0:N-USE): OFF
Usage of G.729 Codec Type.
G.723.1 CODEC
(1:USE/0:N-USE): OFF
Usage of G.723.1 Codec Type.
GK USED
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
Used to determine if Gatekeeper will be used.
1: USE
0: NOT USE
0
1: USE
0: NOT USE
0
1: USE
0: NOT USE
0
1: USE
0: OFF
0
1: ON
2.3.12.3 H.323 Incoming Attributes -PGM Code 362
To get the direct H.323, the From IP-Address and the CO Group number to be routed should be
assigned.
PROCEDURE:
H.323 INCOMING ATTR
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 362.
ENTER BIN NO(01-50)
H.323 INCOMING ATTR 01
2. Enter Bin Number.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
2-118
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
3. Press the desired Flex button and enter the appropriate data.
4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
Table 2.3.12.3-1 H.323 ROUTING ATTRIBUTES (PGM 362)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
FROM IP
0. 0.
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
IP address associated with H.323 incoming calls.
0.
DEFAULT
0.0.0.0
0
CO group number associated with H.323 incoming
INCOMING CO GRP NUM
(01-72): ..
01-72
calls.
2.3.12.4 GK Setup Info. – PGM Code 363
PROCEDURE:
GK SETUP INFO
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 363.
2.
Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table.
3.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data.
PRESS FLEX_KEY(1-9)
Table 2.3.12.4-1 GK SETUP INFO (PGM 363)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
0
GK USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Determines if MPB will be used as a GateKeeper.
LIGHT RRQ USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
The System can be set to use the simple
0: OFF
Registration Request (RRQ) message (ON) or the
1: ON
1: ON
0
full RRQ message (OFF).
3
4
5
6
7
MULTI GK IP
0. 0. 0.
Multi-cast IP address for RAS Information of
0
IP Address
0.0.0.0
0
Gatekeeper.
MULTI GK PORT
(0000-9999) : 0000
Multi-cast IP Port for RAS Information of
IP Port #
Gatekeeper.
(0-9999)
UNI GK IP
0. 0. 0.
Uni-cast IP address for RAS Information of
0
IP Address
0.0.0.0
1719
Gatekeeper.
UNI GK PORT
(0000-9999) : 1719
Uni-cast IP Port for RAS Information of
IP Port #
Gatekeeper.
(0-9999)
KEEP ALIVE TIME(SEC)
(0001-1000): 0120
The System will cycle a polling message at the
1-1000
culmination of the KEEP ALIVE TIME (sec.) to
verify the status of the connection.
8
9
GATEWAY PREFIX
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Numbering Plan for Calling Number in RAS
H.323 GATEWAY ID
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
The GateKeeper ID (Keyset Admin=up to 24 digits
Setup.
can be checked or programmed).
2-119
MAX 25
Digits
MAX 129
Digits
120
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13 Gain & Cadence Control – PGM Codes 400-440
2.3.13.1 DKT RX Gain -PGM Code 400
The RX gain of DKT can be adjusted (refer to Table for setting values).
PROCEDURE:
DKT RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 400.
2.
3.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
4.
Table 2.3.14.1-1 DKT RX GAIN (PGM 400)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-DKT:26(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DKT RX gain from DKT
0-63
26
2
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-SLT:22(00-63)
DKT RX gain from SLT
0-63
22
3
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-DECT:26(00-63)
DKT RX gain from DECT
0-63
26
4
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-IPDEV:26(00-63)
DKT RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
26
5
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-ACO:26(00-63)
DKT RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
26
6
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-DCO:33(00-63)
DKT RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
33
7
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-VMIB:29(00-63)
DKT RX gain from VMIB
0-63
29
8
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-DTMF:08(00-63)
DKT RX gain from DTMF
0-63
08
9
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-TONE:32(00-63)
DKT RX gain from TONE
0-63
32
10
DKT RX GAIN
DKT<-MUSIC:29(00-3)
DKT RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
29
2-120
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.2 SLT RX Gain – PGM Code 401
The RX gain of SLT can be adjusted (refer to Table for setting values).
PROCEDURE:
SLT RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 401.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.13.2-1 SLT RX GAIN (PGM 401)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-DKT:32(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SLT RX gain from DKT
0-63
32
2
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-SLT:32(00-63)
SLT RX gain from SLT
0-63
32
3
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-DECT:32(00-63)
SLT RX gain from DECT
0-63
32
4
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-IPDEV:33(00-63)
SLT RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
33
5
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-ACO:32(00-63)
SLT RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
32
6
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-DCO:44(00-63)
SLT RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
44
7
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-VMIB:40(00-63)
SLT RX gain from VMIB
0-63
40
8
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-DTMF:28(00-63)
SLT RX gain from DTMF
0-63
28
9
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-TONE:38(00-63)
SLT RX gain from TONE
0-63
38
10
SLT RX GAIN
SLT<-MUSIC:40(00-3)
SLT RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
40
2-121
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.3 DECT RX Gain – PGM Code 402
The RX gain of DECT can be adjusted (refer to Table for setting values).
PROCEDURE:
DECT RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 402.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.13.3-1 DECT RX GAIN (PGM 402)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-DKT:26(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DECT RX gain from DKT
0-63
26
2
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-SLT:33(00-63)
DECT RX gain from SLT
0-63
33
3
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-DECT:26(00-63)
DECT RX gain from DECT
0-63
26
4
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-IPDEV:26(00-63)
DECT RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
26
5
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-ACO:38(00-63)
DECT RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
38
6
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-DCO:33(00-63)
DECT RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
33
7
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-VMIB:29(00-63)
DECT RX gain from VMIB
0-63
29
8
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-DTMF:08(00-63)
DECT RX gain from DTMF
0-63
8
9
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-TONE:37(00-63)
DECT RX gain from TONE
0-63
37
10
DECT RX GAIN
DECT<-MUSIC:29(00-3)
DECT RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
29
2-122
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.4 IP-PHONE RX Gain – PGM Code 403
The RX gain of IP-Phone can be adjusted.
PROCEDURE:
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 403.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table.
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.13.4-1 IP-PHONE RX GAIN (PGM 403)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-DKT:26(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
IP-PHONE RX gain from DKT
0-63
26
2
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-SLT:33(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from SLT
0-63
33
3
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-DECT:26(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from DECT
0-63
26
4
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-IPDEV:26(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from IP-PHONE
0-63
26
5
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-ACO:33(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
33
6
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-DCO:33(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
33
7
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-VMIB:29(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from VMIB
0-63
29
8
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-DTMF:08(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from DTMF
0-63
8
9
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-TONE:32(00-63)
IP-PHONE RX gain from TONE
0-63
32
10
IP-PHONE RX GAIN
IPDEV<-MUSIC:29(00-3)
IP-PHONE RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
29
2-123
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.5 ANALOG CO RX Gain – PGM Code 404
The RX gain of Analog CO can be adjusted.
PROCEDURE:
ACO RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 404.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.13.5-1 ACO RX GAIN (PGM 404)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-DKT:40(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ACO RX gain from DKT
0-63
40
2
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-SLT:32(00-63)
ACO RX gain from SLT
0-63
32
3
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-DECT:31(00-63)
ACO RX gain from DECT
0-63
31
4
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-IPDEV:33(00-63)
ACO RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
33
5
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-ACO:32(00-63)
ACO RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
32
6
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-DCO:38(00-63)
ACO RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
38
7
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-VMIB:37(00-63)
ACO RX gain from VMIB
0-63
37
8
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-DTMF:42(00-63)
ACO RX gain from DTMF
0-63
42
9
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-TONE:37(00-63)
ACO RX gain from TONE
0-63
37
10
ACO RX GAIN
ACO<-MUSIC:37(00-3)
ACO RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
37
2-124
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.6 DIGITAL CO RX Gain -PGM Code 405
The RX gain of Digital CO can be adjusted.
PROCEDURE:
DCO RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 404.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table.)
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.14.6-1 DCO RX GAIN (PGM 405)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-DKT:26(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DCO RX gain from DKT
0-63
26
2
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-SLT:26(00-63)
DCO RX gain from SLT
0-63
26
3
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-DECT:26(00-63)
DCO RX gain from DECT
0-63
26
4
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-IPDEV:33(00-63)
DCO RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
33
5
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-ACO:15(00-63)
DCO RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
15
6
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-DCO:32(00-63)
DCO RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
32
7
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-VMIB:32(00-63)
DCO RX gain from VMIB
0-63
32
8
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-DTMF:32(00-63)
DCO RX gain from DTMF
0-63
32
9
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-TONE:32(00-63)
DCO RX gain from TONE
0-63
32
10
DCO RX GAIN
DCO<-MUSIC:32(00-3)
DCO RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
32
2-125
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.7 VMIB RX Gain – PGM Code 406
The RX gain of VMIB can be adjusted.
PROCEDURE:
VMIB RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 406.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.14.7-1 VMIB RX GAIN (PGM 406)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-DKT:26(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VMIB RX gain from DKT
0-63
26
2
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-SLT:29(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from SLT
0-63
29
3
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-DECT:23(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from DECT
0-63
23
4
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-IPDEV:32(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
32
5
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-ACO:32(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
32
6
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-DCO:32(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
32
7
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-VMIB:32(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from VMIB
0-63
32
8
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-DTMF:32(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from DTMF
0-63
32
9
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-TONE:32(00-63)
VMIB RX gain from TONE
0-63
32
10
VMIB RX GAIN
VMIB<-MUSIC:32(00-3)
VMIB RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
32
2-126
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.8 External Page RX Gain – PGM Code 407
The RX gain of External Page can be adjusted.
PROCEDURE:
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 407.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.14.8-1 External PAGE RX GAIN (PGM 407)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-DKT:26(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
External PAGE RX gain from DKT
0-63
26
2
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-SLT:26(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from SLT
0-63
26
3
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-DECT:26(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from DECT
0-63
26
4
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-IPDEV:32(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from IPDEV
0-63
32
5
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-ACO:28(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from Analog CO
0-63
28
6
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-DCO:37(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from Digital CO
0-63
37
7
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-VMIB:37(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from VMIB
0-63
37
8
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-DTMF:32(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from DTMF
0-63
32
9
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-TONE:32(00-63)
External PAGE RX gain from TONE
0-63
32
10
EXT PAGE RX GAIN
E.PAGE<-MUSIC:32(00-3)
External PAGE RX gain from MUSIC
0-63
32
2-127
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.13.9 DSP RX Gain – PGM Code 415
The RX gain of DSP can be adjusted (refer to Table for setting values).
PROCEDURE:
DSP RX GAIN
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 415.
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table).
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-8)
Table 2.3.14.9-1 DSP RX GAIN (PGM 415)
BTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-DTMF/A:32(00-63)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DSP RX gain from DTMF(A)
0-63
32
2
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-DTMF/D:32(00-63)
DSP RX gain from DTMF(D)
0-63
32
3
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-CPT:32(00-63)
DSP RX gain from CPT
0-63
32
4
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-CID/FSK:32(00-63)
DSP RX gain from CID(FSK)
0-63
32
5
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-CID/D:32(00-63)
DSP RX gain from CID(DTMF)
0-63
32
6
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-CID/RSU:36(00-63)
DSP RX gain from RCID
0-63
36
7
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-SMS/TRK:32(00-63)
DSP RX gain from SMS(ACO)
0-63
32
8
DSP RX GAIN
DSP<-SMS/SLT:32(00-63)
DSP RX gain from SMS(SLT)
0-63
32
2-128
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.13.10
Issue 1.0
RTP RX Gain -PGM Codes 420-426
Each device can adjust its own RTP RX gain from other devices (refer to Table 2.3.14.10-1-7 for
RTP RX gain adjustment of devices).
PROCEDURE:
1.
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
-
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
2.
3.
4.
Press the [PGM] button and dial.
420: SLTM RX RTP GAIN
421: DTIM(HS) RX RTP GAIN
422: DTIM(HF) RX RTP GAIN
423: IP-Phone(HS) RX RTP GAIN
424: IP-Phone(HF) RX RTP GAIN
425: WIT RX RTP GAIN
426: VOIB RX RTP GAIN
Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table 2.3.14.9-1 to 7).
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table 2.3.14.9-1 to 7).
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.13.1010-1 SLTM RX RTP GAIN (PGM 420)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
SLTM RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
SLTM RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
SLTM RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
SLTM RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
SLTM RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-WIT:34(00-63)
SLTM RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-VOIB:34(00-63)
SLTM RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
DTIM(HS) RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
1
SLTM RX RTP GAIN
SLTM<-SLTM:34(00-63)
2
Table 2.3.13.1010-2 DTIM(HS) RX RTP GAIN (PGM 421)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-SLTM:34(00-63)
2-129
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
2
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-DTIM-HS:34(0063)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DTIM(HS) RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-DTIM-HF:34(0063)
DTIM(HS) RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-WIT:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS<-VOIB:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Table 2.3.13.1010-3 DTIM(HF) RX RTP GAIN (PGM 422)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-SLTM:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
2
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-DTIM-HS:34(0063)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-DTIM-HF:34(0063)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-WIT:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF<-VOIB:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
2-130
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.13.1010-4 IP-PHONE(HS) RX RTP GAIN (PGM 423)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
IP-PHONE(HS) RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-WIT:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-VOIB:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
1
LIP RX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS<-SLTM:34(00-63)
2
Table 2.3.13.1010-5 IP-PHONE(HF) RX RTP GAIN (PGM 424)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
IP-PHONE(HF) RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-WIT:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-VOIB:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
1
LIP RX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF<-SLTM:34(00-63)
2
2-131
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.13.1010-6 WIT RX RTP GAIN (PGM 425)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
WIT RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
WIT RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
WIT RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
WIT RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
WIT RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-WIT:34(00-63)
WIT RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-VOIB:34(00-63)
WIT RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
1
WIT RX RTP GAIN
WIT<-SLTM:34(00-63)
2
Table 2.3.13.1010-7 VOIB RX RTP GAIN (PGM 426)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
VOIB RX gain from STLM
0-63
34
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
VOIB RX gain from DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
VOIB RX gain from DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-LIP-HS:34(00-63)
VOIB RX gain from IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-LIP-HF:34(00-63)
VOIB RX gain from IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-WIT:34(00-63)
VOIB RX gain from WIT
0-63
34
7
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-VOIB:34(00-63)
VOIB RX gain from VOIB
0-63
34
1
VOIB RX RTP GAIN
VOIB<-SLTM:34(00-63)
2
2-132
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.13.11
Issue 1.0
RTP TX Gain -PGM Codes 430-436
Each device can adjust its own RTP TX gain to another device (refer to Table 2.3.14.10-1 to 7 for
RTP TX gain adjustment of devices.
PROCEDURE:
1.
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
-
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7)
Press the [PGM] button and dial.
430: SLTM TX RTP GAIN
431: DTIM(HS) TX RTP GAIN
432: DTIM(HF) TX RTP GAIN
433: IP-Phone(HS) TX RTP GAIN
434: IP-Phone(HF) TX RTP GAIN
435: WIT TX RTP GAIN
436: VOIB TX RTP GAIN
2.
Press the desired Flex button (refer to table 2.3.14.10-1 to 7)
3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table 2.3.14.10-1 to 7).
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.13.111-1 SLTM TX RTP GAIN (PGM 430)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
SLTM TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
SLTM TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
SLTM TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
SLTM TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
SLTM TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->WIT:34(00-63)
SLTM TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->VOIB:34(00-63)
SLTM TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
DTIM(HS) TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
1
SLTM TX RTP GAIN
SLTM->SLTM:34(00-63)
2
Table 2.3.13.11-2 DTIM(HS) TX RTP GAIN (PGM 431)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->SLTM:34(00-63)
2-133
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
Issue 1.0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
2
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->DTIM-HS:34(0063)
DTIM(HS) TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->DTIM-HF:34(0063)
DTIM(HS) TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->WIT:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN
DTIM-HS->VOIB:34(00-63)
DTIM(HS) TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Table 2.3.13.11-3 DTIM(HF) TX RTP GAIN (PGM 432)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
1
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->SLTM:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
2
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->DTIM-HS:34(0063)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->DTIM-HF:34(0063)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->WIT:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
DTIM TX HF RTP GAIN
DTIM-HF->VOIB:34(00-63)
DTIM(HF) TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
2-134
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.13.11-4 IP-PHONE(HS) TX RTP GAIN (PGM 433)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
IP-PHONE(HS) TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->WIT:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->VOIB:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
1
LIP TX HS RTP GAIN
LIP-HS->SLTM:34(00-63)
2
Table 2.3.13.111-5 IP-PHONE(HF) TX RTP GAIN (PGM 434)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
IP-PHONE(HF) TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN

LIP-HF->DTIMHS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF->DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF->WIT:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF->VOIB:34(00-63)
IP-PHONE (HF) TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
1
LIP TX HF RTP GAIN
LIP-HF->SLTM:34(00-63)
2
2-135
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Table 2.3.13.11-6 WIT TX RTP GAIN (PGM 435)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
WIT TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
WIT TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
WIT TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
WIT TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
WIT TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->WIT:34(00-63)
WIT TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->VOIB:34(00-63)
WIT TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
1
WIT TX RTP GAIN
WIT->SLTM:34(00-63)
2
Table 2.3.13.11-7 VOIB TX RTP GAIN (PGM 436)
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
VOIB TX gain to STLM
0-63
34
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->DTIM-HS:34(00-63)
VOIB TX gain to DTIM(HS)
0-63
34
3
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->DTIM-HF:34(00-63)
VOIB TX gain to DTIM(HF)
0-63
34
4
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->LIP-HS:34(00-63)
VOIB TX gain to IP-PHONE(HS)
0-63
34
5
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->LIP-HF:34(00-63)
VOIB TX gain to IP-PHONE(HF)
0-63
34
6
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->WIT:34(00-63)
VOIB TX gain to WIT
0-63
34
7
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->VOIB:34(00-63)
VOIB TX gain to VOIB
0-63
34
1
VOIB TX RTP GAIN
VOIB->SLTM:34(00-63)
2
2-136
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.13.12
Issue 1.0
SLT Ring Cadence – PGM Code 440
SLT Ring Cadence can be adjusted (refer to Table for attribute values).
PROCEDURE:
SLT RING CADENCE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 440
2.
Press the desired Flex button 1 or 2:
- Flex 1: Configures SLT CO Ring cadence
- Flex 2: Configures SLT ICM Ring cadence
For Flex 1, to configure SLT CO Ring cadence, select Flex button (1-10)
for the attribute (refer to Table 2.3.14.11-1).
F1:CO RING F2:ICM RING
3.
SLT CO RING CADENCE
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
SLT ICM RING CADENCE
4.
For Flex button 2, to configure SLT ICM Ring cadence, select Flex button
(1-10) for the attribute (refer to Table 2.3.14.11-2).
5.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to
Table 2.3.14.11-1 and -2).
6.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Table 2.3.13.12-1 SLT CO RING CADENCE
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0-255
255
100 msec
CO RING REPEAT
(000-255): 255
Determines the number of times the SLT CO ring will
CO RING TIME UNIT
(0:10/ 1:100):100(msec)
Determines the duration in msec. for ON/OFF ring
0:10 msec,
time.
1:100 msec
3
CO RING 1 ON
(000-255): 010
Determines the first ON ring duration.
0-255
010
4
CO RING 1 OFF
(000-255): 040
Determines the first OFF ring duration.
0-255
040
5
CO RING 2 ON
(000-255): 000
Determines the second ON ring duration.
0-255
000
6
CO RING 2 OFF
(000-255): 000
Determines the second OFF ring duration.
0-255
000
7
CO RING 3 ON
(000-255): 000
Determines the third ON ring duration.
0-255
000
8
CO RING 3 OFF
(000-255): 000
Determines the third OFF ring duration.
0-255
000
9
CO RING 4 ON
(000-255): 000
Determines the forth ON ring duration.
0-255
000
2
repeat; 255 means infinite repetition.
2-137
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Determines forth OFF ring duration.
CO RING 4 OFF
(000-255): 000
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0-255
000
RANGE
DEFAULT
0-255
255
100 msec
Table 2.3.13.12-2 SLT ICM RING CADENCE
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
ICM RING REPEAT
(000-255) : 255
Determines the number of times the SLT ICM ring will
ICM RING TIME UNIT
(0:10/ 1:100):100(msec)
Determines the duration in msec. for ON/OFF ring
0:10 msec,
time.
1:100 msec
3
ICM RING 1 ON
(000-255): 006
Define first ON ring duration.
0-255
006
4
ICM RING 1 OFF
(000-255): 002
Define first OFF ring duration.
0-255
002
5
ICM RING 2 ON
(000-255): 002
Define second ON ring duration.
0-255
002
6
ICM RING 2 OFF
(000-255): 040
Define second OFF ring duration.
0-255
040
7
ICM RING 3 ON
(000-255): 000
Define third ON ring duration.
0-255
000
8
ICM RING 3 OFF
(000-255): 000
Define third OFF ring duration.
0-255
000
9
ICM RING 4 ON
(000-255): 000
Define forth ON ring duration.
0-255
000
10
ICM RING 4 OFF
(000-255): 000
Define forth OFF ring duration.
0-255
000
2
repeat; 255 means infinite repetition.
2-138
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
2.3.13.13
Issue 1.0
ACNR Tone Cadence – PGM Code 441
ACNR Tone Cadence can be adjusted (refer to Table for attribute values).
PROCEDURE:
1.
ACNR TONE CADENCE
Press the [PGM] button and dial 441
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-5)
2. Press the desired Flex button 1-5 (refer to Table).
Flex 1: Tone Cadence ON
Flex 2: Tone Cadence OFF
3. Use the dial-pad to enter desired data.
DIAL TONE CADENCE
F1 : ON
F2 : OFF
DIAL TONE ON
(000 – 255) : 060
4.
Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry.
Table 2.3.14.13-1 ACNR TONE CADENCE
BTN
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
1
DIAL TONE CADENCE
F1:ON(060)
F2:OFF(000)
ACNR Dial Tone Cadence
0-255
2
RINGBACK TONE CADENCE
F1:ON(050)
F2:OFF(100)
ACNR Ringback Tone Cadence
0-255
3
BUSY TONE CADENCE
F1:ON(030)
F2:OFF(030)
ACNR Busy Tone Cadence
0-255
4
ERROR TONE CADENCE
F1:ON(012)
F2:OFF(012)
ACNR Error Tone Cadence
0-255
5
LCR DIAL TONE CADENCE
F1:ON(070)
F2:OFF(000)
ACNR LCR Tone Cadence
0-255
2-139
DEFAULT
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
2.3.14 DB Initialization – PGM Code 499
Programmed database can be initialized selectively to default
PROCEDURE:
INITIALIZE DATABASE
1.
Press the [PGM] button and dial 499.
2.
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute (refer to Table).
3.
4.
Use the dial pad to enter the required range if needed.
Press the [SAVE] button to initialize the selected database.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-13)
See following Table
DISPLAY
Table 2.3.15.1-1 INITIALIZE DATABASE (PGM 499)
BTN
DISPLAY
1
INIT ALL DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
2
SYSTEM RESET
PRESS [SAVE] TO RESET
3
INIT STATION DATA
ENTER STA RANGE
4
5
REMARK
RANGE
Initialize all databases.
-
Restart the System.
-
Initializes Station-based data (Except
Desired station range
flexible button data).
(initialize whole data when no range)
INIT FLEX BTN DATA
ENTER STA RANGE
Initializes flexible button data
INIT COL DATA
ENTER COL RANGE
Initializes CO line-based data.
Desired station range
(initialize whole data when no range)
Desired CO line range
(initialize whole data when no range)
6
INIT STA GRP DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes Station Group-based data.
7
INIT SYSTEM DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes System-based data.
8
INIT SMDR DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes SMDR data.
9
INIT SYSTEM TIMER
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes System Timers.
10
INIT TABLE DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes Table-based data.
11
INIT TENANT DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes Tenant Group-based data.
12
INIT NETWORKING DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes Networking data.
13
INIT SIP DATA
PRESS [SAVE] TO INIT
Initializes SIP data.
2-140
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
APPENDIX A – DATABASE INDEX
The Database index (Table A-1), is divided into groups of “PROGRAMS” based on specific characteristics
associated with the data such as, Numbering Plans, Station oriented database entries or CO Line
oriented values. These groupings are identified as the Program Group in Web Admin. mode. The
individual PROGRAMS are identified in the Table with the ADMIN STATION PROGRAM CODE (PGM Code)
and a corresponding Web sub-menu and description.
TABLE A-1 DATABASE INDEX
PROGRAM GROUP
Pre-Programmed
Data
NUMBERING PLAN
DATA
STATION PORT
DATA
STATION NUMBER
DATA
CO LINE DATA
PGM CODE
100
102
103
104
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
120
121
122
123
124
126
Web only
130
131
132
133
134
135
137
138
142
143
145
146
150
151
152
160
161
162
163
165
PGM NAME
Location Program
Slot Assignment
Logical Slot Assignment
DECT/IP/SIP MAX Port
IP-Phone/Phontage Registration
DTIM/SLTM Registration
IP Address Plan
System Info Display
Numbering Plan Type
System Numbering Plan
Flexible Station Number
Feature Numbering Plan
CO Group Access Code
Station Group Number
Station Type Information
Station Port Attribute 1
Station Port Attribute 2
Station Port Attribute 3
Station Port Attribute 4
Station Flexible Button Attribute
Station DN Number
Station Number Attribute 1
Station Number Attribute 2
Station Number Attribute 3
Station Number Attribute 4
Station CLI Attribute
Station COS Attribute
Station Auto Dial Attribute
Station Preset Call Forward
Station Forward Set
Station VMIB Attribute
Station Mobile Extension
Station CO Group Access
Station Page Group Access
Command Call Group Access
CO Line Attribute 1
CO Line Attribute 2
CO Line Attribute 3
CO CID Attribute
Incoming CO Attribute 1
A-1
WEB SUB-MENU
Location Program
Slot Assignment
Logical Slot Assignment
DECT/IP/SIP MAX Port
IP-Phone/Phontage Registration
DTIM/SLTM Registration
IP Address Plan
Numbering Plan Type
System Numbering Plan
Flexible Station Number
Feature Numbering Plan
Station Type
Station Port Attribute
Flexible Button Assignment
CTI IP Address
Station DN Assignment
Station DN Attribute
COS Assignment
Auto Dial Attribute
Preset Call Forward
Call Forward
VMIB Attribute
Mobile Extension Attribute
CO/IP Group Access
Page Group Access
Command Group Access
CO Line Attribute
Incoming CO Attribute
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
PROGRAM GROUP
STATION GROUP
DATA
SYSTEM DATA
TABLE DATA
PGM CODE
PGM NAME
166
167
168
169
170
171
173
174
175
177
179
180
181
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
208
209
210
211
220
Incoming CO Attribute 2
CO Ring Assignment
Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attribute
Incoming CO Alternative Destination
Outgoing CO Attribute 1
Outgoing CO Attribute 2
Outgoing CO Alternative Destination
CO Inter Digit Timer
DTMF Sending Delay Timer
CO COS Assignment
CO to CO Attribute
CO Group Access Code Attribute
Alternative Ring Table
Station Group Assign
Greeting/Queuing Attribute
Station Group Attribute
VM Group Attribute
Pickup group Index
Page group Index
Command Conference Group Index
PTT Group Index
Interphone Group Index
Pilot Hunt Group Index
Pilot Hunt Group Forward
System Timer 1
221
System Timer 2
222
223
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
240
241
242
Web only
Web only
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
System Timer 3
System Attribute
System Password
System Alarm Attribute
External Control Contact
Music Assign
RS232 Port Setting
Print Port Selection
SMDR Attribute
Set System Time/Date
LED Color/Flash Rate
PPP Attribute
Mobile Attribute
One-Digit Service
Dummy Dial Tone Digit
Executive/Secretary Assign
Executive/ Executive Access
Toll Exception Table
Digit Conversion Table
Digit Conversion Option
Time Table Attribute
Weekly Time Table
LCR Time Table Attribute
Holiday Time Table
A-2
Issue 1.0
WEB SUB-MENU
CO Ring Assignment
Normal/DISA CO Attribute
Incoming CO Alternative
Outgoing CO Attribute
Outgoing CO Alternative
CO Inter Digit Timer
DTMF Send Interval
CO COS Assignment
CO-to-CO Attribute
CO Group Access Code
Alternative Ring Table
Station Group Assign
Station Group Attribute
Voice Mail Group
Call Pick-up Group
Page Group
Command Conference Group
PTT Group
Interphone Group
Pilot Hunt Group
System Timer
System Attribute
System Password
Alarm Attribute
External Control Contact
Music Source
RS232 Setting
Serial Port Selection
SMDR Attribute
System Time/Date
LED Flashing Rate
PPP Attribute
Mobile Attribute
Intercom Busy Table
Dial Tone Digit Table
Executive/Secretary Assign
Executive Access
PPTP Attribute
Web Access Authorization
Toll Exception Table
Digit Conversion Table
System Time Table
LCR Time Table
Holiday Time Table
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
PROGRAM GROUP
TENANT DATA
PGM CODE
257
258
259
260
262
263
Web only
Web only
Web only
269
270
271
272
275
276
BOARD DATA
VOICE NETWORK
DATA
T-NET Data
H.323 DATA
SIP CO DATA
SIP STATION DATA
ZONE DATA
SNMP DATA
277
280
281
283
284
285
286
287
288
290
300
301
305
320
321
330
331
333
334
335
360
361
362
363
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Issue 1.0
PGM NAME
WEB SUB-MENU
System Speed Dial Table
Emergency Code Table
Announcement Table
Custom Call Routing
ICLID Table
CLI Conversion Table
System Speed Dial
Emergency Code Table
Announcement Table
CCR Table
ICLID Table
CLI Conversion Table
Tone Frequency/Cadence
Ring Table
Ring Frequency/Cadence
Voice Mail Dial Table
Attendant Group Assignment
Attendant Group Attribute
Attendant Group Assignment
Attendant Group Greeting/Queuing
Attribute
Attendant Group Attribute
Night Attendant Group Assignment
Night Attendant Group
Greeting/Queuing Attribute
Night Attendant Group Attribute
Tenant Attribute 1
Tenant Attribute 2
Tenant Group Access
Call Restriction Restriction 1
Call Restriction Restriction 2
Local Call Prefix Table
Long Call Prefix Table
International Call Prefix Table
Tenant Tone Table
ISDN Board Attribute
ISDN Clock Priority
VOIB/VMIB Board Attribute
Network Attributes
Network Numbering
TNET Basic Attributes
TNET CM Attributes
FoPSTN Attributes
Board T-Net Attributes
IP Phone T-Net Enable
H.323 Routing Attribute
H.323 Call Setup Attribute
H.323 Incoming Attribute
GK Setup Info
A-3
Night Attendant Group Assignment
Night Attendant Group Attribute
Tenant Attribute
Tenant Group Access
CO Call Restriction
Local Call Prefix Table
Long Call Prefix Table
International Call Prefix Table
Tone Table
ISDN Board Attribute
ISDN Clock Priority
VOIB/VMIB Board Attribute
Network Attributes
Network Numbering
TNET Attributes
CM Attributes
FoPSTN Attribute
T-Net Board Attribute
IP-Phone T-Net Attribute
H.323 Routing Attribute
H.323 Call Attribute
H.323 Incoming Attribute
GK Attribute
SIP CO Basic Registration
SIP CO Additional Registration
SIP CO Codec
SIP CO User ID Table
SIP Station Basic Registration
SIP Station Additional Registration
SIP Station Service
Zone Attribute
Zone RTP Relay Group
Inter Zone Attribute
SNMP Data
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
PROGRAM GROUP
DECT DATA
GREEN MODE
NATION SPECIFIC
INITIALIZATION
PGM CODE
Web only
491
Web only
Web only
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
415
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
440
441
499
PGM NAME
DECT Attribute
DKT RX Gain
SLT RX Gain
DECT RX Gain
IP-Phone RX Gain
ACO RX Gain
DCO RX Gain
VMIB RX Gain
External Page RX Gain
DSP RX Gain
SLTM RX RTP Gain
DTIM RX Handset RTP Gain
DTIM RX Handsfree RTP Gain
LIP RX Handset RTP Gain
LIP RX Handsfree RTP Gain
WIT RX RTP Gain
VOIB RX RTP Gain
SLT Ring Cadence
ACNR Tone Cadence
Initialization
A-4
Issue 1.0
WEB SUB-MENU
DECT Registration
DECT Attribute
Green Mode Activation
Green Mode Time Setting
TDM Gain
DSP Gain
RTP Gain
SLT Ring Cadence
ACNR Tone Cadence
Initialization
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
APPENDIX B – DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN
The Default Numbering Plan can be selected from 1 of 6 Base Numbering Plans (Tables B-1 and B-2).
The Number Plan can be changed using the Numbering Plan Programs, PROGRAM CODES 110 to 114.
TABLE B-1a BASIC NUMBER
NO
1
NAME
NUM SET 1
NUM SET 2
NUM SET 3
Station Number
100 ~ 473
100 ~ 699
1000 ~ 1647
1,
0,
9,
CO Group Access Code
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
*801 ~ *872(MG-300)
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
*801 ~ *824(MG-100)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
*620 ~ *669(MG-300)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
*620 ~ *639(MG-100)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
2
3
Station Group Number
REMARK
TABLE B-1b BASIC NUMBER
NO
NAME
NUM SET 4
NUM SET 5
NUM SET 6
1
Station Number
7000 ~ 7647
2000 ~ 2647
2000 ~ 2647
1,
0,
0,
CO Group Access Code
401 ~ 472(MG-300)
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
2
3
Station Group Number
REMARK
401 ~ 424(MG-100)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
*620 ~ *669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
*620 ~ *639(MG-100)
TABLE B-2a FEATURE CODE
NO
FEATURE NAME
NUM SET 1
NUM SET 2
NUM SET 3
1
Attendant Call
0
*9
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
*571
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
*572
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
*573
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
*574
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
*575
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
*576
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
*577
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
*578
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
*579
579
11
Internal Page
543
*543
543
REMARK
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group #
12
Personal VM Page
544
*544
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
*545
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
*546
546
15
Internal Page Answer (Meet-Me
547
*547
547
548
*548
548
Page)
16
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
*549
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
*554
554
554 + Type + Destination
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
*514
514
514 + Type + Destination
C-1
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
NO
FEATURE NAME
NUM SET 1
NUM SET 2
NUM SET 3
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
*515
515
21
DND Status Change
516
*516
516
22
DND Delete
517
*517
517
23
Account Code
550
*550
550
24
CO Flash
551
*551
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
*552
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
*553
553
27
Speed Dial
555
*555
555
28
MWI Register
556
*556
556
29
MWI Answer
557
*557
557
30
MWI Cancel
559
*559
559
31
Call Back Register
518
*518
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
*519
519
33
Group Call Pickup
566
*566
566
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
*7
7
35
Walking COS
520
*520
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
*541
541
REMARK
541 + xx
Xx: Parking Location
(00 ~ 49)
37
PGM Mode Access
521
*521
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
*522
522
39
VMIB Access
523
*523
523
40
AME Access
524
*524
524
41
CO Line Access
88
*88
88
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
(001 ~ 200 : MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG-100)
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
*5#8
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
*5#9
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
*5#0
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
*5##
5##
46
PTT Group Access
538
*538
538
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group #
*: Log out
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
*525
525
48
Name Register
526
*526
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
*527
527
527 + Conf. Room #
50
Delete Conf Room
528
*528
528
528 + Conf. Room #
51
Wake Up Register
529
*529
529
529 + HH:MM
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
*530
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
*531
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
*532
532
55
Password Change
533
*533
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
*534
534
57
Call Wait Request
535
*535
535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
*536
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
*537
537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
*582
582
C-2
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
NO
Issue 1.0
FEATURE NAME
NUM SET 1
NUM SET 2
NUM SET 3
61
CLIR Access
583
*583
583
62
COLR Access
584
*584
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
*585
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
*581
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
*580
580
66
Intrude Register
589
*589
589
67
Camp On Register
590
*590
590
68
OHVO Register
591
*591
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
*592
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
*593
593
71
Mobile Access
594
*594
594
72
CCR Access
670
*670
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
*671
671
74
System Hold
560
*560
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
*8**
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
*675
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
*678
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
679
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
*680
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
*565
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
564
*564
564
82
Door Open
#*1
#*1
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
##*
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
*586
586
85
Universal Answer
587
*587
587
86
USB Call Record
588
*588
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
*681
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
*682
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
*683
683
90
Loop Key
684
*684
684
91
Call Log
685
*685
685
NO
FEATURE NAME
NUM SET 4
NUM SET 5
NUM SET 6
1
Attendant Call
0
9
#9
2
Conference Room 1
571
571
*571
3
Conference Room 2
572
572
*572
4
Conference Room 3
573
573
*573
5
Conference Room 4
574
574
*574
6
Conference Room 5
575
575
*575
7
Conference Room 6
576
576
*576
8
Conference Room 7
577
577
*577
REMARK
TABLE B-2b FEATURE CODE
9
Conference Room 8
578
578
*578
10
Conference Room 9
579
579
*579
11
Internal Page
543
543
*543
REMARK
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group #
C-3
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
NO
Issue 1.0
FEATURE NAME
NUM SET 4
NUM SET 5
NUM SET 6
12
Personal VM Page
544
544
*544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
545
*545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
546
*546
15
Internal Page Answer (Meet-Me
547
547
*547
REMARK
Page)
16
External Page
548
548
*548
17
Internal-External Page All
549
549
*549
18
Call Forward Register
554
554
*554
554 + Type + Destination
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
514
*514
514 + Type + Destination
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
515
*515
21
DND Status Change
516
516
*516
22
DND Delete
517
517
*517
23
Account Code
550
550
*550
24
CO Flash
551
551
*551
25
Last Number Redial
552
552
*552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
553
*553
27
Speed Dial
555
555
*555
28
MWI Register
557
556
*556
29
MWI Answer
558
557
*557
30
MWI Cancel
559
559
*559
31
Call Back Register
518
518
*518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
519
*519
33
Group Call Pickup
**
566
*566
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
7
*7
35
Walking COS
520
520
*520
36
Call Parking Location
541
541
*541
541 + xx
Xx: Parking Location
(00 ~ 49)
37
PGM Mode Access
521
521
*521
38
Two-Way Record
522
522
*522
39
VMIB Access
523
523
*523
40
AME Access
524
524
*524
41
CO Line Access
88
88
88
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
(001 ~ 200 : MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG-100)
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
*8
*5#8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
*9
*5#9
44
MCID Request
*0
*0
*5#0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
5##
*5##
46
PTT Group Access
538
538
*538
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group #
*: Log out
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
525
*525
48
Name Register
526
526
*526
49
Create Conf Room
527
527
*527
527 + Conf. Room #
50
Delete Conf Room
528
528
*528
528 + Conf. Room #
51
Wake Up Register
529
529
*529
529 + HH:MM
C-4
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
NO
Issue 1.0
FEATURE NAME
NUM SET 4
NUM SET 5
NUM SET 6
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
530
*530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
531
*531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
532
*532
55
Password Change
533
533
*533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
534
*534
57
Call Wait Request
535
535
*535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
536
*536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
537
*537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
582
*582
61
CLIR Access
583
583
*583
62
COLR Access
584
584
*584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
585
*585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
581
*581
65
Command Call Conf
580
580
*580
66
Intrude Register
589
589
*589
67
Camp On Register
590
590
*590
68
OHVO Register
591
591
*591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
592
*592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
593
*593
71
Mobile Access
594
594
*594
72
CCR Access
670
670
*670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
671
*671
74
System Hold
560
560
*560
75
Return Held CO
8**
8**
*8**
76
Sys Memo
675
675
*675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
678
*678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
679
*679
79
Add Conf Member
680
680
*680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
565
*565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
564
564
*564
82
Door Open
#*1
#*1
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
##*
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
586
*586
85
Universal Answer
587
587
*587
86
USB Call Record
588
588
*588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
681
*681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
682
*682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
683
*683
90
Loop Key
684
684
*684
91
Call Log
685
685
*685
C-5
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
APPENDIX C – FIXED FUNCTION/USER PROGRAM CODES
Fixed Function Codes (Tables C-1 and C-2), are digit sequences users and the Attendant may dial while
in the USER PROGRAM MODE (refer to the iPECS-MG Feature and Operation Manual).
TABLE C-1 STATION USER PROGRAM FIXED FUNCTION CODES
USER PGM CODE
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User Name Creation
2 digits for each character
13 + Time
Set Wake-up Alarm Time
HH/mm, 24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set Display Language
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
Trunk Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Retrieve COS
Auth. Code required
33
COS Override (Walking COS)
Auth. Code required
34
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
SMS Message Protect
41 + MSG number [xx]
Set Pre-Defined Message.
42
Create a Station User Message
LIP-Series Only
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Mobile Phone Activation
X=1-2
52 + x
Mobile Phone Registration
X=1-2
X=1-2
53 + x
Mobile CLI Number Registration
54 + Rm & Auth Code
Conf Room Start
55 + Rm & Auth Code
Conf Room Close
61
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone Version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
C-1
LIP Series
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
TABLE C-2 ATTENDANT USER PROGRAM FIXED FUNCTION CODES
USER PGM CODE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
REMARK
01 SMDR
011
PRINT STATION SMDR
Station Range
012
DELETE STATION SMDR
Station Range
013
PRINT FAILED CALL SMDR
014
DELETE FAILED CALL SMDR
015
DELETE ALL SMDR
016
ABORT PRINTING
02 TRAFFIC
021
PRINT TRAFFIC (TENANT)
022
PRINT TRAFFIC (CALL TYPE)
023
PRINT TRAFFIC (CO GRP)
031
TEMPORARY COS MODE
Station Range
032
RETRIEVE COS
Station Range
033
REGISTER PASSWORD
Station Range
034
CALL LOG PROTECT
Station Range
041
SET SYSTEM DATE
042
SET SYSTEM TIME
043
LCD DATE MODE
044
LCD TIME MODE
Station Range
045
SET WAKE UP
Station Range
046
RESET WAKE UP
Station Range
051
PRESELECTED MESSAGE
Station Range, MSG No
052
SET USER MESSAGE
Station Range
061
LISTEN VM ANNOUCEMENT
062
RECORD VM ANNOUCEMENT
03 COS / PASSWORD
04 DATE / TIME
Station Range
05 MULTI MESSAGE
06 VMIB ANNOUNCEMENT
07 USER PROGRAM
071
STATION NAME
Station Range
072
LANGUAGE PROGRAM
Station Range
073
PREPAID CALL
Station Range
074
FEATURE CANCEL
Station Range
08 SYSTEM
081
DAY/NIGHT PROGRAM
082
MONITOR CONF ROOM
083
FORCED DELETE CONF ROOM
C-2
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
USER PGM CODE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
REMARK
084
PPTP CONNECTION
Registered Server Number
091
SOFTWARE UPGRADE
092
DB DOWNLOAD TO USB
093
DB UPLOAD TO USB
094
VMIB MSG DOWNLOAD
09 USB
0# WTU SUBSCRIBE
C-3
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
APPENDIX D – DEFAULT VALUES
The following Tables, are divided based on PROGRAM group and PROGRAM, and provide the default
values assigned to all Admin entries. Prior to changing an entry during programming assure you have
an understanding of the PROGRAM and its purpose.
TABLE D-1 PRE-PROGRAMMED DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 100 – Location program
1
Nation Code
2
Site Name
DEFAULT
REMARK
1
Maximum 4 digits
Maximum 24 characters
PGM Code: 101 – Slot Assignment
1
Slot
2 digits
2
DEVS
2 digits
PGM Code: 103 – Logical Slot Assign
1
COL
2
STA
3
VMIB
PGM Code: 104 – DECT/IP/SIP Max Port
1
MAX NO OF DECT
8
000-192
2
MAX NO OF IP Phone
32
000-324
3
MAX NO OF SIP Phone
32
000-324
PGM Code: 106 – IP-Phone/Phontage REG.
1
MAC Address
2
User ID
3
User Password
4
Station Number
5
IP Address
6
F/W IP Address
7
RTP Security
PGM Code: 107 – DTIM/SLTM Registration.
1
MAC Address
2
Station Range
3
IP Address
4
F/W IP Address
5
RTP Security
PGM Code: 108 – IP Address Plan
1
IP Address
2
Subnet mask
10.10.10.1
3
Router IP Address
10.10.10.254
4
Firewall IP Address
0.0.0.0
5
DNS IP Address
0.0.0.0
6
H.323 port
1720
000-999
7
SIP Port
5060
000-999
8
DHCP Usage
OFF
9
DIFFSERV
255.255.255.000
04
PGM Code: 109 – System Info Display
1
MAC Address
2
IPKTS Protocol Port
3
Private Net Mask
4
Application Release Version
D-1
00-63
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
5
SUB-MENU
Issue 1.0
DEFAULT
REMARK
Application Release Date
6
Boot Version
7
Boot Release Date
TABLE D-2 NUMBERING PLANS
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 110 – Numbering Plan Type
DEFAULT
Default Numbering Plan Type
REMARK
1
PGM Code: 111 – System Numbering Plan
1
Prefix Code
Index01 - 1
System Numbering Plan Index from 001 to 150
Index02- 2
Index03- 3
Index04- 4
Index05- 5
Index06- 6
Index07- 7
Index08- 8
Index09- 9
Index10- 0
Index11- *
Index12- #
2
Additional Digits
Index01- 2
System Numbering Plan Index from 001 to 150
Index02- 2
Index03- 2
Index04- 2
Index05- 2
Index06- 2
Index07- 0
Index08- 2
Index09- 0
Index10- 0
Index11- 1
Index12- 2
PGM Code: 112 – Flexible Station Number
Flexible Station Number
100~473
PGM Code: 113 – Feature Numbering Plan
1
Attendant Call
2
Conference Room 1
571
0
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page for Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
Internal Page Answer
547
16
External Page
548
D-2
Default Numbering Plan Country Code 1.
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
17
Issue 1.0
DEFAULT
All Page (Internal & External)
REMARK
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Stage Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Speed Program
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
Message Wait Register
557
29
Message Wait Answer
558
30
Message Wait Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Croup Call Pick-Up
566
34
Direct Call Pick-Up
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
41
CO Line Access
888
42
7
External Voice Mail Message Wait
*8
Enable
43
External Voice Mail Message Wait
*9
Cancel
44
MCID Request
45
Unsupervised Conference Extend
*0
46
PTT Group Login/Logout
538
47
Hotdesk Login/Logout
525
5##
48
Station Name Register
526
49
Create Conference Room
527
50
Delete Conference Room
528
51
Wake-Up Register
529
52
Wake-Up Cancel
530
53
Temporary COS Down
531
54
Retrieve COS
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Interphone Group Access
534
57
Call Wait Register
535
58
Pre-Selected Message PGM
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
Call Base CLIR
582
61
CLIR Access
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
One-Way Command Group Call
581
65
Conference Command Group Call
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp-On Register
590
D-3
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
Issue 1.0
DEFAULT
68
Voice-Over Register
591
69
Mobile Extension Number Register
592
70
Mobile extension CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access and Drop
671
74
HOLD
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
System Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conference Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Login/Logout
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
REMARK
PGM Code: 114 – CO Group Access Code
CO Group Access Code 01 ~ 73
9, 801 ~ 872
PGM Code: 115 – Station Group Number
Station Group 01 ~ Station Group 50
620 ~ 669
TABLE D-3 STATION PORT DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 120 – Station Type
1
RANGE
DEFAULT
Station Type
2
DSS MAP
3
Serial DSS
PGM Code: 121 – Station Port Attributes I
1
Auto Speaker Selection
2
Headset Mode
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
0: Speaker
Speaker
1: Headset
2: Ear-Mic
3
Headset Ring
0: Speaker
Speaker
1: Headset
2: Both
4
Group Listening
1: ON, 0: OFF
5
Keyset Admin
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
6
No Touch Answer
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
7
Howling Tone
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
8
Dummy Terminal
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
9
Port Blocking
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
10
Use Bluetooth
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
D-4
OFF
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
11
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
SLT Line Length
0: Short
DEFAULT
Short
1:Longt
2: Far
12
System Alarm Report
EN/DIS
DISABLE
13
Door Open Access
EN/DIS
DISABLE
00: English
Korean
PGM Code: 122 – Station Port Attributes II
1
LCD Languge Display mode
01: Italian
02: Finnish
03:Dutch
04: Swedish
05: Danish
06: Norwegian
07: Hebrew
08: Germany
09: French
10: Portuguese
11: Spanish
12: Korean
13: Estonian
14: Russian
2
LCD Date Display Mode
1: MMDDYY
DDMMYY
0: DDMMYY
3
4
LCD Time Display Mode
Backlight Usage
1: 24 Hour Mode
12 Hour
0: 12 Hour Mode
Mode
0:Always Off
Busy Only
1: Busy Only
2: Always On
5
LIP-8000 Phone Font
0: Time New
Time New
Roman
Roman
1: Gothic
6
LIP-8000 Phone LCD Brightness
7
Group Queue Display
01-15
07
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
01
PGM Code: 123 – Station Port Attributes III
1
Prime Number
01-48
2
Zone Number
1-9
1
3
Automatic Hold
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
4
Enblock Dial Mode
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
5
Intercom Answer Mode
1: Handsfree
Tone
2: Tone
3: Privacy
6
Data Line Security
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
7
Sending Progress Indicator
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
8
Fax Mode
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
9
DTMF Confirmation Tone When Redial
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
10
Mute Ring Service
1: No Ring
Mute Ring
11
Auto Idle Service
0: Mute Ring
1: Manual
0: Auto
PGM Code: 124 – Station Port Attributes IV
D-5
Auto
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
1
Message-Wait Indication
RANGE
0: Not Assign
1: Ring LED
2: MW Remind
DEFAULT
REMARK
MW Remind
Tone
Tone
3: Ring LED + MW
Remind Tone
2
Apply Differential Ring
0: All ring
All ring
1: Normal Ring
3
Intercom Differential Ring ID
0-254
4
CO Differential Ring ID
0-254
1
1
5
COS Apply
0: Sub-DN
Sub-DN
6
Hook Flash When Transfer
1: My-DN
0: Cancel Transfer
Cancel
1: Camp-ON
Transfer
2: Conference
7
Off-Hook On Paged
0: Paged
Paged
1: Dial Tone
8
Preferred Line Answer
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
9
Pick-Up By DSS Button
0: Disable
Direct Pick-
1: Group Pick-Up
Up
2: Direct Pick-Up
10
CTI IP Address
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
PGM Code: 126 – Flexible Button Assignment
1
Button Type
Not Assigned
Station DSS
CO Number
Loop Key
CO group Access
Station Group Number
Dial Number
Directory Number
REDIAL
SPEED
CONFERENCE
MUTE
Call Back
DND/FWD
Transfer
Flash
PTT
2
Ring Option (Button Type Directory
Immediate Ring
Number)
Delay Ring 1-9
No Ring
3
Button Access Type
0: Changeable
1: Unchangeable
In case Button Type is Directory
Number
All Call
Dial after Seizure
Incoming Only
D-6
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
TABLE D-4 STATION NUMBER DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 130 – Station DN Assignment
1
Station DN Type
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: SADN Normal
2: MADN
3: SADN-Hotdesk
2
DN Number View
PGM Code: 131 – Station DN Attributes I
1
Station Name
2
Tenant Group
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
3
Digit conversion Table
4
Password
5
Busy Service
1-9
1
0: Busy Tone
Busy Tone
1: Camp-On
2: Call-Wait
3: Pilot Hunt
6
Charge Mode
Free
Report
Report
7
SMDR Dial Digit Hidden
EN/DIS
8
Hotdesk Agent number
1: ON, 0: OFF
DISABLE
OFF
9
Time Table Index
None, 1-9
None
PGM Code: 122 – Station DN Attributes II
1
Forced Handsfree Access
EN/DIS
DISABLE
2
Forward Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
3
Offnet-Forward Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
4
DND Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
DISABLE
5
Intrusion Access
EN/DIS
6
Mobile Extension Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
7
Hook Flash Mode
0: Flash Normal
Flash Normal
1: Flash Ignore
2: Flash Drop
3: Hold Release
8
Auto Pick-Up
EN/DIS
DISABLE
EN/DIS
ENABLE
PGM Code: 133 – Station DN Attributes III
1
CO Queue Access
2
Conference Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
3
Wake-Up Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
4
Station Call Back Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
5
ACNR Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
6
Absence Notice Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
7
Call Wait Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
8
Camp-On Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
9
Voice Over Access
EN/DIS
DISABLE
10
Prepaid Call Access
EN/DIS
DISABLE
11
Keypad Facility Usage
EN/DIS
DISABLE
PGM Code: 134 – Station DN Attributes IV
1
Speed Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
2
Page Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
3
Meet-Me Page Access
EN/DIS
ENABLE
4
CO Call Duration Restrict
EN/DIS
DISABLE
5
SLT Block Back Call
EN/DIS
DISABLE
EN/DIS
ENABLE
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
6
Pilot Hunt Ring
7
ACR User
D-7
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
8
Wake-Up Time
9
Repeat Wake-Up
10
Branch Line / Bridge Line Mode
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: OFF
OFF
REMARK
1: Branch
2: Bridge
3:Bridge-Softphone
11
Auto Privacy
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 135 – Station DN Attributes V
1
CLIP Display
EN/DIS
ENABLE
2
COLP Display
EN/DIS
ENABLE
3
CLI Redirect
4
CLI/Redirect
CLI
CLIP When Outgoing
EN/DIS
DISABLE
5
COLP When Incoming Answer
EN/DIS
DISABLE
6
CLI Number
7
Call Forward CLI / Redirect
CLI/Redirect
CLI
8
Ignore Caller’s CLIP Option
EN/DIS
DISABLE
9
Mobile Extension CLI
Caller Number
Caller
Mobile Number
Number
Caller + Mobile
10
Long CLI 1
11
Long CLI 2
12
Long CLI 3
13
CLI Name Display
EN/DIS
DISABLE
00-30
00
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
PGM Code: 137 – COS Assignment
1
Day COS
2
Night COS
3
Timed COS
PGM Code: 138 – Auto Dial Attribute
1
Auto Dial Digit
2
Auto Dial Pause Time
PGM Code: 142 – Preset Call Forward
1
Internal Unconditional
2
Internal Busy
3
Internal No-Answer
4
External Unconditional
5
External Busy
6
External No-Answer
PGM Code: 143 – Call Forward
1
Forward Type
Unconditional
Busy
No-Answer
Busy / No-Answer
2
Forward Number
3
Forward Apply Time
0: All
All
1: Day
2: Night
3: Timed
4
Call-Forward No-Answer Timer
5
Forward Information Display
000-600
15
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
EN/DIS
DISABLE
PGM Code: 145 – VMIB Attribute
1
VMIB Access
D-8
1sec
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
2
Issue 1.0
RANGE
Prompt Language Index
1: First
DEFAULT
REMARK
First
2: Second
3: Third
3
Auto-Record Service
EN/DIS
DISABLE
4
Two-Way Record Access
EN/DIS
DISABLE
5
Two-Way Recording Destination
6
VM Message Backup Phontage
Number
7
VM Message Backup Delete
EN/DIS
DISABLE
8
VMIB Message Retrieve Type
0: LIFO
LIFO
1: FIFO
9
VMIB New Message Number
10
VMIB Saved Message Number
VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server IP
Address
VM MSG-User Mail Address
VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server ID
VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server
Password
VM MSG-Attach Message
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: All Call
All Call
PGM Code: 146 – Mobile Extension Attribute
1
Mobile EXT 1 Enable
2
Mobile EXT 1 Number
3
Mobile EXT 1 CLI
4
Mobile EXT 2 Enable
5
Mobile EXT 2 Number
6
Mobile EXT 2 CLI
7
Mobile Service Mode
1: Service CLI Only
8
Mobile Service CLI 1
9
Mobile Service CLI 2
10
Mobile Service CLI 3
11
Mobile Service CLI 4
12
Mobile Service CLI 5
PGM Code: 150 – CO Group Access
CO Group Access
Group 01-72
01 only
PGM Code: 151 – Page Group Access
Page Group Access
Group 01-30
PGM Code: 151 – Command Group Access
Command Group Access
Group 01-10
TABLE D-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 160 – CO Line Attributes I
1
CO Line Type
2
Service Type
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Normal
Normal
1: DID
3
Outgoing Group Number
4
Incoming Group Number
5
Tenant Number
01-72
01
01-72
01
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
6
Digit Conversion Table
1-9
D-9
1
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
7
Signal Type
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: No Signal
No Signal
REMARK
1: Send Wink
2: Wait Seize Ack
3: Send Wink &
Wait Seize Ack
4: Send Sub
Answer & Wait Sub
Answer
5: Send Wink &
Send Sub answer
6: Wait Ack & Wait
Sub Answer
7: Send Wink and
Sub Answer & Wait
Wink and Sub
Answer
8
Release Timing
0: First Release
First Release
1: Caller Release
2: Called Release
9
Incoming/Outgoing Mode
0: Incoming
Both
1: Outgoing
2: Both
10
Dialing Type
0: DTMF
DTMF
1: Pulse
2: R2
11
Charge Mode
0: Free
Report
1: Report
12
Metering Usage
None
None
12KHz
16KHz
50Hz
SPR
PPR
NPR
AOC(Standard)
AOC1(Italy, Spain)
AOC2(Finland)
AOC3(Australia)
AOC4(Belgium)
AOC5(Netherlands)
PGM Code: 161 – CO Line Attributes II
1
VOIP/QSIG Mode
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
SIP/PRI
H323
QSIG
2
Drop Type
0: LOOP
LOOP
1: Polarity
3
Flash Type
0: LOOP
LOOP
1: Ground
4
Flash Timer
000-300
050
10msec
5
Open Loop Timer
00-20
00
100msec
6
Line Length
0Km
0Km
3Km
5Km
7Km
D-10
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
7
Zone Number
1-9
1
8
VMIB Prompt Language Index
First Prompt
First Prompt
REMARK
Second Prompt
Third Prompt
9
ISDN CD
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: Blocked Line
Normal CO
1: Normal CO Line
Line
PGM Code: 162 – CO Line Attributes III
1
CO Access Mode
2: Dedicated Line
2
Digit Sending Mode
Overlap
Overlap
Enblock
3
Max Digit Length
00-32
32
4
Min Digit Length for Overlap Mode
00-32
00
5
Check Password
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
6
R2 Connect Mode
0: END-to-END
END-to-END
1: LINK-by-LINK
7
R2MFC Backward Value
8
Dummy Dial Tone Service
01-15
01
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: Disable
Disable
PGM Code: 163 – CO Line Attributes IV
1
CID Mode
1: FSK
2: DTAS FSK
3: DTMF
4: Russia-CID
2
Russia CID Detect
1: ALL / 0: Local
All
3
Russia CID Request
1: Auto / 0: User
Auto
4
Russia CID Digit Number
04-10
7
5
Russia CID No-Answer Timer
001-300
20
6
Russia CID Request Count
1-3
1
010-150
020
10msec
10-30
10
10msec
0: User Provided,
User Provided,
Not Screened
Not Screened
7
Russia CID Request First Delay
1Sec
Timer
8
Russia CID Request Retry Delay
Timer
PGM Code: 165 – Incoming CO Attributes I
1
CO Name
2
ISDN Screen Indicator
1: User Provided,
Verified & Passed
3
Calling Type
0: Unknown
National
1: International
2: National
3: Subscriber
4: Not Used
4
Calling Numbering Type
0: Unknown
Unknown
1: ISDN Telephony
Numbering Plan
2: Data
3: Telex
4: National
Standard
5: Private
5
Sending Progress Indicator
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
6
R2 ANI Service Request
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
D-11
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
7
ICLID Service
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
8
Own Code Add to Transit CLI
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
9
Own Code
10
CLI Prefix Code
None, 1-9
None
11
International Code
12
Transit CLI 1
13
Transit CLI 2
14
Transit CLI 3
15
CLI Conversion Table Index
REMARK
PGM Code: 166 – Incoming CO Attributes II
1
Provide Dial Tone
1: ON, 0: OFF
2
BLF Usage
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
3
Unsupervised Conference Extend
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Block After Clear Forward Waiting
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
4
OFF
Time
5
CPT Detect
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
6
Answer to Waiting Call
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
7
Universal Answer
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
8
Release Guard Time
00-15
1
1sec
9
Unsupervised Conference Timer
000-255
0
1min
10
Clear Forward Waiting Timer
001-300
300
1sec
11
Max Ring Time
015-300
120
1sec
12
DISA Supervision Timer
1-9
2
1sec
0-9
0
1sec
None, 1-9
None
13
VMIB Play Delay Timer
14
Incoming Time Table Index
PGM Code: 167 – CO Ring Assignment
1
Day
Flex1 - Service Type
0: Ring Assign
Ring
Assign
1: Feature Code
Flex2 - Feature
Not Assigned
Not
Assign
CCR
CCR Drop
DISA Tone
Digits
Flex3 - Feature Delay
Delay 0
Felx4 - Member Display
Flex5 - Member Assign
Member
100
2
Night
Flex1 - Service Type
0: Ring Assign
Ring
Assign
1: Feature Code
Flex2 - Feature
Not Assigned
Not
Assign
CCR
CCR Drop
DISA Tone
Digits
Flex3 - Feature Delay
Delay 0
Felx4 - Member Display
Flex5 - Member Assign
Member
100
D-12
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
3
Timed
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Flex1 - Service Type
0: Ring Assign
REMARK
Ring
Assign
1: Feature Code
Flex2 - Feature
Not Assigned
Not
Assign
CCR
CCR Drop
DISA Tone
Digits
Flex3 - Feature Delay
Delay 0
Felx4 - Member Display
Flex5 - Member Assign
Member
100
PGM Code: 168 – Normal/DISA CO Attributes
1
Day
Flex1 - CO Access From
OFF
DISA
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Flex2 - DISA Account Code
1: ON, 0: OFF
3
Flex3 - DISA Retry Count
1-9
0
1sec
Felx4 –Preset Forward Time
0 - 20
Flex5 - Preset Forward Ring
Table Index
1 - 80
2
Night
Flex1 - CO Access From
OFF
DISA
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Flex2 - DISA Account Code
1: ON, 0: OFF
3
Flex3 - DISA Retry Count
1-9
0
1sec
Felx4 –Preset Forward Time
0 - 20
Flex5 - Preset Forward Ring
Table Index
1 - 80
3
Timed
Flex1 - CO Access From
OFF
DISA
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Flex2 - DISA Account Code
1: ON, 0: OFF
3
Flex3 - DISA Retry Count
1-9
Felx4 –Preset Forward Time
0 - 20
Flex5 - Preset Forward Ring
Table Index
1 - 80
PGM Code: 169 – Incoming CO Alternative
D-13
0
1sec
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
1
Day
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Flex1 - Busy
REMARK
Disconect
Flex2 - No-Answer
Flex3 - Vacant Number
Flex4 - Transfer No-Answer
Flex5 - Recall No-Answer
Flex6 - DND
Flex7 - Handset Lifted
1sec
Flex8 - Error
1: Disconnect
2:Attendant
3:CO Ring Assign
4:ALT Ring Table
5:Tone
6:Pilot Hunt Group
2
Night
Flex1 - Busy
Disconect
Flex2 - No-Answer
Flex3 - Vacant Number
Flex4 - Transfer No-Answer
Flex5 - Recall No-Answer
Flex6 - DND
Flex7 - Handset Lifted
1sec
Flex8 - Error
1: Disconnect
2:Attendant
3:CO Ring Assign
4:ALT Ring Table
5:Tone
6:Pilot Hunt Group
3
Timed
Flex1 - Busy
Disconect
Flex2 - No-Answer
Flex3 - Vacant Number
Flex4 - Transfer No-Answer
Flex5 - Recall No-Answer
Flex6 - DND
Flex7 - Handset Lifted
1sec
Flex8 - Error
1: Disconnect
2:Attendant
3:CO Ring Assign
4:ALT Ring Table
5:Tone
6:Pilot Hunt Group
PGM Code: 170 – Outgoing CO Attributes I
1
ISDN Screen Indicator
User Provided, Not
User
Screened
Provided, Not
User Provided,
Screened
Verified and Passed
2
Sending Caller Number
3
Calling Type
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
0: Unknown
National
1: International
2: National
3: Subscriber
4: Not Used
D-14
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
4
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
Calling Numbering Plan Identification
0: Unknown
DEFAULT
REMARK
Unknown
1: ISDN Telephony
Numbering Plan
2: Data
3: Telex
4: National Standard
5: Private
5
Called Numbering Plan Identification
0: Unknown
Unknown
1: ISDN Telephony
Numbering Plan
2: Data
3: Telex
4: National Standard
5: Private
6
Bearer Capability
0: Speedch
Speedch
1: Unrestricted
2: Restricted
3: 3.1KHz Audio
4:7KHz
5: Video
7
ISDN Line Type
0: A-Law
A-Law
1: U-Law
8
Sending Complete IE for Information
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
OFF
Message
9
Make Transit CLI
1: ON, 0: OFF
10
Own Code Add to Transit CLI
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
11
Representative CLI Usage
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
12
Representative CLI
0: Normal
Normal
13
Own Code
14
CLI Type
1: Long CLI 1
2: Long CLI 2
3: Long CLI 3
15
Transit CLI Type
0: Normal
Normal
1: Long CLI 1
2: Long CLI 2
3: Long CLI 3
16
CLI Conversion Table Index
17
Send Redirection Number
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 171 – Outgoing CO Attributes II
1
CPT Detect
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
2
Unsupervised Conference Extend
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
3
Provide Ring-Back Tone
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
4
BLF Usage
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
5
Release Guard Timer
6
Unsupervised Conference Timer
7
Max Transfer Ring Timer
8
Outgoing Time Table Index
00-15
2
1sec
000-255
0
1min
001-300
120
None, 1-9
None
PGM Code: 173 – Outgoing CO Alternative
D-15
sec
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
1
Day
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Flex1 - Recall No-Answer
REMARK
Disconne
Flex2 - Transfer No-Answer
ct
Flex3 - No-Answer
1: Disconnect
2:Attendant
3:CO Ring Assign
4:ALT Ring Table
5:Tone
6:Pilot Hunt Group
2
Night
Flex1 - Recall No-Answer
Disconne
Flex2 - Transfer No-Answer
ct
Flex3 - No-Answer
1: Disconnect
2:Attendant
3:CO Ring Assign
4:ALT Ring Table
5:Tone
6:Pilot Hunt Group
3
Timed
Flex1 - Recall No-Answer
Disconne
Flex2 - Transfer No-Answer
ct
Flex3 - No-Answer
1: Disconnect
2:Attendant
3:CO Ring Assign
4:ALT Ring Table
5:Tone
6:Pilot Hunt Group
PGM Code: 174 – CO Inter-Digit Timer
1
Seize Wait Time
005-200
50
2
First Digit
010-200
100
100msec
3
Second Digit
010-200
80
100msec
4
Third Digit
010-200
70
100msec
5
Fourth Digit
010-200
60
100msec
6
Fifth Digit
010-200
50
100msec
7
More than 6 Digit
010-200
40
100msec
First DTMF Delay
00-90
5
100msec
2
Second DTMF Delay
00-90
2
100msec
3
Third DTMF Delay
00-90
2
100msec
th
100msec
PGM Code: 175 – DTMF Send Interval
1
4
Fourth DTMF Delay
00-90
2
100msec
5
Fifth DTMF Delay
00-90
2
100msec
6
Sixth DTMF Delay
00-90
2
100msec
7
More than 7
00-90
2
100msec
PGM Code: 177 – CO COS Assignment
1
Day COS
00-15
00
2
Night COS
00-15
00
3
Timed COS
00-15
00
GM Code: 179 – CO–to–CO Attributes
1
Station Outgoing Call Transfer
EN/DIS
ENABLE
First: Outgoing / Second: Outgoing
2
Attendant Outgoing Call Transfer
EN/DIS
ENABLE
First: Outgoing / Second: Outgoing
3
Outgoing Transfer Release Type
0: None
None
First: Outgoing / Second: Outgoing
1: Release After
Time
D-16
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
4
Outgoing Transfer Release Time
000-300
60
REMARK
5
Incoming Call Transfer Directly
EN/DIS
DISABLE
First: Incoming / Second: Outgoing
6
Station Incoming Call Transfer
EN/DIS
ENABLE
First: Incoming / Second: Outgoing
1sec
7
Attendant Incoming Call Transfer
EN/DIS
ENABLE
First: Incoming / Second: Outgoing
8
Incoming Transfer Release Type
0: None
None
First: Incoming / Second: Outgoing
1: Release After
Time
9
Incoming Transfer Release Time
000-300
60
0: Round Robin
Round Robin
1sec
PGM Code: 180 – CO Group Access Code
1
Access Code Name
2
CO Line choice
1: Last Line
2: First Line
3
Outgoing Group Number
4
AND Digit
5
ARS Service
6
ARS Digit 1
7
ARS Digit 2
01-72
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: Ring Assign
Ring Assign
PGM Code: 181 – Alternative Ring Table
1
Service Type
1: Feature
2
CO Ring Assign
3
Feature Code
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
DISA Tone
Digits
4
Feature Delay
0
TABLE D-6 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 200 – Station Group Assignment
1
Group Type
RANGE
DEFAULT
Not Assign
Not Assign
REMARK
Terminal
Circular
Ring
Longest Idle
Voice Mail
2
Group Name
3
Tenant Number
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
4
Time Table Index
5
Pick-Up Option
1-9
1
0: Disable
Disable
1: All Call
2: Intercom Call
3: External Call
6
Member Assignment
Station
PGM Code: 201 – Station Group Attributes I
D-17
-
Not applicable VM group
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
1
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
Greeting Tone Type
0: Normal
Normal
REMARK
1: Prompt
2: Announcement
3: Internal MOH
4: External MOH
2
Greeting Play Timer
3
Greeting Tone Number
4
000-180
0
1sec
01-19
Greeting Prompt/Announcement Table
Number
5
Greeting Repeat Count
000-100
6
Greeting Repeat Delay Timer
000-100
3
0
7
Queuing Tone Type
0: Normal
Internal MOH
1sec
1: Prompt
2: Announcement
3: Internal MOH
4: External MOH
8
Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer
9
Queuing Tone Number
000-300
30
10
Queuing Prompt/Announcement Table
11
Queuing Repeat Count
000-100
3
12
Queuing Repeat Delay Timer
000-100
0
1sec
01-19
Number
1sec
PGM Code: 202 - Station Group Attributes II
1
Call-In Greeting
2
Max Queue Count
3
Forward Type
0: After Greeting
1: In Greeting
00-99
0: Not Used
Not Used
1: Unconditional
2: Queuing
Overflow
3: Time Out
4: Queuing
Overflow / Time
Out
4
Apply Time Type
0: All
All
1: Day
2: Night
3: Timed
5
Forward Destination
6
Wrap-Up Timer
000-600
10
100mec
7
Member No-Answer Timer
50-600
150
100msec
1
PGM Code: 203 – Voice Mail Group
1
Put Mail Index
1-9
2
Get Mail Index
1-9
2
3
Busy Index
1-9
3
4
No-Answer Index
1-9
4
5
Disconnect Index
6
SMDI Type
7
SMDI CLI Information
1-9
9
0: Type 1
Type 1
1: Type 2
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: All call
All call
PGM Code: 204 – Call Pick-Up Group
1
Pick-Up Condition
1: Intercom Call
2: External Call
D-18
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
SUB-MENU
Issue 1.0
RANGE
Pick-Up Member Assignment
DEFAULT
Station
PGM Code: 205 – Page Group
1
Page Member Assignment
Station
PGM Code: 206 – Command Conference Group
1
On Hook Service
0: On-Hook
On-Hook
1: Recall
2
One-Way Busy
0: Busy
Busy
1: Request
Queuing
2: Recover Call
3
Both-Way Busy
0: Busy
Busy
1: Request
Queuing
2: Recover Call
4
Command Group Member Assignment
PGM Code: 208 – PTT Group
1
PTT Member Assignment
Station
PGM Code: 209 – Interphone Group
Digit ‘0’ Service
Station
Digit ‘1’ Service
Station
Digit ‘2’ Service
Station
Digit ‘3’ Service
Station
Digit ‘4’ Service
Station
Digit ‘5’ Service
Station
Digit ‘6’ Service
Station
Digit ‘7’ Service
Station
Digit ‘8’ Service
Station
Digit ‘9’ Service
Station
PGM Code: 210 – Pilot Hunt Group I
1
Pilot Hunt Call Service
0: All call
All call
1: Intercom Call
2: External Call
2
Service Type
0: Terminal
Circular
1: Circular
3
Time Table Index
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
4
Pilot Hunt Member Assignment
PGM Code: 211 – Pilot Hunt Group II
1
Day Forward Type
0: Not Used
Not Used
1: Unconditional
2: Busy
3: No-Answer
4: Busy/No-Answer
2
Day Forward Destination
3
Night Forward Type
0: Not Used
1: Unconditional
2: Busy
3: No-Answer
4: Busy/No-Answer
4
Night Forward Destination
D-19
Not Used
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
5
SUB-MENU
Timed Forward Type
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Not Used
Not Used
REMARK
1: Unconditional
2: Busy
3: No-Answer
4: Busy/No-Answer
6
Timed Forward Destination
TABLE D-7 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 220 – System Timer I
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
000-300
30
1sec
00-24
0
1hour
1 sec
1
CO-to-CO Transfer Timer
2
Hot-Desk Logout Timer
3
ACNR Pause Timer
5-300
30
4
Paging Timeout Timer
0-300
15
1 sec
5
Pause Timer
1-9
3
1 sec
6
Voice Mail Pause Timer
1-9
3
1 sec
7
VMIB Message Minimum Record Timer
1-9
4
1 sec
8
VMIB Message Maximum Record Timer
1-999
60
1 sec
9
Call Wait Warning Timer
10-180
30
1 sec
10
Camp-On Warning Timer
10-180
30
1 sec
11
CCR Inter-Digit Timer
1-30
3
1 sec
12
Web Password Guard Timer
1-999
5
1min
100msec
PGM Code: 221 – System Timer II
1
SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer
1-25
1
2
SLT Maximum Hook Flash Timer
1-25
5
100msec
3
SLT Minimun Hook Flash Timer
0-250
20
10msec
4
LCO Ring ON Timer
1-9
2
100msec
5
LCO Ring OFF Timer
10-150
60
100msec
6
LCO Release Guard Timer
1-150
10
100msec
PGM Code: 222 – System Timer III
1
Door Open Timer
5-99
20
100msec
2
Message Wait Alert Tone Timer
0-60
0
1min
3
Inter-Digit Timer
0-300
15
1sec
4
Incoming CO Inter-Digit Timer
1-60
15
1sec
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: 60/40
60/40
PGM Code: 223 – System Attributes
1
Web Admin Password Encryption
2
Pulse Dial Break/Make Ratio
1: 66/33
2: 50/50
3
Voice Mail SMDI Interface
1: ON, 0: OFF
4
VMIB SMTP Port
0000-9999
OFF
25
5
Network Time/Date
0: Disable
Disable
1: ISND Clock
2: NTP
6
CLI Print
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
7
TLS for Web
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
8
Web Server Port
00001-65535
80
9
Database Auto USB Download
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
10
Database Auto USB Download Hour
11
UC Server IP Address
12
CTI Server IP Address
13
Modem Associated CO Line
00-23
0
IP Addr
0.0.0.0
IP Addr
0.0.0.0
CO Number
0
D-20
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 226 – System Password
1
User ID & Password
2
Admin ID & Password
3
Maint ID & Password
RANGE
DEFAULT
PGM Code: 227 – Alarm Attributes
1
Alarm Enable
2
Alarm Contact Type
3
Alarm Mode
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: Open
Open
1: Close
0: Bell
Alarm
1: Alarm
4
Alarm Signal Mode
0: Once
Repeat
1: Repeat
PGM Code: 228 – External Control Contact
External Contact Type
Not Used
Not Used
LBC
Door Open
External Paging
PGM Code: 229 – Music Source
1
ICM Box Music Type
NO BGM
NO BGM
Internal Music
External Music
VMIB BGM 1
VMIB BGM 2
VMIB BGM 3
VMIB BGM 4
SLT MOH 1
SLT MOH 2
SLT MOH 3
SLT MOH 4
SLT MOH 5
2
Internal Music Type
Romance
Turkish March
Green Sleeves
Fur Elise
Carmen
Waltz
Pavane
Sichiliano
Sonata
Spring
Campanella
Badinerie
Blue Danube
3
VMIB MOH 1 Assignment
Announcement
4
VMIB MOH 2 Assignment
Announcement
5
VMIB MOH 3 Assignment
Announcement
6
VMIB MOH 4 Assignment
Announcement
7
SLT MOH 1 Assignment
Station
8
SLT MOH 2 Assignment
Station
9
SLT MOH 3 Assignment
Station
10
SLT MOH 4 Assignment
Station
11
SLT MOH 5 Assignment
Station
PGM Code: 230 – RS-232 Setting
D-21
Romance
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
1
Baud Rate
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: 9600 Baud
115200 Baud
2: 19200 Baud
3: 38400 Baud
4: 57600 Baud
5:115200 Baud
2
Page Break
3
Line Per Page
1: ON, 0: OFF
001-199
OFF
66
4
XON / XOFF
0: XOFF
XOFF
1: XON
PGM Code: 231 – Serial Port Selection
1
On-Line SMDR Print
0: Serial Port
Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
2
Off-Line SMDR/Statistics Print
0: Serial Port
Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
3
SMDI Print
0: Serial Port
Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
4
Call Information Print
0: Serial Port
Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
5
Traffic Print
0: Serial Port
Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
6
Trace Print
0: Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
D-22
Serial Port
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
7
ADMIN Data Print
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Serial Port
Serial Port
1: Modu Port
2: TCP 1
3: TCP 2
4: TCP 3
5: TCP 4
6: TCP 5
PGM Code: 232 -SMDR Attributes
1
SMDR Save Enable
1: ON, 0: OFF
2
SMDR Print Enable
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
OFF
3
Record Type
0: All Call
All Call
4
Long Distance Call Digit Counter
07-15
07
5
Print Incoming Call
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
6
Print Lost Call
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
7
SMDR Currency Unit
8
SMDR Cost per Metering Pulse
1: Long Distance
9
SMDR Fraction
10
SMDR Transfer Charge Mode
0-5
0
0: Individual
Individual
1: Integrate
Transferring
2: Integrate
Transferred
11
SMDR Attendant Charge Mode
0: Normal Charging
Normal
1: Attendant
Charging
Charging
2: Transferred
Charging
12
SMDR Dialed Digit Hidden Number
13
SMDR Hidden Position
0-9
0
0: Left
Right
14
SMDR ICM Save
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
15
SMDR ICM Print
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
16
SMDR Interface Service
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
17
SMDR Interface Connection Type
0: SIO
SIO
1: Right
1: LAN
18
SMDR Interface AUTH Index
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
SMTP Mail Server IP Address
IP Addr
0.0.0.0
Not Assign
Not Assign
SMDR User Mail Address
SMDR System Domain Name
SMDR Mail Send Weekly Set
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
SUN
SMDR Mail Send Daily Set
00-23
00
SMDR Mail Auto Send Set
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
SMDR Mail Auto Delete Set
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 233 – System Date & Time
1
System Time
(HH:MM)
2
System Date
(MMDDYY)
D-23
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
3
DST Enable Mode
4
DST Start Time
5
DST End Timer
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Network Time / Date
REMARK
Disable
ISDN Clock
NTP
NTP Primary Server Address
NTP Secondary Server Address
Standard Time Zone
PGM Code: 234 -LED Flashing Rate
1
[CALLBK] Intercom
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
- Flash IPM 15 IPM /
30 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
30 IPM / 30 IPM Wink
60 IPM / 60 IPM Wink /
120 IPM / 120 IPM Flutter /
240 IPM / 240 IPM Flutter /
480 IPM / 480 IPM Flutter /
480 IPM Wink / 480 IPM Double
2
[CALL BK] CO Line
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
120 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
3
[CALL BK] MSG Wait
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
120 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
4
[MUTE] Transmission
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
5
[MUTE] COS Change
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
120 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
6
[DND] DND
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
7
[DND] One-Time
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
8
[DND] Preselect MSG
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
15 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
9
[CALL BK] ACNR
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
480 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
10
[SPK] Speaker
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off / On / IPM
D-24
Flash Steady
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
11
SUB-MENU
[SPK] Headset
Issue 1.0
RANGE
Flex1: Color
DEFAULT
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
12
[SPK] Incoming Call
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
13
[HOLD] Paging
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
14
[HOLD] Voice Over
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
15
[HOLD] Reserved
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
16
[RING] ICM Ring
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
17
[RING] CO Ring
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
18
[RING] MSG Wait
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
19
[HEADSET] Headset
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
20
[HEADSET] Bluetooth
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
21
[DN] I Use
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
22
[DN] Other Use
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
23
[DN] DND
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off / On / IPM
D-25
Flash off
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
24
SUB-MENU
[DN] Incoming Call
Issue 1.0
RANGE
Flex1: Color
DEFAULT
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
25
[DN] Hold
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
26
[DN] Call Forward
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off
Flash off / On / IPM
27
[DN] I Conference
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
28
[DN] Other Conference
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
29
[DN] Conf Supervisor
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
30
[DSS] Incoming Call
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
31
[DSS] ICM Talk
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
32
DSS] DND
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off
Flash off / On / IPM
33
[DSS] Call Forward
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off
Flash off / On / IPM
34
[DSS] Handset-Lift
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off
Flash off / On / IPM
35
[DSS] Preselected MSG
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off
Flash off / On / IPM
36
[DSS] Hold
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off / On / IPM
D-26
Flash Steady
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
37
[CO] Call Setup
RANGE
Flex1: Color
DEFAULT
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
38
[CO] Co Talk
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
39
[DN] VM Message Wait
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
120 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
40
[DSS] VM Message Wait
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
120 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
41
[CO] Command Group Ring
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
42
[CO] Command Group Talk
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
43
[CO] I Talk
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash Steady
Flash off / On / IPM
44
[CO] Hold
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
60 IPM Wink
Flash off / On / IPM
45
[CO] Transfer
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
120 IPM
Flash off / On / IPM
46
[CO] Recall
Flex1: Color
RED
Red / Green / Amber
Flex2: Flash
Flash off / On / IPM
47
Reserved 1
48
Reserved 2
480 IPM
Flutter
PGM Code: 235 – PPP Attributes
1
PPP Usage
2
PPP Destination
3
User ID 1
4
User Password 1
5
User ID 2
6
User Password 2
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Station
PGM Code: 236 – Mobile Attributes
1
Mobile Flash Digit
Max 2 Digit
*
2
Mobile Input Time
01-20
5
EN/DIS
DISABLE
PGM Code: 237 – Intercom Busy Digit
1
Step Call
D-27
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
2
Digit ‘1’ Service
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: Call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
3
Digit ‘2’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
4
Digit ‘3’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
5
Digit ‘4’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
6
Digit ‘5’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
7
Digit ‘6’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: Call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
8
Digit ‘7’ Service
0: Not Assign
1: Call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
D-28
Not Assign
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
9
Digit ‘8’ Service
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: Call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
10
Digit ‘9’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
11
Digit ‘0’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
12
Digit ‘*’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
13
Digit ‘#’ Service
0: Not Assign
Not Assign
1: call-Back
2: Camp-On
3: Call Wait
4: Voice Over
5: Intrusion
6: Hunt
PGM Code: 240 – Dial-Tone Digit Table
Dummy dial-Tone Digit
Max 6 Digits
PGM Code: 241 – Executive / Secretary Assign
1
Executive Number
Station
2
Secretary 1-3
1-3 Station
3
ICM Call to Exec.
0: Secretary
Secretary
1: Sec if Exec DND
4
CO Call To Exec.
0: Secretary
Secretary
1: Sec if Exec DND
5
Call Executive
0: Off
Off
1: First Sec DND
2: All Sec DND
6
Sec. Choice
0: First Idle
First Idle
1: Longest Idle
7
Message Wait Station
0: Executive
Executive
1: First Secretary
PGM Code: 242 – Executive Access
Executive / Executive Access
Each Exec EN/DIS
PPTP Attributes
D-29
All DISABLE
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
PPTP Server Address
RANGE
PPTP ID
Max 24 Ch
PPTP Password
Max 24 Ch
PPTP Service CLI
DEFAULT
REMARK
Max 32 Ch
Max 23 Digits
TABLE D-8 TABLE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 250 – Toll Exception Table
RANGE
1
Allow Table (Index 001-100)
Max 16 Digits
2
Deny Table (Index 001-100)
Max 16 Digits
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM Code: 251 – Digit Conversion Table
Digit Conversion Table 1-9
Each Table Index 001-300
1
Apply Time Type
0: Unconditional
Unconditional
1: Follow
Day/Night/Timed
2: Follow LCR
2
Dialed Digit
Max 16 Digits
3
Unconditional Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is
4
Day Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
“Unconditional”
Day/Night/Timed”
5
Night Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
6
Timed Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
7
Day1-Time1 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
Day/Night/Timed”
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
Day/Night/Timed”
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
8
Day1-Time2 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
9
Day1-Time3 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
10
Day2-Time1 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
11
Day2-Time2 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
12
Day2-Time3 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
13
Day3-Time1 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
14
Day3-Time2 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
15
Day3-Time3 Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
When Apply Time Type is “Follow
LCR”
PGM Code: 252 – Digit Conversion Option
Digit Conversion Table 1-9
1
Display Conversion Digit
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
2
Print Conversion Digit
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 253 – System Time Table
System Time Table 1-9
1
Time Zone Comment
MAX 32 Ch
D-30
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
SUB-MENU
Time Zone
RANGE
Issue 1.0
DEFAULT
System Time /
GNT Time
3
Daylight Saving Time
4
Ring Mode
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: Day
Day
1: Night
2: Timed
5
Auto Ring Mode
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 254 – Weekly Time Table
Weekly Time Table 1-9
1
Monday
Flex1: Day Start Time
09:00
Flex2:Night Start Time
18:00
Flex3:Timed Start Time
Flex4:Timed End Time
2
Tuesday
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
Workday
Flex1: Day Start Time
09:00
Flex2:Night Start Time
18:00
Flex3:Timed Start Time
Flex4:Timed End Time
3
Wednesday
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
Workday
Flex1: Day Start Time
09:00
Flex2:Night Start Time
18:00
Flex3:Timed Start Time
Flex4:Timed End Time
4
Thursday
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
Workday
Flex1: Day Start Time
09:00
Flex2:Night Start Time
18:00
Flex3:Timed Start Time
Flex4:Timed End Time
5
Friday
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
Workday
Flex1: Day Start Time
09:00
Flex2:Night Start Time
18:00
Flex3:Timed Start Time
Flex4:Timed End Time
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
6
Saturday
Workday
Flex1: Day Start Time
Flex2:Night Start Time
Flex3:Timed Start Time
00:00
Flex4:Timed End Time
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
7
Sunday
Holiday
Flex1: Day Start Time
Flex2:Night Start Time
Flex3:Timed Start Time
00:00
Flex4:Timed End Time
Flex5: Wok / Holiday
Holiday
PGM Code: 255 – LCR Time Table
LCR Time Table 1-9
1
Day Zone Definition
Zone1 / Zone2 / zone3
Monday
Zone 1
Tuesday
Zone 1
Wednesday
Zone 1
Thursday
Zone 1
Friday
Zone 1
Saturday
Zone 1
Sunday
Zone 1
D-31
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
SUB-MENU
Day Zone 1
Issue 1.0
RANGE
Flex1: Time Zone1
DEFAULT
00:00
Flex1: Time Zone2
Flex1: Time Zone3
3
Day Zone 2
Flex1: Time Zone1
00:00
Flex1: Time Zone2
Flex1: Time Zone3
4
Day Zone 3
Flex1: Time Zone1
00:00
Flex1: Time Zone2
Flex1: Time Zone3
PGM Code: 256 – Holiday Time Table
Holiday Table 1-9
Each Table Index 01-50
1
Lunar Calendar
2
Holiday Date
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 257 – System Speed dial
Speed Dial Table Index 2000 – 3999
1
System Speed Dial
2
System Speed Name
Max 32 Digits
3
Toll Free
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
4
Tenant Number
1-9(MG-300)
1
Max 16 Ch
1-5(MG-100)
PGM Code: 258 – Emergency Code Table
Emergency Table Index 01-50
1
Dialed Digit
Max 16 Digits
2
Changed Digit
Max 16 Digits
3
Tenant number
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
PGM Code: 259 – Announcement Table
Announcement Table Index 001-100
First
1:VMIB Slot
2:Announce Num
Second
1:VMIB Slot
Third
1:VMIB Slot
Fourth
1:VMIB Slot
CCR
1-100
2:Announce Num
2:Announce Num
2:Announce Num
PGM Code: 260 – CCRTable
CCR Table Index 001-100
1
Digit ‘1’
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
D-32
Not Assign
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
SUB-MENU
Digit ‘2’
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
3
Digit ‘3’
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
4
Digit ‘4’
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
5
Digit ‘5’
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
6
Digit ‘6’
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
D-33
Not Assign
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
7
SUB-MENU
Digit ‘7’
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
8
Digit ‘8’
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
9
Digit ‘9’
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
10
Digit ‘0’
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
11
Digit ‘*’
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
D-34
Not Assign
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
12
SUB-MENU
Digit ‘#’
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Not Assign
Not Assign
Station Number
Station Group
CCR
CCR Drop
System Speed
Conference Room
Attendant Call
VMIB Access
Networking Num
Digits
PGM Code: 262 – ICLID Table
ICLID Table Index 001-250
1
ICLID Number
Max 24 Digits
2
ICLID Name
3
Incoming CO Group Number
4
Day Index
1 – 80
5
Night Index
1 – 80
6
Timed Index
7
Tenant Number
Max 16 Ch
1 - 72
1 – 80
1-9(MG-300)
1
1-5(MG-100)
PGM Code: 263 – CLI Conversion Table
CLI Table 1-9
Each Table Index 01-50
1
Original CLI
Max 24 Digits
2
Converted CLI
Max 24 Digits
PGM Code: 264 – Tone Frequency/Cadence Table
19 Tone Source is Defined with Each
Frequency and Cadence.
Refer to 2.3.7.14 Tone Port Table
PGM Code: 265 – Ring Table
1
Normal Call Ring (Station)
st:
5
n
6
rd
7
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
th
4 Ring Port 1-15
2
Normal Call Ring (CO)
9
n
10
rd
11
th
12
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
3
Recall Ring (Station)
st:
5
n
6
rd
7
th
8
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
4
Recall Ring (CO)
st:
9
n
10
rd
11
th
12
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
5
Forward Call Ring (Station)
8
st:
1 Ring Port 1-15
st:
5
n
6
rd
7
th
8
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
D-35
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
6
SUB-MENU
RANGE
Forward Call Ring (CO)
9
n
10
rd
11
th
12
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
Transfer Call Ring (Station)
st:
5
n
6
rd
7
th
8
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
8
Transfer Call Ring (CO)
st:
9
n
10
rd
11
th
12
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
9
Call Back Indication Ring
st:
1
n
1
rd
1
4 Ring Port 1-15
th
1
st:
1
n
1
rd
1
4 Ring Port 1-15
th
1
st:
1
n
1
rd
1
4 Ring Port 1-15
th
1
st:
5
n
5
rd
5
4 Ring Port 1-15
th
5
st:
5
n
5
rd
5
4 Ring Port 1-15
th
5
st:
5
n
5
rd
5
4 Ring Port 1-15
th
5
st:
1
n
1
rd
1
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
10
Wakeup Indication Ring
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
11
Revertible Ring
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
12
Paging Call Ring
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
13
Handsfree Answer Ring
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
14
Command Call Ring
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
15
Alert Ring
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
th
4 Ring Port 1-15
16
Alarm Ring
13
n
13
rd
13
3 Ring Port 1-15
th
Fault Ring
4 Ring Port 1-15
13
st:
14
n
14
rd
14
th
14
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
3 Ring Port 1-15
4 Ring Port 1-15
REMARK
1
st:
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
17
DEFAULT
st:
1 Ring Port 1-15
2 Ring Port 1-15
7
Issue 1.0
PGM Code: 266 – Ring Frequency/Cadence Table
15 Ring Source is Defined with Each
Frequency and Cadence (refer to
2.3.7.15 Ring Port Table)
PGM Code: 269 – Voice Mail Dial Table
D-36
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
1
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
Voice Mail 1 - Put
1:Prefix:
P#
2:Suffix
2
Voice Mail 2 - Get
1:Prefix:
REMARK
Max 12 Digits
0~9, *, #, P(Pause), F(Flash)
P##
2:Suffix
3
Voice Mail 3 - Busy
1:Prefix:
P#*3P
2:Suffix
4
Voice Mail 4 - No Answer
1:Prefix:
P#*4P
2:Suffix
5
Voice Mail 5 – Error
1:Prefix:
P#*5P
2:Suffix
6
Voice Mail 6 – DND
1:Prefix:
P#*6P
2:Suffix
7
Voice Mail 7
1:Prefix:
8
Voice Mail 8
1:Prefix:
9
Voice Mail 9 - Disconnect
2:Suffix
2:Suffix
****
TABLE D-9 TENANT DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 270 – ATD Group Assignment
1
Group Type
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Terminal
Terminal
REMARK
1: Circular
2: Ring
3: Longest Idle
2
Group Name
3
CO Attendant Number
Max 16 Ch
Station
4
Member
Station
100
0. Normal
Normal
PGM Code: 271 – ATD Group Attributes I
1
Greeting Tone Type
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
2
Greeting Play Timer
3
Greeting Tone No
4
Greeting Prompt/Announcement Table
000-180
0
01-19
4
1sec
001-255
No
5
Greeting Repeat Count
000-100
3
6
Greeting Repeat Delay Timer
000-100
0
7
Queuing Tone Type
0. Normal
INT MOH
1sec
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
8
Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer
9
Queuing Tone No
10
Queuing Prompt/Announcement Table
010-300
30
1sec
01-19
001-255
No
11
Queuing Repeat Count
000-100
3
12
Queuing Repeat Delay Timer
000-100
0
PGM Code: 272 – ATD Group Attributes II
D-37
1sec
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
1
SUB-MENU
Call In Greeting
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0.After Greeting
In Greeting
REMARK
1. In Greeting
2
Max Queue Count
3
Forward Type
00-99
5
0. NOT USED
NOT USED
1. UNCOND
2. Q Overflow
3. Time out
4. All
4
Apply Time Type
0. ALL
ALL
1. DAY
2. NIGHT
3. TIMED
5
Forward Destination
6
Wrap-Up Timer
000-600
5
100msec
7
Member No-Answer Timer
50-600
150
100msec
8
Attendant Call by Station Number
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
PGM Code: 275 -Night ATD Group Assignment
1
Group Type
0: Terminal
Terminal
1: Circular
2: Ring
3: Longest Idle
2
Group Name
3
Member
Max 16 Ch
Station
PGM Code: 276 – Night ATD Group Attributes I
1
Greeting Tone Type
0. Normal
Normal
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
2
Greeting Play Timer
3
Greeting Tone No
4
Greeting Prompt/Announcement Table
000-180
0
01-19
4
1sec
001-255
No
5
Greeting Repeat Count
000-100
6
Greeting Repeat Delay Timer
000-100
3
0
7
Queuing Tone Type
0. Normal
INT MOH
1sec
1. Prompt
2. Annc
3. INT MOH
4. EXT MOH
8
Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer
9
Queuing Tone No
10
010-300
30
1sec
01-19
Queuing Prompt/Announcement Table
001-255
No
11
Queuing Repeat Count
000-100
3
12
Queuing Repeat Delay Timer
000-100
0
0.After Greeting
In Greeting
PGM Code: 277 – Night ATD Group Attributes II
1
Call In Greeting
1. In Greeting
2
Max Queue Count
00-99
D-38
5
1sec
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
3
Forward Type
0. NOT USED
NOT USED
REMARK
1. UNCOND
2. Q Overflow
3. Time out
4. All
4
Apply Time Type
0. ALL
ALL
1. DAY
2. NIGHT
3. TIMED
5
Forward Destination
6
Wrap-Up Timer
000-600
10
100msec
7
Member No-Answer Timer
50-600
150
100msec
PGM Code: 280 – Tenant Attributes I
1
Tenant Name
2
Tenant Name Display
3
Tenant Time Table Index
Max 16 Ch
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
1-9
1
4
ACNR Retry Count
0-5
3
5
Wake Up Retry Count
0-5
3
6
Wake Up Retry Time
00-20
1
7
Auth Retry Count
8
Multi-Call Forward Service Count
0-5
3
01-10
5
PGM Code: 281 – Tenant Attributes II
1
Conference Member Manual Add
2
Redial Method
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
0: One Touch All
List Dial
1: One Touch Log
Phone
2: List Dial
3
Dial Digit Process
0: Type 1
Type 3
1: Type 2
Type1: Restrict ->
Convert ->
2: Type 3
CO Seize
Type2:Convert ->
Co Seize ->
Restrict All Digit
Type3:Convert ->
CO Seize ->
Restrict External number
4
5
Transfer CO Call to COS 0 Station
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
Add CO Access Code to Incoming Call
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
1: G.711
G.711
Log
6
Codec Type
2: G.723
3: G.729
4: G.722
7
Backlight Option
0.All Off
All Off
1.Day On
2.Night On
3.Timed On
4.D/N On
5.D/T On
6.N/T On
7.All On
PGM Code: 283 – Tenant Group Access
Between Tenant Group Access
EN/DIS
PGM Code: 284 – CO Call Restriction I
D-39
All DISABLE
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
1
SUB-MENU
Restriction (Normal CO Line)
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: No Restriction
No Restriction
REMARK
1: All Call
2: Long /
International Call
2
Restriction (Dedicated CO Line)
0: No Restriction
No Restriction
1: All Call
2: Long /
International Call
3
Service After Restriction Time (Local
Call)
0: No Restriction
No Restriction
1: All Call
2: Long /
International Call
4
Service After Restriction Time (Long
Distance Call)
0: No Restriction
No Restriction
1: All Call
2: Long /
International Call
5
Service After Restriction Time
(International Call)
0: No Restriction
No Restriction
1: All Call
2: Long /
International Call
6
Service After Restriction Time
(Dedicated Call)
0: No Restriction
No Restriction
1: All Call
2: Long /
International Call
PGM Code: 285 – CO Call Restriction II
1
Tone Repeat Time (Local Call)
10-254
20
1sec
2
Tone Repeat Time (Long Call)
10-254
20
1sec
3
Tone Repeat Time (International Call)
10-254
20
1sec
Tone Repeat Time (Dedicated Call)
10-254
20
1sec
Forced Disconnection Time (Local
10-60
15
1sec
4
5
Call)
6
Forced Disconnection Time (Long Call)
10-60
15
1sec
7
Forced Disconnection Time
(International Call)
10-60
15
1sec
8
Forced Disconnection Time (Dedicated
Call)
10-60
15
1sec
9
Call Restriction Time (Local Call)
1-100
3
1min
10
Call Restriction Time (Long Call)
1-100
3
1min
11
Call Restriction Time (International
Call)
1-100
3
1min
12
Call Restriction Time (Dedicated Call)
1-100
3
1min
PGM Code: 286 – Local Call Prefix Table
Local Prefix Table Index 01-50
1
Local Call Prefix Value
Max 4 Digits
PGM Code: 287 – Long Call Prefix Table
Long Prefix Table Index 01-50
1
Long Call Prefix Value
Max 4 Digits
PGM Code: 288 – International Call Prefix
International Prefix Table Index 01-50
1
International Call Prefix Value
Max 4 Digits
PGM Code: 290 – Tone Table
D-40
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
1
SUB-MENU
1st Dial Tone
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
Tone Type
Normal
Tone Type:
Time
10 sec
1: Normal
Tone Number
10
2: Prompt
3: Announcement
4: Internal MOH
5: External MOH
6: VMIB MOH 1
7: VMIB MOH 2
8: VMIB MOH 3
9: VMIB MOH 4
10: SLT MOH 1
11: SLT MOH 2
12: SLT MOH 3
13: SLT MOH 4
14: SLT MOH 5
Tone Number: Index of Tone
Frequency Table(PGM264) or
Prompt Announcement Number
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
2nd Dial Tone
CO Dial Tone
DISA Dial Tone
LCR Virtual Tone
Digit Conversion Virtual Tone
Password Dial Tone
Internal Busy Tone
External Busy Tone
CO Line Busy Tone
Uncompleted Dial Error Tone
DOD Restriction Tone
Internal No-Answer Tone
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
11
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
17
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
10
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
17
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
17
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
10
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
11
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
16
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
17
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
15
D-41
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
SUB-MENU
External No-Answer Tone
Internal Vacant Error Tone
External Vacant Error Tone
Call Duration Restriction Tone
Anonymous Call Restriction Tone
Error Tone (All the other cases)
Relative Blocking
Relative Line Lock Out
Relative Do Not Disturb
Relative Absence
Relative Out of Order
External Relative Out of Order
External Relative Outgoing Restriction
Relative Hot Desk Logout
28
29
30
31
Howling Tone
st
1 Ring Back Tone
nd
2 Ring Back Tone
CO Ring Back Tone
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
15
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
54
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
54
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
5 sec
Tone Number
28
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
20 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
19
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
D-42
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
SUB-MENU
Recall Ring Back Tone
Zone Paging Call Ring Back Tone
Command Call Ring Back Tone
Alert Message Wait
Alert Do not Disturb
Alert Call Forward
Alert Absence
Camp on Alarm
Conference Alarm
Conference Join
Call Wait Alarm
Break In Alarm
Conference Room In
Conference Room Out
Call Duration Restriction Alarm
Confirm Tone
Single Error Tone
Transfer Hold Tone
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Normal
Time
5 sec
Tone Number
11
Tone Type
Normal
Time
5 sec
Tone Number
11
Tone Type
Normal
Time
5 sec
Tone Number
11
Tone Type
Normal
Time
5 sec
Tone Number
11
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
8
Tone Type
Normal
Time
3 sec
Tone Number
9
Tone Type
Internal MOH
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
D-43
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
50
SUB-MENU
Transfer Hold Tone (Station)
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Tone Type
Internal MOH
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
51
52
53
54
55
Camp On Hold Tone (CO)
Camp On Hold Tone (Station)
Call Wait Hold Tone (CO)
Call Wait Hold Tone (Station)
Normal Hold Tone (CO)
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Internal MOH
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
56
Normal Hold Tone (Station)
Tone Type
Internal MOH
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
57
Normal Hold Tone (Attendant)
Tone Type
Internal MOH
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Call Park Hold Tone
Call Park Hold Tone (Station)
IC Auto Hold Tone
IC Auto Hold Tone (Attendant)
Command Call Answer Tone
R2 Normal Outgoing Tone
R2 Off-Net Call Forward Tone
Wake-up Answer Tone
Service Set Tone
DISA Retry Tone
Tone Type
Normal
Time
120 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
120 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
30 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
14
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
4
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
12
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
Tone Port 8
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
5 sec
Tone Number
5
D-44
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
SUB-MENU
68
69
70
71
ICLID Restrict Tone
Auto Call Answer Alert Tone
VM Interaction Confirm Tone
Authorization Code Dial Tone
72
73
Tenant Dial Tone
Two-way Record Warning Tone
Issue 1.0
RANGE
DEFAULT
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
1
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
8
Tone Type
Prompt
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
10
Tone Type
Normal
Time
10 sec
Tone Number
10
Tone Type
Normal
Time
1 sec
Tone Number
13
REMARK
TABLE D-10 BOARD DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 300 –ISDN Board Attributes
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
PRIB CRC Check
0:Disable / 1:Enable
2
PRIB Line Mode
0:TE / 1: NT
3
BRIB TEI Mode Port1
0:Fixed / 1:Auto
AUTO
4
BRIB TEI Mode Port2
0:Fixed / 1:Auto
AUTO
5
BRIB TEI Mode Port3
0:Fixed / 1:Auto
AUTO
6
BRIB TEI Mode Port4
0:Fixed / 1:Auto
AUTO
REMARK
ENABLE
TE
PGM Code: 301 –ISDN Clock Priority
ISDN BRD CLOCK PRIORITY
Slot No.
NET
PGM Code: 305 –VOIB/VMIB Board Attributes
1
IP Address
IP Address
10. 10. 10. #
(# : slot number)
2
Router IP Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
3
Subnet Mask
IP Address
255.255.255.0
4
DHCP Usage
0: OFF / 1: ON
5
T38 Usage
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
6
RTP Security
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
7
VLAN
0-4096, none
none
8
Priority
0-7
0
9
Diffserv
0-63
0
OFF
TABLE D-11 VOICE NETWORK
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 320 –Networking Attributes
RANGE
DEFAULT
1
NET Enable
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
2
NET CNIP Enable
0: OFF / 1: ON
ON
3
NET CONP Enable
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
D-45
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
4
NET Signal Method
0: FACILITY / 1:UUS
FACILITY
5
NET CC Retain
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
6
NET BLF Usage
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
7
TCP Port for BLF
9000-9999
9000
8
UDP Port for BLF
9000-9999
9001
9
Duration of BLF STS
01-99
10
BLF Manager IP Address
10
0.0.0.0
PGM Code: 321 –Networking Numbering
1
Numbering Plan Type
NET / TRANSIT
2
Numbering Plan Code
8digits
3
Outgoing CO Group No
01-72
4
AND Digit
10 digits
5
Digit Repeat
0: OFF / 1: ON
6
Digit Sending Mode
1:ENBLOCK / 0:OVERLAP
7
CPN Information
8-1~4
BLF Destination System IP Address
NET
OFF
OVERLAP
0.0.0.0
9
BLF Destination System Port
0000 ~ 9999
10
Firewall Routing
0: OFF / 1: ON
9500
ON
TABLE D-12 T-NET DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 330 –T-Net Attribute
1
TNET Enable
RANGE
0: OFF / 1: ON
DEFAULT
REMARK
OFF
PGM Code: 331 –CM Attribute
1
Register Enable
0: OFF / 1: ON
2
IP Address
IPv4 address
ON
3
IPKTS Port number
0001-9999
5588
4
Total No of Ports
000-999
000
5
Polling Count
00-99
05
6
Polling Interval
00-99
02
0.0.0.0
PGM Code: 333 –FoPSTN Attribute
1
Enable FoPSTN
2
Initialize FoPSTN
0: OFF / 1: ON
3
Index
1-100 (MG-100)
3-1
Numbering Plan
Max 16
3-2
CO Group
OFF
1-200 (MG-300)
1-24 (MG-100)
1-72 (MG-300)
3-3
Tel Number
Max 10
PGM Code: 334 –T-Net Board Attribute
1
TNET Enable
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
PGM Code: 335 –IP-Phone T-Net Enable
1
TNET Enable
TABLE D-13 H.323 DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 360 –H.323 Routing Attribute
1
Digit
RANGE
Max 8 digits
D-46
DEFAULT
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
2
SUB-MENU
Issue 1.0
RANGE
Destination IP Address
DEFAULT
REMARK
0.0.0.0
PGM Code: 361 –H.323 Call Attribute
1
H.323 Setup Mode
0: Normal / 1: Fast
2
H.323 Tunneling Mode
0: OFF / 1: ON
3
H.323 DTMF Path
0: Inband / 1: RFC2833 /
4
DiffServ
0~63
5
First Codec Type
Not Use / G.711U / G.711A
6
Second Codec Type
7
Third Codec Type
FAST
ON
Inband
2:out
4
G.711A
/ G.729 / G.723A
Not Use / G.711U / G.711A
Not Use
/ G.729 / G.723A
Not Use / G.711U / G.711A
Not Use
/ G.729 / G.723A
8
Fourth Codec Type
Not Use / G.711U / G.711A
9
GateKeeper USED
0: OFF / 1: ON
Not Use
/ G.729 / G.723A
OFF
PGM Code: 362 –H.323 Incoming ATTR
1
From IP Address
2
Incoming CO Group Number
0.0.0.0
01 ~ 72
PGM Code: 363 –GK Attribute
1
GateKeeper
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
2
RAS Light RRQ Usage
0: OFF / 1: ON
OFF
3
Multicast GateKeeper IP Address
IP Address
4
Multicase GateKeeper Port
IP Port # (0-9999)
0.0.0.0
5
Unicast GateKeeper IP Address
IP Address
6
Unicast GateKeeper Port
IP Port # (0-9999)
1719
7
Keep Alive Time
1-1000
120
8
Gateway Prefix
MAX 25 Digits
9
H.323 Gateway ID
MAX 129 Digits
0
0.0.0.0
TABLE D-14 SIP CO DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
Web Only: –SIP CO Basic Registration
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
Main Proxy Address
Main Proxy Port
1024 – 9999
5060
Main Domain Name
Proxy Type
Normal / Dacom / KT
Web Only: –SIP CO Additional Registration
User ID Start Index
User ID End Index
Main Outbound Proxy Address
Main Outbound Proxy Port
1024 – 9999
5060
1024 – 9999
5060
Sub Proxy Address
Sub Proxy Port
Sub Domain Name
Sub Outbound Proxy Address
D-47
Normal
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
Sub Outbound Proxy Port
1024 – 9999
5060
Connection Mode
UDP / TCP / TLS
UDP
Registration Timer
60-86400
3600
100rel Support
ON/OFF
OFF
Session Timer Support
ON/OFF
OFF
Max Session Timer
180-3600
1800
Min Session Timer
60-150
Use 181 Message
ON/OFF
OFF
Use RPORT
ON/OFF
OFF
P-Asserted-Identity
NOT USE / USE
NOT USE
DTMF Send Mode
IN / OUT / RFC2833
RFC2833
90
Web Only: –SIP CO Codec
First Codec Type
Not Use / 711U/A/729/723A
G.711A
Second Codec Type
Not Use / 711U/A/729/723A
Not Use
Third Codec Type
Not Use / 711U/A/729/723A
Not Use
Fourth Codec Type
Not Use / 711U/A/729/723A
Not Use
Web Only: –SIP CO User ID Table
Registration User ID
Authentication User ID
Authentication User Password
Registration
YES / NO
NO
Usage
YES / NO
NO
TABLE D-15 SIP STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
Web Only: –SIP STA Basic Registration
RANGE
DEFAULT
User ID
Authentication ID
Password
Web Only: –SIP STA Additional Registration
Station Number
Registering Mode
Registration Status
Manual / User Register
Not Registered / Registered
Manual
Not Registered
IP Address
IP Port
0
Device NAT Usage
NO NAT / NAT
Transfer Mode
UDP / TCP / TLS
SIP Phone Type
Normal / MOIMSTONE / IP-
No NAT
UDP
Normal
1535
Registration Timer
Keep Alive Usage
3600
ON/OFF
OFF
Check Message Send Timer
10-3600
30
Retry Count
3-10
5
Web Only: –SIP Station Service
407 Authentication
ON/OFF
100rel Support
ON/OFF
OFF
Session Timer Support
ON/OFF
OFF
D-48
OFF
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
BTN
Issue 1.0
SUB-MENU
RANGE
Max Session Timer
180-3600
Min Session Timer
60-150
DEFAULT
REMARK
1800
90
TABLE D-16 ZONE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
Web Only: –Zone Attribute
RANGE
Nation Code
DEFAULT
REMARK
Same with system's nation
Memo
Codec Type
Tenant Codec / G.711 /
Tenant Codec
G.723 / G.729 / G.722 / Not
Assign
RTP Relay Rule
Automatic / Follow Relay
Automatic
Group
VOIB Slot for RTP Relay
VOIB Slot
VMIB Slot
VMIB Slot
Peer To Peer
Disable/Enable
Enable
Web Only: –Zone RTP Relay Group
Force To RTP Relay
00 ~ 63
32
Web Only: –Inter Zone Attribute
Codec Type
Station Codec / G.711 /
Station Codec
G.723 / G.729
RTP Rule
If Need / Always Not /
If Need
Forced To Do
Src. RTP Relay VOIB Slot
Dest. RTP Relay VOIB Slot
Web Only: –Station Zone Attribute
Zone No
1-9
RTP Relay Group
N/A, 01 ~ 15
1
Codec Type
Follow Zone / G.711 /
N/A
Follow Zone
G.723 / G.729 / G.722
TABLE D-17 SNMP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
Web Only: –SNMP Data
RANGE
1
SNMP Service
2
SNMP Port
3
Read Only Community
4 ~ 16 characters
4
Read Write Community
4 ~ 16 characters
5
Trap Community
4 ~ 16 characters
6
Trap Destination
7
Message Type
DEFAULT
ON/OFF
IP address
Notify/Inform/Trap
D-49
Notify
REMARK
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
TABLE D-18 GAIN AND CADENCE CONTROL
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM Code: 400-407 –TDM Gain (DKT/SLT/DECT/IP-Phone/ACO/DCO/VMIB/External Page RX GAIN)
1
DKT
00 ~ 63
26/32/26/26/40/26/21/26
2
SLT
00 ~ 63
22/32/33/33/32/26/21/26
3
DECT
00 ~ 63
26/32/26/26/31/26/26/26
4
IP-Phone
00 ~ 63
26/33/26/26/33/33/29/32
5
ACO
00 ~ 63
26/32/38/33/32/15/23/28
6
DCO
00 ~ 63
33/44/33/33/38/32/32/37
7
VMIB
00 ~ 63
29/40/29/29/37/32/32/37
8
DTMF
00 ~ 63
8/28/8/8/37/32/32/32
9
TONE
00 ~ 63
32/38/37/32/37/32/32/32
10
MUSIC
00 ~ 63
29/40/29/29/37/32/32/32
PGM Code: 415 –DSP Rx Gain
1
DTMF/A
00 ~ 63
32
2
DTMF/D
00 ~ 63
32
3
CPT
00 ~ 63
32
4
CID/FSK
00 ~ 63
32
5
CID/D
00 ~ 63
32
6
CID/RUS
00 ~ 63
36
7
SMS/TRK
00 ~ 63
32
8
SMS/SLT
00 ~ 63
32
PGM Code: 420~426 –Device(SLTM/DTIM(HS)/DTIM(HF)/IP-Phone(HS)/IP-Phone(HF)/WIT/VOIB) RX RTP Gain
1
SLTM
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
2
DTIM(HS)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
3
DTIM(HF)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
4
IP-Phone(HS)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
5
IP-Phone(HF)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
6
WIT
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
7
VOIB
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
PGM Code: 430~436 –Device(SLTM/DTIM(HS)/DTIM(HF)/IP-Phone(HS)/IP-Phone(HF)/WIT/VOIB) TX RTP Gain
1
SLTM
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
2
DTIM(HS)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
3
DTIM(HF)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
4
IP-Phone(HS)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
5
IP-Phone(HF)
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
6
WIT
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
7
VOIB
00 ~ 63
34/34/34/34/34/34/34
PGM Code: 440 –SLT Ring Cadence
1
CO Ring
Flex 1-10
2
ICM Ring
Flex 1-10
PGM Code: 441 –ACNR Tone Cadence
1
Dial Tone Cadence
Flex 1(ON)/Flex 2(OFF)
75/0
2
Ringback Tone Cadence
Flex 1(ON)/Flex 2(OFF)
50/200
3
Busy Tone Cadence
Flex 1(ON)/Flex 2(OFF)
25/25
4
Error Tone Cadence
Flex 1(ON)/Flex 2(OFF)
5/5
5
LCR Dial Tone Cadence
Flex 1(ON)/Flex 2(OFF)
70/0
D-50
IPECS
- MG Release 1
Admin & Maintenance
Issue 1.0
TABLE D-19 DECT DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 0# –DECT Registration
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
1
Wtu Subscribe Enable
Station Number
2
Wtu Unsubscribe
Station Number
3
AC Code
4
PARK (view)
5
Wtu User Authenticate
6
PARK
REMARK
Station Number
7
Wtu Subs All Data Erase
8
Wtu Subscription Erase
9
Wtu (Un)Subscription Range (view)
10
DECT Mobility
Station Number
Station Number
PGM Code: 492 –WTIM DECT Attribute
1
AUTO CALL RLS
2
BASE FAULT ALARM
ON/OFF
OFF
Enable/Disable
Disable
TABLE D-20 GREEN MODE
BTN
SUB-MENU
Web Only: –Green Mode Activation
Power Save Mode
RANGE
DEFAULT
DISABLE/ENABLE
DISABLE
Web Only: –Green Mode Time Setting
Monday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
Tuesday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
Wednesday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
Thursday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
Friday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
Saturday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
Sunday Power ON/OFF Time
0000 ~ 2359
TABLE D-21 INITIALIZATION
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM Code: 499 -Initialization
1
All Database
2
System Reset
3
Station Data
4
Station Button Data
5
CO Line Data
6
Station Group Data
7
System Data
8
SMDR Data
9
System Timer
10
Table Data
11
Tenant Data
12
Networking Data
13
SIP Data
14
Hotdesk Logout
REMARKS
D-51
REMARK
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement